national mine action standards lebanon complete …€¦ · national mine action standards iss: 1...

NATIONAL MINE

ACTION STANDARDS

LEBANON

COMPLETE DOCUMENTATION

NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS ISS: 1 REV: 1 Page: 1 of 5

SUBJECT: MAIN INDEX TABLE OF CONTENTS

DOC: NMAS August 01, 2010

LIST OF NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS

Filename Form Title NMAS Title/Front Cover Page Introduction Objective and Summary of Document Foreword Foreword from the Director of the Lebanon Mine Action Center Glossary.doc Glossary of Mine Action Terms, Definitions & Abbreviations Chapter 01.doc Chapter 01 Mine/UXO Survey & Dangerous Area Marking Chapter 02.doc Chapter 02 Site Preparation & Setting Out Chapter 03.doc Chapter 03 Mine Clearance & Battle Area Clearance Marking Systems Chapter 04.doc Chapter 04 Manual Mine Clearance Chapter 05.doc Chapter 05 House Clearance Chapter 06.doc Chapter 06 Demolitions of Mines & UXO’s Chapter 07.doc Chapter 07 Medical Support & Casualty Evacuation Chapter 08.doc Chapter 08 Reporting Chapter 09.doc Chapter 09 Accreditation & Quality Assurance Chapter 10.doc Chapter 10 Mechanical Assisted Clearance Operations Chapter 11.doc Chapter 11 The Use of Mine Detection Dogs Chapter 12.doc Chapter 12 Communications Chapter 13.doc Chapter 13 Transport & Storage of Explosives Chapter 14.doc Chapter 14 Battle Area Clearance Chapter 15.doc Chapter 15 Training & Qualifications Chapter 16.doc Chapter 16 Investigation of mine/UXO Accident & Serious Incidents Chapter 17.doc Chapter 17 Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA) Chapter 18.doc Chapter 18 Environmental Management Chapter 19.doc Chapter 19 Community Liaison Chapter 20.doc Chapter 20 Safety & Occupational Health – Demining Worksite Safety Chapter 21.doc Chapter 21 Central Demolition Sites Chapter 22.doc Chapter 22 Personal Protective Equipment Chapter 23.doc Chapter 23 Cancellation of Reported Dangerous Areas/Minefields Chapter 24.doc Chapter 24 Minefield Clearance Methodology Chapter 25.doc Chapter 25 Booby Trap Clearance Methodology Chapter 26.doc Chapter 26 Clearance Site Administration




LIST OF ANNEXES & APPENDIXES TO NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS

Filename Form Title ANNEX A Handover & Formal Declaration Certificate LMAC ANNEX B1 Level 1 / Impact Survey Report ANNEX B2 Level 2 / Technical Survey Report Cover Sheet ANNEX C1 Completion Report ANNEX C2 Suspension Report ANNEX D1 Minefield Report ANNEX D2 Dangerous Area Report ANNEX E1 Mine Accident Report ANNEX E2 Mine Incident Report ANNEX E3 Demining Accident Report ANNEX E4 Demining Incident Report ANNEX F1 Information Management System For Mine Action (IMSMA) Data Request Form ANNEX G1 Weekly Summary Report ANNEX G2 Monthly Summary Report ANNEX H Quality Assurance Weekly Programme ANNEX I1 Accreditation Board Technical Desk Assessment Check List ANNEX I2 Accreditation Board On-Site Assessment Form ANNEX I3 Accreditation Board MDD Sop Desk Assessment Check List ANNEX I4 Accreditation Board MDD Field Assessment Check List ANNEX I5 EOD Accreditation Board On-Site Assessment Form ANNEX I6 BAC Accreditation Board On-Site Assessment Form ANNEX I7 Mechanical Accreditation Board On-Site Assessment Form ANNEX I9 Accreditation Board on Site Assessment Form (Survey) ANNEX I8 Explosive Handler Accreditation Board On-Site Assessment Form ANNEX J1 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Site Set Up ANNEX J2 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Manual Clearance ANNEX J3 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Mechanical Clearance ANNEX J4 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Mine Detecting Dogs ANNEX J5 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Battle Area Clearance ANNEX J6 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Explosive Ordnance Disposal ANNEX J7 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form On-Site Explosive Storage ANNEX J8 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Command & Control ANNEX J9 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Demolitions ANNEX J10 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Medical




LIST OF ANNEXES & APPENDIXES TO NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS

Filename Form Title ANNEX J11 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Site Clearance ANNEX J12 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Organization Training & Evaluation ANNEX J13 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Survey ANNEX J14 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Mine Detecting Dogs Training & Evaluation ANNEX J15 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Non Conformance Report ANNEX J16 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Completion of Clearance Task ANNEX J17 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Explosive Storage ANNEX J18 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Post Clearance QA Sampling ANNEX J19 Quality Assurance Evaluation Form Non Operational Asset ANNEX K1 Casualty Report ANNEX K2 Victim Report ANNEX L Community Liaison Aide Memoire ANNEX L2 Community Liaison Contact List ANNEX M1 Community Liaison (CLO) Community Contact Record Pre Clearance ANNEX M2 Community Liaison (CLO) Community Contact Record During Clearance ANNEX M3 Community Liaison (CLO) Community Contact Record Post Clearance ANNEX M4 Community Liaison (CLO) Contact Supplementary Pre / During & Post Records ANNEX N1 Community Liaison Flowchart ANNEX N2 CLO DA & UXO Reporting Flowchart ANNEX O Community Liaison Final Clearance Certificate ANNEX P Community Liaison Dangerous Area Report ANNEX Q UXO Tasking Request ANNEX R MDD Daily Work Report ANNEX S1 Rapid Response EOD Tasking ANNEX S1 UXO-EOD Completion Report ANNEX T Cancellation Procedure ANNEX T1 Questionnaire for Cancelling a Recorded Minefield - Dangerous Area - Suspect Hazardous Area ANNEX T2 Cancelled Area Report ANNEX T3 Arabic Cancelled Area Report ANNEX T4 Criteria for Internal Cancellation Procedure ANNEX U Spare ANNEX V Town Data Sheet ANNEX W Mine Risk Education Activity Report ANNEX X Site Visitors Operations Brief (Example) ANNEX Y Site Visitors Safety Brief (Example) ANNEX Z Spare APPENDIXES To Chapter 16, Chapter 9 & Chapter 4




LIST OF INTERNATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS Filename Form Title

EDITION 1 & 2 IMAS International Mine Action Standard Directory IMAS\01.10.pdf Guide for the application of IMAS (Ed. 2 Amendments 1,2,3,4 & 5) IMAS\02.10.pdf Guide for the establishment of a mine action programme (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\03.10.pdf Guide to procurement of mine action equipment (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\03.20.pdf The procurement process (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\03.30.pdf Guide to the research of mine action technology (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 &3) IMAS\03.40.pdf Test and evaluation of mine action equipment (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\04.10.pdf Glossary of mine action terms definitions & abbreviations (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\05.10.pdf Information Management Awaiting Endorsement IMAS\06.10.pdf Management of training (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\07.10.pdf Guide for the management of demining operations (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS\07.11.pdf Guide for the management of MRE (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\07.20.pdf Guide for the development & management of mine action contracts (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\07.30.pdf Accreditation of demining organizations and operations (Ed. 2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\07.31.pdf Accreditation of MRE organizations and operations (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\07.40.pdf Monitoring of demining organizations (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS\07.41.pdf Monitoring of MRE programmes and projects (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\07.42.pdf Monitoring of stockpile destruction programmes (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\08.10.pdf General mine action assessment (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS\08.20.pdf Land release (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\08.21.pdf Non-technical survey (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\08.22.pdf Technical survey (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\08.30.pdf Post-clearance documentation (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS\08.40.pdf Marking mine and UXO hazards (Ed. 2 Amendments 1 & 2) IMAS\08.50.pdf Data collection and needs assessment for MRE (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\09.10.pdf Clearance requirements (Ed.2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS\09.11.pdf BAC (Ed. 1 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.20.pdf Guidelines for the use of sampling procedures (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS\09.30.pdf Explosive ordnance disposal (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.40.pdf Guide for the use of MDD (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.41.pdf Operational procedures for mine detection dogs (Ed.2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.42.pdf Operational testing of MDD and handlers (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.43.pdf Remote Explosive Scent Tracing REST (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.44.pdf Guide to occupational health and general dog care (Ed.2 Amendment 1) IMAS\09.50.pdf Mechanical demining (Ed.1 Amendment 1)




LIST OF INTERNATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS Filename Form Title

EDITION 1 & 2 IMAS\10.10.pdf S&OH General requirements (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS\10.20.pdf S&OH demining worksite safety (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2,3, 4 & 5) IMAS\10.30.pdf S&OH PPE (Ed.2 Amendment 1) IMAS\10.40.pdf S&OH Medical support to demining operations (Ed.1 Amendment 1, 2 & 3) IMAS\10.50.pdf S&OH Storage transportation and handling of explosives (Ed 2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS\10.60.pdf S&OH reporting and investigation of demining incidents (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4) IMAS\10.70.pdf S&OH protection of the environment (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS\11.10.pdf Guide for the destruction of stockpiled anti-personnel mines (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS\11.20.pdf Principles & procedures for open burning & open detonation operations Ed.2 Amend 1,2,3 & 4 IMAS\11.30.pdf National planning guidelines for stockpile destruction (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4) IMAS\12.10.pdf Planning for MRE programmes and projects (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\12.20.pdf Implementation of MRE programmes and projects (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS\14.10.pdf Guide for the evaluation of mine action interventions (Ed.1, Amendment 1) IMAS\14.20.pdf Evaluation of MRE programmes and projects (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) Sampling tool for inspection of cleared land in compliance with IMAS 09.20 (Zipped .exe application) Calculation tool for explosion danger areas in compliance with TNMA 10.20 (Zipped .exe application) ISO 51-1999 Safety aspects — Guidelines for their inclusion in standards

LIST OF MINE ACTION TECHNICAL RELATED LINKS www.landminesurvivors.org Landmine Survivor Network http://maic.jmu.edu/ Mine Action Information Centre - James Madison University www.mineaction.org United Nations Mine Action Service www.gichd.ch Geneva International Centre for Humanitarian Demining www.mineactionstandards.org United Nations International Mine Action Standards www.army.mod.uk/royalengineers/org/mitc U.K. Mine Information & Training Centre

http://www.landminesurvivors.org/

http://maic.jmu.edu/

http://www.mineaction.org/

http://www.gichd.ch/

http://www.mineactionstandards.org/

http://www.army.mod.uk/royalengineers/org/mitc

FOREWORD

The National Mine Action Standards (NMAS) for Mine Action in Lebanon enable the Lebanon Mine Action Center (LMAC) to control and coordinate safe and effective Mine Action Operations carried out within Lebanon. For simplicity, the terms ‘Humanitarian Demining Organization’, ‘Demining Organization’, ‘Mine Action Organization’ and Mine / UXO Clearance Organization used in this NMAS are interchangeable and refer to any Organization (government, NGO, military or commercial entity) responsible for implementing Mine Action projects or tasks. The Mine Action Organization may be a prime contractor, subcontractor, consultant or agent. The Organization may be involved in the following activities, for example: Mine / UXO survey, mapping, marking, mine / UXO clearance, community mine action liaison, mine risk education, mine victim assistance and the handover of cleared land.

The aim of this document is to provide Humanitarian Mine Action Organizations with a reference for the conduct of operations. It has been produced incorporating lessons, experiences, and best practices learned locally and in other theatres worldwide.

This document is not intended to replace or replicate Standard Operating Procedures (SOP’s) nor do they absolve Mine Action Organizations from the responsibility to produce their own SOPs. Conversely, these Standards are intended to be used as an aid in developing SOP’s, by detailing the minimum standards and accepted methods for conducting Mine Action operations in Lebanon.

Variations in procedures and methods of operation are to be expected amongst the different Organizations. This NMAS provides an example of practices accepted by the LMAC and a basis for comparison during the Accreditation process. Mine Action Organizations that do not conform to the minimum requirements outlined in this document shall not be accredited by the LMAC to work in Lebanon. The following terms used throughout this document indicate the intended degree of compliance and are to be adhered to by Mine Action Organizations when compiling SOP’s for conducting Mine Action operations in Lebanon:

a. ‘Shall’ is used to indicate requirements, methods or specifications that are to be applied in order to conform to the standard.

b. ‘Should’ is used to indicate the preferred requirements, methods or specifications to be

applied in order to conform to the standard. c. ‘May’ is used to indicate a possible method or course of action.

This document is designed to be a “living” document. The procedures and practices shall be continually reviewed in order to ensure they remain relevant to the current Mine Action situation, and keep up with advances in technology and changes in methodology. This document will be subject to amendments as a result of experience and revised/new procedures.

Where necessary this document meets and exceeds those minimum standards set out in the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS) for Humanitarian Mine Action Operations.

Brigadier-General Mohammad Fehmi

Director Lebanon Mine Action Center (LMAC)

01 August 2010

INTRODUCTION

NMAS

Document: NMAS Issue: 1 Revision: 1 Date: August 01, 2010


SUBJECT: INTRODUCTION


REV LEVEL

REV DATE

DETAILS DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE

Page Para.

1 Aug. 01, 2010 All All Reformatted




Contents 1. BACKGROUND.......................................................................................................................... 3 2. NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS .................................................................................. 3 3. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP) .................................................................... 4 4. ACCREDITATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 4 5. MINE/UXO SURVEYS (Chapter One) ........................................................................................ 5 6. SITE PREPARATION & SETTING OUT (Chapter Two) ............................................................ 5 7. MINE CLEARANCE & BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE MARKING SYSTEMS (Chapter Three) .. 5 8. MANUAL MINE CLEARANCE (Chapter Four) ........................................................................... 5 9. HOUSE CLEARANCE (Chapter Five) ........................................................................................ 6 10. DEMOLITIONS OF MINES AND UXO (Chapter Six) .............................................................. 6 11. MEDICAL SUPPORT & CASUALTY EVACUATION (Chapter Seven) ................................... 6 12. REPORTING (Chapter Eight) ................................................................................................. 6 13. ACCREDITATION & QUALITY ASSURANCE (Chapter Nine) ............................................... 6 14. MECHANICAL ASSISTED DEMINING OPERATIONS (Chapter Ten) ................................... 7 15. THE USE OF MINE DETECTION DOGS (Chapter Eleven) ................................................... 7 16. COMMUNICATIONS (Chapter Twelve) .................................................................................. 7 17. TRANSPORT & STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES (Chapter Thirteen) ........................................ 7 18. BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE (Chapter Fourteen) ................................................................. 8 19. TRAINING & QUALIFICATIONS (Chapter Fifteen) ................................................................. 8 20. INVESTIGATION OF MINE/UXO ACCIDENTS & SERIOUS INCIDENTS (Chapter Sixteen) 8 21. IMSMA (Chapter Seventeen) .................................................................................................. 8 22. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT (Chapter Eighteen) ....................................................... 8 23. COMMUNITY LIAISON (Chapter Nineteen) ........................................................................... 9 24. SAFETY & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH – DEMINING WORKSITE SAFETY (Chapter Twenty) ............................................................................................................................................. 9 25. CENTRAL DEMOLITION SITES (Chapter Twenty One) ........................................................ 9 26. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) (Chapter Twenty Two)................................ 9 27. CANCELLATION OF REPORTED DANGEROUS AREAS/MINEFIELDS (Chapter Twenty Three) ............................................................................................................................................... 9 28. MINEFIELD CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY (Chapter Twenty Four) .................................... 9 29. BOOBY TRAP CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY (Chapter Twenty Five) .............................. 10 30. CLEARANCE SITE ADMINISTRATION (Chapter Twenty Six) ............................................. 10




1. BACKGROUND

1.1. The Lebanon Mine Action Center (LMAC) is responsible to undertake the co-ordination of Mine Action activities including the establishment of National Mine Action Standards (NMAS) for Mine Action, accreditation of the various Mine Action Organizations and quality assurance of such Organizations. These processes include but are not limited to:

a. The establishment of a set of minimum standards for humanitarian mine/UXO

clearance, which will cover aspects concerning safety for the people directly or indirectly involved in the work, the quality of the work, medical evacuation procedures and common denominators in Lebanon, such as minefield marking, reporting, hand-over of cleared land or cleared houses and communications etc.

b. The preparation of operational procedures that detail the practises to be followed. c. Approval of SOP’s and training programmes submitted by the mine/UXO

clearance Organizations. d. The establishment of minimum requirements, which shall be fulfilled in order for

humanitarian demining Organizations to receive accreditation to conduct mine/UXO clearance operations within Lebanon.

e. Quality Assurance (QA) of mine/UXO clearance activities in the field.

1.2. The role of the Lebanon Mine Action Center (LMAC) is to provide a planning, co-

ordination and Quality Assurance capability that ensures mine/UXO clearance is carried out in the most effective, safe and time efficient manner, in accordance with the National Mine Action Standards that are developed from the International Mine Action Standards.

2. NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS

2.1. This NMAS has been written in conjunction with the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS). Where necessary these minimum standards have been enhanced to provide the most appropriate level of safety required for demining operations in Lebanon.

2.2. The NMAS shall be adhered to by all Mine Action Organizations. 2.3. The main purpose of the NMAS is to ensure a high level of safety and quality and that all

elements of the Mine Action programme that promote safety and quality (including good medical evacuation procedures and a satisfactory work output), have been established and are working effectively.

2.4. In most cases, only limited explanations for conducting specific mine/UXO clearance

procedures have been included in the NMAS. These standards however, provide the minimum requirements for conducting recommended and proven clearance methods




safely and effectively. In circumstances where it is deemed that further explanation is required in order for the Organization to implement specific procedures detailed within the standards, reference shall be made to IMAS. In the absence of additional clarification from IMAS, an amendment shall be made to the standards by the LMAC. In circumstances where the Organization intends to conduct specific procedures which are not detailed in the NMAS or IMAS, prior authorization shall be granted by the LMAC. This shall usually follow the inclusion of the procedure in the Organization SOP, submitting of the SOP to the LMAC, training of relevant personnel and on-site assessments conducted by the LMAC.

2.5. It is recognized that specific procedures may differ from each Organization. This is

acceptable, so long as they do not contradict the standards established by the LMAC.

2.6. All amendments made to the NMAS shall be authorized by the LMAC Director. 3. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)

3.1. All Organizations shall provide the relevant SOP in English to the LMAC for written approval prior to accreditation and the LMAC may request that a version is translated into Arabic. The SOP shall specify what type of activity the Organization is prepared to conduct, how they propose to accomplish that goal, and their collective qualifications to conduct such an operation. The role of the LMAC is to ensure that these SOPs are adequate and conform to the NMAS. A key aspect of external QA is to ensure that each Organization works in accordance with their approved SOP.

3.2. The LMAC shall advise the Mine Action Organizations in consultation, if required, of any

amendments to the NMAS and it is the responsibility of the Mine Action Organization to ensure that the SOP is in compliance to the NMAS.

4. ACCREDITATION REQUIREMENTS

4.1. To allow the LMAC to effectively monitor all Mine Action activities conducted in Lebanon and to achieve an accepted standard of competence and operational best practise, all Organizations are required to conform to the necessary accreditation requirements before and during Mine Action activities in Lebanon. For an explanation of the process, see Chapter 9 Accreditation and Quality Assurance.




5. MINE/UXO SURVEYS (Chapter One)

5.1. Mine/UXO survey is a vital component of all mine action activities. The survey work involves a process of information, which will assist in determining the priorities of work.

5.2. A crucial element of the survey work is systemization and centralization of survey

information as well as making the end product presentable and useful for Organizations working with planning and analyzing of mine action and other related aid activities. In Lebanon this is done through the development of a centralized Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA) where all end users will have access to the information through the LMAC.

5.3. The development of a Geographic Information System (GIS) system and database is required in order to manage the information and make it applicable for planning/analyzing purposes. This chapter provides general information about minefield survey and mine/UXO area marking. It also provides standardized survey and completion reports for mine/UXO clearance, refer to Annex A.

6. SITE PREPARATION AND SETTING OUT (Chapter Two)

6.1. A thoroughly prepared plan for the preparation of mine/UXO clearance sites is required in order to ensure safe movement of people in the area during operations. This chapter provides standards for general preparation of mine clearance sites, which include the establishment of designated areas, safety distances, and marking during work.

7. MINE CLEARANCE AND BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE MARKING SYSTEMS (Chapter

Three)

7.1. This chapter will provide standards for temporary marking, semi-permanent marking and permanent marking of areas.

8. MANUAL MINE CLEARANCE (Chapter Four)

8.1. Manual clearance teams are used to clear houses; backyards and mined areas. Manual mine/UXO clearance techniques differ significantly for each Organization and even within the same Organization. This will depend on the conditions at the site such as vegetation, soil content/conductivity and the type of mines/UXO. Dogs can also be used but even here, the techniques differ from Organization to Organization. This chapter gives a recommended, basic procedure and all individual SOP’s are to achieve the minimum standards outlined therein.




9. HOUSE CLEARANCE (Chapter Five)

9.1. This chapter gives guidance and also suggests proven methods of searching and clearing buildings.

10. DEMOLITIONS OF MINES AND UXO (Chapter Six)

10.1. In accordance with these National Mine Action Standards, all mines and UXO found in Lebanon are to be destroyed. This chapter sets minimum safety standards for all demolitions.

11. MEDICAL SUPPORT AND CASUALTY EVACUATION (Chapter Seven)

11.1. Mine/UXO clearance is considered to be a high-risk activity. Hence, proper medical back-up procedures and a medical evacuation plan are key elements in any mine/UXO clearance operation. The standards outlined in this chapter provide suitable procedures for the preparations to be made before the execution of mine/UXO clearance activities, and procedures in the event of accidents and medical evacuation procedures.

12. REPORTING (Chapter Eight)

12.1. The LMAC is responsible for the coordination of all mine action activities in the whole of Lebanon. This requires comprehensive knowledge on all planned and ongoing activities. Standard reports have been developed, which cover aspects such as surveying, work in progress, accidents and completion of mine/UXO clearance. This chapter explains the reporting requirements.

13. ACCREDITATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE (Chapter Nine)

13.1. Accreditation is the procedure by which a demining Organization is formally recognized as competent and able to plan and manage demining activities safely, effectively and efficiently.

13.2. Quality Assurance (QA) is an expression used to describe the whole process providing

confidence that quality requirements will be fulfilled. This accomplished through a systematic process of auditing, surveying or monitoring of work completed or work in progress. Quality Control (QC) is fulfilling quality requirements. This is accomplished through a systematic process of checking, reviewing, inspecting or testing.




13.3. All mine clearance will be carried out in accordance with these NMAS and in accordance

with individual SOP’s that have been submitted and approved by the LMAC. The NMAS have been established to ensure that procedures provide operations with a maximum degree of safety and that once the land has been cleared, it is indeed free of mines or UXO and is safe for use by civilians.

13.4. A comprehensive QA plan for external QA is being developed. This chapter should

therefore be read as a general guideline for the QA/QC requirements to be implemented by the individual Organizations.

14. MECHANICAL ASSISTED DEMINING OPERATIONS (Chapter Ten)

14.1. Mechanically assisted mine clearance operations have been used successfully in Lebanon to increase speed and efficiency of overall mine/UXO clearance. This chapter is reserved for the provision of standards on the concept of operations, guiding principles, evaluation principles and safety. Any Organization intending to utilize mechanically assisted mine/UXO clearance techniques in Lebanon shall submit a detailed set of SOP’s to the LMAC.

15. THE USE OF MINE DETECTION DOGS (Chapter Eleven)

15.1. Dogs have proven to be particularly useful for area reduction, mine verification tasks, and may be used to assist with technical survey tasks. Dogs have also been used successfully for clearance and as a tool for quality control of other mine/UXO clearance methods.

16. COMMUNICATIONS (Chapter Twelve)

16.1. In order to command, control and co-ordinate mine/UXO clearance operations in Lebanon, a reliable and comprehensive communications network is required. The aim of this chapter is to provide information on aspects of the mine/UXO action communication structure to enable reliable communications.

17. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES (Chapter Thirteen)

17.1. The use, transportation and storage of explosives are normally subject to national civilian regulations. Therefore, the standards in this document have been established using common Lebanese Armed Forces regulations. This chapter provides detailed standards for the transportation of explosives, storage of explosives, procedures in the event of a traffic accident during transportation of explosives and general safety regulations.




18. BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE (Chapter Fourteen)

18.1. Battle Area Clearance (BAC) is the term used to describe the systematic detection and removal of all items of explosive ordnance and munitions from a given area. Areas containing mine and booby trap hazards are dealt with in their respective chapters. This chapter recommends a proven method of BAC and all mine/UXO clearance Organizations are to achieve the minimum standards outlined therein. It also gives guidance on the spot demolition of individual items of Explosive Ordnance.

19. TRAINING AND QUALIFICATIONS (Chapter Fifteen)

19.1. A high standard of training is essential to maintain good management, sound operational procedures and safety. All mine/UXO clearance Organizations are responsible to achieve the minimum training standards as outlined in this chapter prior to conducting any actual mine/UXO clearance operations.

20. INVESTIGATION OF MINE/UXO ACCIDENTS AND SERIOUS INCIDENTS (Chapter Sixteen)

20.1. All Mine/UXO clearance Organizations shall ensure that any mine accidents and incidents are reported to the LMAC. This chapter is the guideline for all investigations.

21. IMSMA (Chapter Seventeen)

21.1. The Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA) will be used by the LMAC as the primary information management tool. It is essential that clear and concise information, projected tasks and the past performance will assist in improving the efficiency of the programme. This chapter details what the system is capable of and demonstrates what information is required from LMAC and other demining agencies for mine action.

22. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT (Chapter Eighteen)

22.1. Clearance activities may be supported by the establishment and operation of temporary field facilities. This chapter gives recommendations on the environmental precautions to be taken when setting up these facilities.




23. COMMUNITY LIAISON (Chapter Nineteen)

23.1. Clearance activities are supported by Community Liaison Teams, which assist all clearance operations. This chapter details what community liaison is required prior to, during and after mine/UXO clearance operations.

24. SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH – DEMINING WORKSITE SAFETY (Chapter

Twenty)

24.1. Safety and Occupational Health is a vital part of any mine/UXO clearance operation. This Chapter details the minimum Safety and Occupational Health requirements to be observed in Lebanon when conducting mine/UXO clearance operations.

25. CENTRAL DEMOLITION SITES (Chapter Twenty One)

25.1. Due to the number of UXO or mines located there may be a requirement to move explosive items and destroy them at a central demolitions site. This Chapter details the minimum safety requirements and procedures to be observed when setting up or conducting demolitions at a central demolitions site.

26. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) (Chapter Twenty Two)

26.1. All PPE used for mine/UXO clearance operations within Lebanon shall meet the minimum standards detailed in the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS) first edition 01 October 2001(Ed. 1) Amendment 1. This Chapter details the minimum requirements for PPE to be used in Lebanon.

27. CANCELLATION OF REPORTED DANGEROUS AREAS/MINEFIELDS (Chapter Twenty

Three)

27.1. Any recorded minefields or dangerous areas entered into IMSMA shall go through a formal process of cancellation before they can be removed from IMSMA. This Chapter details the formal cancellation processes required to remove a recorded minefield or dangerous area from IMSMA.

28. MINEFIELD CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY (Chapter Twenty Four)

28.1. Within Lebanon there is a defined clearance methodology for the clearance of military laid pattern minefields with and without minefield fencing. This Chapter details the minefield clearance methodology to be used in Lebanon.




29. BOOBY TRAP CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY (Chapter Twenty Five)

29.1. As with minefields there is a defined clearance methodology for recorded and unrecorded booby traps. This Chapter details the clearance methodology for the clearance of booby traps within Lebanon.

30. CLEARANCE SITE ADMINISTRATION (Chapter Twenty Six)

30.1. Accurate recording and dissemination of information during a clearance operation is paramount. This Chapter details recommendations and requirements for effective administration of a Clearance Site.

GLOSSARY OF MINE ACTION

TERMS, DEFINITIONS & ABBREVIATIONS

Document: NMAS Issue: 1 Revision: 1 Date: August 01, 2010


SUBJECT: GLOSSARY OF MINE ACTION TERMS, DEFINITIONS & ABBREVIATIONS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.





Contents 1. SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................... 3 A-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 3 B-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 4 C-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 5 D-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 6 E-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 7 F-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 8 G-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 9 H-1 .................................................................................................................................................... 9 I-1 ................................................................................................................................................... 10 L-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 11 M-1.................................................................................................................................................. 12 N-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 14 P-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 14 Q-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 14 R-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 15 S-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 15 T-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 18 U-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 19 V-1 .................................................................................................................................................. 19 W-1 ................................................................................................................................................. 19 2. REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 19




1. SCOPE This Chapter provides a summary of the mine action terms, definitions and abbreviations used in mine action.

A-1 Access lane: A marked passage leading through a mined area that has been cleared to provide safe movement to a required point or area. Acceptance: The formal acknowledgement by the sponsor that the equipment meets the stated requirements and is suitable for use in mine action programmes. An acceptance may be given with outstanding caveats. Accident: An undesired event, which results in harm. Accreditation: The procedure by which a Mine Action organization is formally recognized as competent and able to plan and manage mine action activities safely, effectively and efficiently. For most mine action programmes, the national mine action authority will be the body which provides accreditation. International organizations such as the United Nations or regional bodies may also introduce accreditation schemes. ISO 9000 usage is that an “Accreditation” body accredits the “Certification or Registration” bodies that award ISO 9000 certificates to organizations. The usage in IMAS is completely different to this, and is based on the main definition above, which is well understood in the mine action community. Accreditation body: An organization, normally an element of the national mine action authority, responsible for the management and implementation of the national accreditation system. Administration Area: Administration Areas are normally located outside the Hazardous Area Fragmentation Hazard Zone in support of clearance operations. Administration Areas may accommodate personnel, Mine Detection Dogs, vehicles, equipment and items removed during clearance at the Site. Ammunition: See munition. Anti-handling device: A device intended to protect a mine and which is part of, linked to, attached, or placed under the mine and which activates when an attempt is made to tamper with or otherwise intentionally disturb the mine. [Mine Ban Treaty] Anti-personnel mines (APM): A mine designed to be detonated by the presence, proximity, or contact of a person and that will incapacitate, injure, or kill one or more persons. Mines designed to be detonated by the presence, proximity or contact of a vehicle as opposed to a person that are equipped with anti-handling devices, are not considered anti-personnel mines as a result of being so equipped.




Area reduction: The process through which the initial area indicated as contaminated (during the general mine action assessment process) is reduced to a smaller area. Area reduction may involve some limited clearance, such as the opening of access route and the destruction of mines and UXO, which represent an immediate and unacceptable risk, but it will mainly be as a consequence of collecting more reliable information on the extent of the hazardous area. Usually it will be appropriate to mark the remaining hazardous area(s) with permanent or temporary marking systems. Likewise, area reduction is sometimes done as part of the clearance operation. Area confirmed: Area confirmed is the area of a cleared minefield or BAC task that has been re-cleared or “confirmed” by a second clearance asset. Area worked: Is the combined total area in square meters of the following areas: Minefield Area Cleared, High Threat Hazardous Area Cleared, Low Threat Hazardous Area Cleared and Surveyed Areas. B-1

Base Station: In radio communications, a base station is a wireless communications station installed at a fixed location and used to communicate as part of either a push-to-talk two-way radio system, or; a wireless telephone system such as cellular CDMA or GSM.

Benchmark: In the context of mine action, the term refers to a fixed point of reference used to locate a marked and recorded hazard or hazardous area. It should normally be located a short distance outside the hazardous area. A benchmark may not be necessary if the reference point is sufficiently close to the perimeter of the hazardous area. A benchmark will also be used to mark a cleared area; this benchmark may be a natural or manmade feature, which is unlikely to be moved. Bomblet: See sub-munition. Booby trap: An explosive or non-explosive device, or other material, deliberately placed to cause casualties when an apparently harmless object is disturbed or a normally safe act is performed. Boundary lane: A cleared lane around the perimeter of a hazardous area. Block Clearance: Term used to describe the systematic manual clearance of an area. Also referred to as area clearance. Briefing area or Control Point: In the context of clearance operations this is a clearly identifiable control point intended to be the first point of entry to a demining worksite. The briefing area contains a plan of the minefield and its current level of clearance, at a scale large enough for briefing purposes, showing the location of designated areas (car park, first aid point, explosive storage areas, working lanes or areas and distances), and where safety equipment is issued to visitors.




Box: A squared area that is developed for the purpose of being searched by mine detection dogs during the licensing test. A box normally measures 10m x 10m, but other sizes may be preferred.

Brevity: Conveying complex information with a few words over a radio.

Burning ground: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by burning. C-1 CASEVAC: (Casualty Evacuation). The evacuation of a casualty from the scene of an accident to the nearest appropriate medical facility that can stabilize and treat the injuries. Cancelled area: An area previously recorded as a hazardous area, which subsequently is considered, as a result of actions other than clearance, not to represent a risk from mines and UXO. This change in status will be the result of more accurate and reliable information, and will normally only be authorized by the national mine action authorities, in accordance with national policy. The documentation of all cancelled areas shall be retained together with a detailed explanation of the reasons for the change in status. Call Sign: In radio communications, a call sign (also known as a call sign, call name or call letters, or abbreviated as a call, or otherwise known as a handle) is a unique designation for a transmitting station, radio, or user.

Clearance Depth: The specified clearance depth shall be determined by a technical survey, or from other reliable information which establishes the depth of the mine and UXO hazards and an assessment of the intended land use. In the absence of reliable information on the depth of the local mine and UXO hazard, a default depth for clearance shall be established by the LMAC. It should be based on the technical threat from mines and UXO in the country and should also take into consideration the future use to which the land is to be put. Clearance Plan: A Clearance Plan is required for each clearance site which shall include the purpose and clearance methodology, to facilitate an effective response to the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be prepared by the LMAC Operations Officer after conducting a site visit which shall involve a ground appreciation and assessment of the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be agreed between the LMAC Operations Officer and the relevant Mine Action Organization representative prior to the commencement of clearance operations at the site. Any subsequent amendments to the Clearance Plan shall be approved by the LMAC Operations Officer before they are implemented. Cleared lane: The generic term for any lane, other than a boundary lane, cleared by a survey or clearance team to the international standard for cleared land. This may include access lanes outside the hazardous area or cross/verification lanes inside a hazardous area.




Cluster Bomb Unit (CBU): An expendable aircraft store composed of a dispenser and sub-munitions. A bomb containing and dispensing sub-munitions, which may be mines (anti-personnel or anti-tank), penetration (runway cratering) bomblets, fragmentation bomblets etc. Control area or point: All points or areas used to control the movements of visitors and staff at a demining worksite. Communication: Is the process of imparting information from a sender to a receiver with the use of a medium. Communication requires that all parties have an area of communicative commonality. D-1 Decontamination: A process of removing undesired contamination from test items, tools and accessories that are used when preparing a field test. (Definition for Mine Detection Dog use only). Deflagration: This is the rapid burning of high explosives where the pressure at the reaction front never catches the shockwave and no detonation occurs. Demilitarization: The process that renders munitions unfit for their originally intended process. Deminer: A person, including a public servant, qualified and employed to undertake demining activities or work on a demining worksite. Demining: Activities, which lead to the removal of mine and UXO hazards, including technical survey, mapping, clearance, marking, post-clearance documentation, community mine action liaison and the handover of cleared land. Demining may be carried out by different types of organizations, such as NGOs, commercial companies, national mine action teams or military units. Demining may be emergency-based or developmental. In IMAS standards and guides, mine and UXO clearance is considered to be just one part of the demining process and is considered to be one component of mine action. In IMAS standards and guides, the terms demining and humanitarian demining are interchangeable. Demining accident: An accident at a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard. Demining accident response plan: A documented plan developed for each demining workplace, which details the procedures to be applied to move victims from a demining accident site to an appropriate treatment or surgical care facility. Demining incident: An incident at a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard. Mine Action organization: Refers to any organization (government, NGO, military or commercial entity) responsible for implementing demining projects or tasks. The Mine Action organization may be a prime contractor, subcontractor, consultant or agent.




Demining sub-unit: An element of a Mine Action organization, however named, which is licenced to conduct one or more prescribed demining activities, such as technical surveys, manual clearance, EOD or the use of mine detection dog teams. Demolition: Destruction of structures, facilities or material by use of fire, water, explosives, mechanical or other means. Demolition ground: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by detonation. Designated Area: It is paramount that the location of all Designated Areas at the demining worksite are known to all Mine Action Organization personnel operating there and that they are appropriately marked and sited. Designated Areas shall be clear of Explosive Ordnance in accordance to the Clearance Plan. For the purpose of this NMAS; Designated Areas are categorized as the Working Area and the Administration Area. Destruction: The processes of final conversion of ammunition and explosives into an inert state that can no longer function as designed. Destroy (destruction) in situ: Blow in-situ or blow in place. The destruction of any item of ordnance by explosives without moving the item from where it was found, normally by placing an explosive charge alongside the item. Detection: In the context of demining, the term refers to, the discovery by any means of the presence of mines or UXO. Detonator: A device containing a sensitive explosive intended to produce a detonation wave. Detonation: The rapid conversion of explosives into gaseous products by means of a shock wave passing through the explosive. Typically, the velocity of such a shock wave is more than two orders of magnitude higher than a fast deflagration). Disarm: The act of making a mine safe by removing the fuze or igniter. The procedure normally removes one or more links from the firing chain. Disposal site: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by detonation and burning. Drill: An inert replica of ammunition specifically manufactured for display or instructional purposes. E-1 Ensemble: The group of protective clothing designed to be worn as a protective measure.




Equipment: A physical, mechanical, electrical and/or electronic system, which is used to enhance human activities, procedures and practises. Environmental factors: Factors relating to the environment and that influence the transportation of scent from a mine, the detection of the target scent or the ability of people and dogs to work safety and effectively. (i.e. Wind, rain, temperature, humidity, altitude, sun and vegetation). (Definition for Mine Detection Dog use only). Evaluation: The analysis of a result or a series of results to establish the quantitative and qualitative effectiveness and worth of software, a component, equipment, procedure or system, within the environment in which it will operate.

Experience: As a general concept comprises knowledge of or skill in or observation of something or some event gained through involvement in or exposure to that thing or event.

Explosives: A substance or mixture of substances, which, under external influences, is capable of rapidly releasing energy in the form of gases and heat. Explosive materials: Components or ancillary items used by Mine Action organizations, which contain some explosives, or behave in an explosive manner, such as detonators and primers. Explosive ordnance: All munitions containing explosives, nuclear fission or fusion materials and biological and chemical agents. This includes bombs and warheads; guided and ballistic missiles; artillery, mortar, rocket and small arms ammunition; all mines, torpedoes and depth charges; pyrotechnics; clusters and dispensers; cartridge and propellant actuated devices; electro-explosive devices; clandestine and improvised explosive devices; and all similar or related items or components that are explosive in nature. Explosive ordnance disposal (EOD): The detection, identification, evaluation, render safe, recovery and disposal of UXO. EOD may be undertaken: As a routine part of mine clearance operations, upon discovery of the UXO. To dispose of UXO discovered outside mined areas, (this may be a single UXO, or a larger number inside a specific area). To dispose of explosive ordnance, which has become hazardous by damage or attempted destruction. F-1 Fade Out: Fade out is a term generally used in BAC operations and in particular, the clearance of cluster bomblets (sub-munitions), to describe an agreed distance cleared to confirm that no further pertinent UXO evidence exists. During the clearance of cluster bomblets fade out shall be achieved when the cluster strike footprint has been identified and cleared to the required depth. Fade out shall be conducted using the same procedures (i.e. surface or sub-surface) under which the evidence was found unless otherwise agreed by the LMAC. In Lebanon the minimum Fade out distance is normally a minimum of 50 meters from any pertinent evidence. Generally, if evidence is located during fade out an assessment shall be conducted by the LMAC Operations Department as to whether the fade out distance should be amended. Any amendments to the fade out distance




must be approved by the LMAC and should be detailed in the relevant Site Clearance Plan. The term ‘UXO evidence’ refers to relevant explosive ordnance (e.g. sub-munitions) being cleared although, it may include other evidence such as strike marks, entry holes and craters. This shall be confirmed by the LMAC Operations Section. Fragmentation hazard zone: For a given explosive item, explosive storage or mine/UXO contaminated area, the area that could be reached by fragmentation in the case of detonation. Several factors should be considered when determining this zone; the amount of explosive, body construction, type of material, ground conditions etc. See also [secondary fragmentation]. Fuze: A device, which initiates an explosive train. G-1 GIS: Geographical or geospatial information system. An organized collection of computer hardware, software, geographic data, and personnel designed to efficiently capture, store, update, manipulate, analyze, and display all forms of geographically referenced information." GIS allows a user to graphically view multiple layers of data based on their geographic distribution and association. GIS incorporates powerful tools to analyze the relationships between various layers of information. H-1 Handover: The process by which the beneficiary (usually the national mine action authority) accepts responsibility for the cleared area. The term 'alienation' is sometimes used to describe a change of ownership of the land, which accompanies the handover of a cleared area. Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate: Following the QA completion and final field QA evaluation of a task site, the LMAC will instigate the Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate release. The certificate provides sufficient evidence that the clearance requirements have been met. The certificate is to be signed initially by the clearance organization and then by the LMAC Director on behalf of the people of Lebanon (See Annex A). Hazardous area: Contaminated area, a generic term for an area not in productive use due to the perceived or actual presence of Mines/UXO’s. Hazard marker: Object(s), other than hazard signs, used to identify the limits of a mine and UXO hazard area. Hazard markers shall conform to the specification established by the national mine action authority. Hazard Sign: A permanent, manufactured sign which, when placed as part of a marking system, is designed to provide warning to the public of the presence of mines. Hazard marking system: A combination of measures (signs and barriers) designed to provide the public with warning and protection from mine and UXO hazards. The system may include the use




of signs or markers, or the erection of physical barriers. High Threat Hazardous Area: A High Threat Hazardous Area is an area with a confirmed or known presence of a mine or UXO threat. All areas contained within minefield fencing are deemed to be HTHA. The clearance depth for all HTHA in Lebanon is 20 cm. Humanitarian demining: See demining. (In IMAS standards and guides, the terms demining and humanitarian demining are interchangeable). I-1 IMSMA: The Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA). This is the United Nation's preferred information system for the management of critical data in UN-supported field programmes and at the UN headquarters in New York. IMSMA consists, essentially, of two modules: the Field Module (FM) and Global Module (GM). The FM provides for data collection, information analysis and project management. It is used by the staff of the LMAC at national and regional level, and by the implementers of mine action projects - such as Mine Action organizations. The GM refines and collates data from IMSMA FMs (and other field-based information systems) and provides the LMAC and others with accurate, aggregated information for the strategic management of mine action. Inert or Free from Explosives (FFE): An item of ammunition that contains no explosive, pyrotechnic, lachrymatory, radioactive, chemical, biological or other toxic components or substances. An inert munition differs from a drill munition in that it has not necessarily been specifically manufactured for instructional purposes. The inert state of the munition may have resulted from a render safe procedure or other process to remove all hazardous components and substances. It also refers to the state of the munition during manufacture before the filling or fitting of explosive or hazardous components and substances. Any inert or FFE item used for training or display purposes must be marked “INERT” or “FFE” in a visible position on the item. All such inert or FFE items should also be recorded in a proper register. Incident: An event that gives rise to an accident or has the potential to lead to an accident. Inspection: In the context of mine action, the term refers to the process of measuring, examining, testing or otherwise comparing a sample of cleared land with the clearance requirements. Inspection body: An organization which conducts post-clearance QC on behalf of the national mine action authority by applying random sampling procedures, or other appropriate and agreed methods of inspection. Insurance: An arrangement for compensation in the event of damage to or loss of (property, life or a person). Insurance should include appropriate medical, death and disability coverage for all personnel as well as third party liability coverage.




Intended use (land): The use of land following demining operations. Intermediate point: Survey markers used between start and finish markers, or between turning points that are more than 50m apart. International Mine Action Standards (IMAS): Documents developed by the UN on behalf of the international community, which aim to improve safety and efficiency in mine action by providing guidance, by establishing principles and, in some cases, by defining international requirements and specifications. They provide a frame of reference, which encourages, and in some cases requires, the sponsors and managers of mine action programmes and projects to achieve and demonstrate agreed levels of effectiveness and safety. They provide a common language, and recommend the formats and rules for handling data, which enable the free exchange of important information; this information exchange benefits other programmes and projects, and assists the mobilization, prioritization and management of resources. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): A worldwide federation of national bodies from over 130 countries. Its work results in international agreements, which are published as ISO standards and guides. ISO is a NGO and the standards it develops are voluntary, although some (mainly those concerned with health, safety and environmental aspects) have been adopted by many countries as part of their regulatory framework. ISO deals with the full spectrum of human activities and many of the tasks and processes, which contribute to mine action, have a relevant standard. A list of ISO standards and guides is given in the ISO Catalogue.

L-1 Lachrymatory ammunition: Lachrymatory ammunition contains chemical compounds that are designed to incapacitate by causing short-term tears or inflammation of the eyes.

Landline: A landline, main line or fixed-line is a telephone line which travels through a solid medium, either metal wire or optical fibre.

Level 2 survey: The old term for survey operations now referred to as a technical survey. Lebanese Mine Action Centre: The government department charged with the regulation, management and coordination of mine action in Lebanon. Licence: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to a certificate issued by a national mine action authority to a Mine Action organization which indicates an endorsement of the organization's demining capabilities such as survey, manual clearance or the use of mine detection dogs. (See also accreditation) Lot size: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to an area (comprising a number of 1.0m² units of cleared land) offered for inspection. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA): A Low Threat Hazardous Area is any area of land that is suspected of containing a mine or UXO threat. Normally reported dangerous areas requiring Non-




technical or Technical Survey fall into this category. The minimum clearance depth for all LTHA in Lebanon is 10 cm. M-1 Magazine: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to any building, structure or container approved for the storage of explosive materials. Marking: Emplacement of a measure or combination of measures to identify the position of a hazard or the boundary of a hazardous area. This may include the use of signs, paint marks etc, or the erection of physical barriers. Marking system: An agreed convention for the marking of hazards or hazardous areas. Mechanically-assisted clearance: The use of appropriate mechanical equipment to augment other procedures in humanitarian demining such as manual clearance and mine detection dogs (MDDs). Medical support staff: Employees of Mine Action organizations designated, trained and equipped to provide first aid and further medical treatment of demining employees injured as a result of a demining accident. Memorandum of Understanding (MoU): A document used to facilitate a situation or operation when it is not the intention to create formal rights and obligations in international law but to express commitments of importance in a non-binding form. Mine: Munition designed to be placed under, on or near the ground or other surface area and to be detonated by the presence, proximity or contact of a person or a vehicle. Mine accident: An accident away from the demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard. Mine action: Activities, which aim to reduce the social, economic and environmental impact of mines and UXO. Mine action is not just about demining; it is also about people and societies, and how they are affected by landmine contamination. The objective of mine action is to reduce the risk from landmines to a level where people can live safely; in which economic, social and health development can occur free from the constraints imposed by landmine contamination, and in which the victims’ needs can be addressed. Mine action comprises five complementary groups of activities (Five Pillars):

• Removing and destroying landmines and explosive remnants of war and marking or fencing off areas contaminated with them.

• Mine-risk education to help people understand the risks they face, identify mines and

explosive remnants of war and learn how to stay out of harm's way.




• Medical assistance and rehabilitation services to victims, including job skills training and

employment opportunities. • Advocating for a world free from the threat of landmines and encouraging countries to

participate in international treaties and conventions designed to end the production, trade, shipment or use of mines and to uphold the rights of persons with disabilities.

• Helping countries destroy their stockpiles of mines as required by international agreements,

such as the 1999 anti-personnel mine-ban treaty. Minefield Area (MFA): The Minefield Area is the area containing mines and a specified area surrounding the mine rows within a military laid pattern minefield. It can also be a specified area around non-military laid pattern minefields. This area is subject to a minimum 10% confirmation clearance with a second demining asset. Mine Risk Education (MRE): A process that promotes the adoption of safer behaviours by at-risk groups, and which provides the links between affected communities, other mine action components and other sectors. Mine risk education is an essential component of Mine Action. Mine Clearance: The clearance of mines and UXO from a specified area to a predefined standard. Mine Detection Dog (MDD): A dog trained and employed to detect mines, UXO and other explosive devices. Mine incident: An incident away from the demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard. Mine sign: A sign which, when placed as part of a marking system, is designed to provide warning to the public of the presence of mines. Mine threat: Mine and UXO threat is an indication of the potential harm from the number, nature, disposition and detectability of mines and UXO in a given area. Mined area: An area, which is dangerous due to the presence or suspected presence of mines. Minefield: An area of ground containing mines laid with or without a pattern. Monitoring: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to the authorized observation by qualified personnel of sites, activities or processes without taking responsibility for that being observed. This is usually carried out to check conformity with National Mine Action Standards. Monitoring body: An organization, normally an element of the national mine action authority (LMAC), responsible for management and implementation of the national monitoring system. Munition: A complete device charged with explosives, propellants, pyrotechnics, initiating composition, or nuclear, biological or chemical material for use in military operations, including




demolitions. N-1

Neutralize: The act of replacing safety devices such as pins or rods into an explosive item to prevent the fuze or igniter from functioning. It does not make an item completely safe as removal of the safety devices will immediately make the item active again. A mine is said to be neutralized when it has been rendered, by external means, incapable of firing on passage of a target, although it may remain dangerous to handle. P-1 Permanent marking system: A marking system having an indefinite period of use, usually requiring maintenance. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): All equipment and clothing designed to provide protection, which is intended to be worn or held by an employee at work and which protects him/her against one or more risks to his/her safety or health. Public education: The process aimed at raising general awareness of the mine and UXO threat; through public information, formal and non-formal education systems. Public education is a mass mobilization approach that delivers information on the mine/UXO threat. It may take the form of formal or non-formal education and may use mass media techniques. Public information: Information, which is released or published for the primary purpose of keeping the public fully informed, thereby gaining their understanding and support. Primer: A self-contained munition which is fitted into a cartridge case or firing mechanism and provides the means of igniting the propellant charge. Procurement: The process of research, development and production or purchase which leads to an equipment being accepted as suitable for use, and continues with the provision of spares and post design services throughout the life of the equipment. Prodding: A procedure employed in the process of demining whereby ground is probed to detect the presence of sub-surface mines and/or UXO. Protective measure: Means used to reduce risk [ISO Guide 51:1999(E)] Q-1 Quality management: Coordinated activities to direct and control an organization with regard to quality. [ISO 9000:2000]




Quality Control (QC): Part of quality management focused on fulfilling quality requirements. [ISO 9000:2000] QC relates to the inspection of a finished product. In the case of humanitarian demining, the 'product' is safe cleared land. Quality Assurance (QA): Part of quality management focused on providing confidence that quality requirements will be met. The purpose of QA in humanitarian demining is to confirm that management practises and operational procedures for demining are appropriate, and will achieve the stated requirement in a safe, effective and efficient manner. Internal QA will be conducted by Mine Action organizations themselves, but external inspections by an external monitoring body should also be conducted. Qualification: Professional certification, trade certification, or professional designation, often called simply certification or qualification, is a designation earned by a person to assure that he/she is qualified to perform a job or task. R-1 Random sampling: Selection of samples by a process involving equal chances of selection of each item. Used as an objective or impartial means of selecting areas for test purposes.

Radio Frequency: Radio frequency (RF) is a rate of oscillation within the range of about 3 Hz to 300 GHz. This range corresponds to frequency of alternating current electrical signals used to produce and detect radio waves. Since most of this range is beyond the vibration rate that most mechanical systems can respond to, RF usually refers to oscillations in electrical circuits.

Reference point: A fixed point of reference some distance outside the hazard (ous) area. It should be an easily recognized feature (such as a cross-roads or a bridge), which can be used to assist in navigating to one or more benchmarks. Internationally these are often also referred to as Geodetic Points when they refer to a pre-surveyed location such as a trig point. Regional Mine Action Centre (RMAC): An Operational Office of LMAC that coordinates mine action activities within a specified area in Lebanon. Render safe procedure (RSP): The application of special EOD methods and tools to provide for the interruption of functions or separation of essential components to prevent an unacceptable detonation. Residual risk: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, the risk remaining following the application of all reasonable efforts to remove and/or destroy all mine or UXO hazards from a specified area to a specified depth.

S-1 Sample: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, one or more 1.0m² units of land drawn at random from a lot.




Sample size: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, the number of 1.0m² units of land in the sample. Sampling: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, a defined procedure whereby part or parts of an area of cleared land are taken, for testing, as a representation of the whole area. Sampling plan: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, a specific plan that indicates the number of 1.0m² units of land from each lot which are to inspected (sample size or series of sample sizes) and the associated criteria for determining the acceptability of the lot (acceptance and rejection numbers). Safety distance: For the purpose of this NMAS, the term ‘safety distance’ shall be used when describing the agreed minimum distance which personnel, MDD, equipment, machines or vehicles shall be situated in order to avoid the effects of an explosion. The safety distance should be calculated by using a recognized EOD Fragmentation Hazard Zone (safety distance) formula. The primary considerations for confirming the safety distance shall be the hazard (e.g. Explosive Ordnance type and effects) and the protection afforded (e.g. armour, PPE, natural or man-made cover). Additional considerations such as the tolerable risk to certain personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles may influence the safety distance, however, the safety distance shall only be concluded after a pertinent assessment of the hazard and protection has been conducted and authorization has been granted by the LMAC. Sapping: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to; a procedure employed in the process of demining whereby, in conjunction with other procedures, ground is cleared by digging forward to a specified depth from a safe start point. Scent: A distinctive odour. Secondary fragmentation: In an explosive event, fragmentation which was not originally part of the mine/UXO. Self-neutralization: Action generated by means of a device integral to a mine, which renders the mine inoperative, but not necessarily safe to handle. In landmines, this process may be reversible. Site: For the purpose of this Definition; a Site is an approved location where Mine Action operations are proposed, active, suspended or completed. Depending on the stage of operations, the Site may include several Designated Areas. In the context of a Demining Accident or Incident, Workplace may used to describe a Site. Specified area: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, that area for which mine clearance activity has been contracted or agreed, as determined by the national mine action authority or an organization acting on its behalf.




Specified depth: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, the depth to which a specified area is contracted or agreed to be cleared of mine and UXO hazards, as determined by the national mine action authority or an organization acting on its behalf. Standard: A standard is a documented agreement containing technical specifications or other precise criteria to be used consistently as rules, guidelines, or definitions of characteristics to ensure that materials, products, processes and services are fit for their purpose. Mine action standards aim to improve safety and efficiency in mine action by promoting the preferred procedures and practises at both headquarters and field level. To be effective, the standards should be definable, measurable, achievable, and verifiable. Standing Operating Procedures (SOPs): Instructions, which define the preferred or currently established method of conducting an operational task or activity. Their purpose is to promote recognizable and measurable degrees of discipline, uniformity, consistency, and commonality within an organization, with the aim of improving operational effectiveness and safety. SOPs should reflect local requirements and circumstances. Standards: Requirements, specifications or other precise criteria, to be used consistently to ensure that materials, products, processes and services are fit for their purpose. Mine action standards aim to improve safety and efficiency in mine action by promoting the preferred procedures and practises at both headquarters and field level. Stockpile: In the context of mine action, the term refers to, a large accumulated stock of Explosive Ordnance. Stockpile destruction: The physical destructive procedure towards a continual reduction of the national stockpile. Sub-munition: Any munition that, to perform its task, separates from a parent munition. Mines or munitions that form part of a cluster bomb, artillery shell or missile payload. Sub-Surface: For the purpose of this NMAS, the term sub-surface is used in mine clearance and Battle Area Clearance (BAC) operations to describe the clearance of mines / UXO or other specified items situated below ground level. Surface: For the purpose of this Definition, the term surface is used in mine clearance and Battle Area Clearance (BAC) operations to describe the clearance of mines / UXO or other specified items situated above ground level. Items protruding from the ground / partially buried shall be considered as above ground level (surface). Survey marker: A durable and long lasting marker used to assist in the management of marked and cleared land demining operations. Suspected hazardous area (SHA): An area suspected of containing a contamination hazard.




Syllabus: Is an outline and summary of topics to be covered in a course. A syllabus usually contains specific information about the course, such as information on how, where and when to contact the instructor and teaching assistants; an outline of what will be covered in the course; a schedule of test dates and the due dates for assignments; the grading policy for the course; specific classroom rules; etc.

T-1 Task: For the purpose of this Definition; a Task is approval by the LMAC for Mine Action Organizations to undertake specific Mine Action activities in accordance to an agreed Clearance Plan. Prior to the commencement of mine clearance / BAC operations a unique IMSMA Task number should be allocated by the LMAC. A Task Dossier is issued to the Mine Action Organization by the LMAC and may contain several Tasks. Task identification number (ID): A unique number used to designate a hazardous area. Task identification numbers shall be allocated by the national mine action authority.

Technical Standard: Is an established norm or requirement. It is usually a formal document that establishes technical criteria, methods, processes and practises.

Technical survey: Previously referred to as a Level 2 survey. The detailed topographical and technical investigation of known or suspected mined areas identified during the planning phase. Such areas may have been identified during the general mine action assessment or have been otherwise reported. Temporary marking system: A marking system having a stated finite period of use. Tolerable Risk: For the purpose of this NMAS, the tolerable risk is an accepted level of risk to personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles, after considering the Explosive Ordnance (EO) hazards associated to the risk. The tolerable risk shall be determined after a pertinent risk evaluation / assessment has been conducted. In order to determine the tolerable risk to personnel involved in Mine Action operations it may be necessary to separate personnel into categories according to their specific roles. Note: For the purpose of this NMAS, the following categories shall be used when determining the tolerable risk to personnel during Mine Action clearance operations:

• Directly Involved Personnel who conduct clearance and hazardous area marking operations: e.g. Site Supervisor, Deminer/Searcher, MDD Handler and Machine Operator. For the purpose of this NMAS, clearance is the action of reducing or eliminating the Explosive Ordnance (EO) hazards from a specified area, e.g. mine clearance, BAC and EOD. It is generally accepted that there is an accepted degree of risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) to personnel Directly Involved due to the nature of the work and their responsibilities.




• Indirectly Involved Personnel who support clearance and hazardous area marking

operations: e.g. Medic and Driver. It is generally accepted that the risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) is minimal to personnel Indirectly Involved.

• Not Involved Personnel who do not conduct or the support clearance and hazardous

marking operations: e.g. Non-Mine Action Organization personnel.

Training: Refers to the acquisition of knowledge, skills, and competencies as a result of the teaching of vocational or practical skills and knowledge that relate to specific useful competencies.

Turning point: A fixed point on the ground, which indicates a change in direction of the perimeter of the hazardous area or perimeters of a cleared area that has been documented in the IMSMA completion report. U-1 Undesirable scent: Factors related to the environment and that influence the transportation of scent from the mine, the detection of the target scent or the capability of people and dogs to work safely and effectively. Such factors can be, wind strength, temperature, humidity, rain, altitude, sun and vegetation. Unexploded ordnance (UXO): Explosive ordnance that has been primed, fuzed, armed or otherwise prepared for use or used. It may have been fired, dropped, launched or projected yet remains unexploded either through malfunction or design or for any other reason. V-1 Victim: An individual who has suffered harm as a result of a mine or UXO accident. Victim assistance: Refers to all aid, relief, comfort, and support provided to victims (including survivors) with the purpose of reducing the immediate and long-term medical and psychological implications of their trauma. W-1 Working Area: A Working Area is where clearance is conducted at the Site and is normally within the Hazardous Area Fragmentation Hazard Zone. A Site may have one or more Working Areas.

2. REFERENCES IMAS 04.10 Glossary of mine action terms, definitions and abbreviations. (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2,3 &4)

CHAPTER 01 MINE/UXO SURVEY

& DANGEROUS AREA MARKING

Document: NMAS-001 Issue: 1 Revision: 1 Date: August 01, 2010


SUBJECT: CHAPTER 01 MINE/UXO SURVEY & DANGEROUS AREA MARKING

DOC: NMAS-001 August 01, 2010

REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.





Contents 1. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 3 2. SCOPE .................................................................................................................................. 3 3. DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................... 3 4. RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................. 4 5. PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 5

5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 5 5.2. Mine/UXO Survey ........................................................................................................... 5 5.3. Source of Information ..................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Information Reliability ..................................................................................................... 6 5.5. Standard Reporting ......................................................................................................... 6 5.6. Marking of Mined Areas .................................................................................................. 7 5.7. Levels of Mine/UXO Area Marking .................................................................................. 7 5.8. Operational Support ........................................................................................................ 8

6. REFERENCES ...................................................................................................................... 9 7. ATTACHMENTS ................................................................................................................... 9




1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to establish the principles, and provide guidance on the requirements of Mine/UXO survey & dangerous area marking.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This Chapter applies to all areas pertaining to Mine/UXO survey & dangerous area marking.

3. DEFINITIONS

3.1. Definitions in this chapter are in compliance with IMAS 04.10 (Glossary of mine action terms, definitions and abbreviations) and all terms that have been developed in Lebanon have been captured in the Glossary of Mine Action Terms, Definitions & Abbreviations.

3.2. General Mine Action Assessment (GMAA): This is the investigation of suspected

mine/UXO areas to identify both the general location of mine/UXO areas and the socio-economic impact of mine/UXO contamination on the local population. This information gathering process is intended to identify general details about where mine/UXO affected areas are, and which areas are not affected by mine/UXO problems.

3.3. Non-Technical Survey: Non-Technical Survey is a thorough investigation of new or previously recorded hazardous areas. A Non-Technical Survey should be the starting point for recording suspected hazardous areas as Confirmed Hazardous Areas (CHA). Non Technical Survey is undertaken to collect the essential information about a new CHA or an existing SHA, which has been identified through an impact survey, military records or word of mouth etc in order to allow a decision to be made as to what to do next with that area. Non-Technical Survey is always carried out from known safe areas and does not involve any EOD mine/UXO clearance activities.

3.4. Technical Survey: Technical Survey is the detailed investigation of suspected mine/UXO areas located during the earlier GMAA or Non-Technical Survey. Also referred to as area reduction, this process involves an investigation of the suspected area using standard mine/UXO clearance drills and techniques, to establish and mark accurate boundaries of the mine/UXO areas. This requires the skills of specially trained mine/UXO clearance personnel with survey skills. The technical survey can also be undertaken using dogs and machines. The survey should confirm the presence of mines/ERW leading to the definition of one or more minefields. It may indicate the absence of mines/ERW which could allow land to be released when combined with other evidence.




3.5. Completion Survey: Completion Survey is conducted in conjunction with mine/UXO

clearance teams and accurately records the area cleared. The benchmark is to be left in the ground to serve as a minimum marker of the initial mined area. Once the clearance task is completed a Completion Report are to be submitted. These, in conjunction with a QA evaluation, will then form the basis for an authorized acceptance certificate to be issued.

3.6. Benchmark: In the context of mine action, the term refers to a fixed point of

reference used to locate a marked and recorded hazard or hazardous area. It should normally be located a short distance outside the hazardous area. A benchmark may not be necessary if the reference point is sufficiently close to the perimeter of the hazardous area. A benchmark will also be used to mark a cleared area; this benchmark may be a natural or manmade feature, which is unlikely to be moved.

3.6. Hazard marking system: A combination of measures (signs and barriers) designed

to provide the public with warning and protection from mine and UXO hazards. The system may include the use of signs or markers, or the erection of physical barriers.

3.7. Marking: Emplacement of a measure or combination of measures to identify the

position of a hazard or the boundary of a hazardous area. This may include the use of signs, paint marks etc, or the erection of physical barriers.

3.8. Specified area: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, that area

for which mine clearance activity has been contracted or agreed, as determined by the national mine action authority or an organization acting on its behalf.

3.9. Specified depth: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to, the

depth to which a specified area is contracted or agreed to be cleared of mine and UXO hazards, as determined by the national mine action authority or an organization acting on its behalf.

3.10. Turning point: A fixed point on the ground, which indicates a change in direction of

the perimeter of the hazardous area or perimeters of a cleared area that has been documented in the IMSMA completion report.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Survey Team Leaders to ensure that the survey process is carried out, in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.




5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Survey is an essential part in all Mine Action programmes. The gathering of information of minefields and areas contaminated with dangerous items such as UXO is necessary so that the problem can be identified, quantified and prioritized for action, by marking, partial clearance or full clearance.

5.1.2. The information will be recorded in a centralized database at the LMAC IMSMA

section for future reference to identify high risk and high priority areas. The information must therefore be gathered in a standardized format.

5.1.3. The Survey Teams are used primarily to provide data to the coordinating body but

they may also have other survey roles such as non-technical or technical Survey, area reduction and minefield marking tasks. The Survey Teams will have the following tasks, in order of priority.

5.2. Mine/UXO Survey

5.2.1. The purpose of a mine/UXO survey is to establish the scope of the mine/UXO problem affecting a country, in sufficient detail to enable mine clearance organizations to plan and conduct effective clearance operations.

5.2.2. The records of all surveyed areas will be stored in the LMAC IMSMA database. The

standard report formats should therefore be used so that information may be easily transferred for analysis. Mine surveys are divided into the following categories. a. General Mine Action Assessment

b. Non-Technical Survey c. Technical Survey d. Completion Survey

5.3. Source of Information

5.3.1. LMAC: The LMAC has already collated substantial data on minefields, UXO, and booby traps. The collection and recording of military records, operational maps, logistic reports, information on munitions depots, mine and munitions types is a vital component of the LMAC IMSMA database.

5.3.2. Israeli Forces: The Israeli Forces (IF) has been the principal user of mines in

Southern Lebanon. The IF has provided a substantial amount of information regarding mines and booby traps. However there are some discrepancies in the information received.




5.3.3. Other Factions: Other factions also used mines during the conflict, however neither the laying nor the recovery of these mines were always recorded so it must therefore be assumed that a number of them remain in the ground.

5.3.4. Civilian Population: The collection process should start at government level and

extend down to the provincial and district level, with the same intensity of investigation. Sources should include hospital data on mine casualties, population data, transportation data etc. Once a picture of where the affected areas are located, further investigation can proceed to the village level to collect first-hand information on mine/UXO affected areas.

5.3.5. Geographic: All forms of geographic and topographical data are vital to the planning

and analysis process. Soil maps, hydrology, road, bridge and agricultural features are some examples of data which must be included in the survey plan to establish priority areas and methods to be used in clearing mines/UXO.

5.3.6. Socio-economic: In the conduct of mine survey, the social and economical impact of

mines and UXOs must be tested. The collection of information on numbers of casualties, the loss of houses and livestock, local, regional and national infrastructure blockages, life-saving necessities, such as water and firewood, are key to determining priority clearance operations.

5.3.7. Mine/UXO Technical Data: Technical information on mines and UXOs, collected

from sources (primarily the military) in the field must be centralized in the IMSMA database to be effective. This information is vital to establish the level of the mine/UXO threat and the related terrain threat, all of which will create the direction for the development of mine/UXO clearance procedures and the selection of the appropriate mine clearance equipment.

5.4. Information Reliability

5.4.1. All information obtained, regardless of the source, will be assessed for its accuracy and completeness. This procedure is to be implemented at all levels. Any information received on the probable location of mines/UXO must be investigated accordingly.

5.5. Standard Reporting

5.5.1. Reports: Standards have been set for the recording of information, so that it will be dispensed in a usable format for analysis and dissemination. Records must be kept in written, graphic, and digital formats so both digital and traditional paper mediums can transfer information to operators in the field and planners at the central level.

5.5.2. Maps: Maps are the key element in providing geographical data on suspected mined

areas. The most detailed and accurate maps will be used as the standard for recording of mined areas. The map series, date of production and scale must be




clearly identified. It is important to remember that a different map series may have been used and referred to in earlier surveys/mapping reports and there must be no confusion in cross-referencing.

5.5.3. Grid Reference: For the purpose of recording mines/UXO in Lebanon, UTM maps

must be used as this system has already been incorporated into the IMSMA database. Coordinates shall be recorded using WGS-84 UTM.

5.5.4. Measurement: All measurements used in demining operations will be metric

measurements.

5.5.5. Measurement Equipment: A variety of measurement equipment can be used to accurately record mined area data. These include compasses, protractors, GPS, DGPS, range finders, binoculars, cameras etc. In each case, the equipment selected must provide the greatest degree of accuracy and reliability to the field operator and must ensure accuracy for its application. GPS should only be used in plotting permanent landmarks and as a navigational aid. Personnel tasked to conduct surveys must have a good working knowledge of map reading and be able to operate and calibrate their own equipment.

5.6. Marking of Mined Areas

5.6.1. Mined area marking is a vital component of a survey or clearance operation. Mined area marking is to be conducted at the same time as survey operations, by the team conducting the survey in accordance with Chapter 3, Mine Clearance and Battle Area Clearance Marking Systems.

5.7. Levels of Mine/UXO Area Marking

5.7.1. Mine/UXO area marking has been categorized into three levels, from which a variety of situations can be effectively addressed. All mine marking/fencing is to be completed to the standard detailed in Chapter 3.

a. Emergency marking. b. Semi-permanent fencing.

c. Permanent fencing.

Note. The location of all types of emergency marking must be reported to the LMAC to facilitate follow-up survey and mined area marking activities.

5.7.2. Emergency marking: A suspect mine/UXO area is usually marked immediately to

provide an immediate visual warning of the presence of mine/UXO. This type of marking will, whenever possible, use the standard “mine” signs that clearly indicates the danger. Emergency marking should be clearly recognizable from a distance of




fifty meters, and be able to endure all the elements for six months. Local type mine/UXO marking, such as crossed sticks will also be recognized as a form of marking.

5.7.3. Semi-permanent fencing: Is a more permanent and visual barrier surrounding a

mine/UXO area. These signs should be visible from a distance of fifty meters and be visible in heavily vegetated or undulating ground. The barrier must be in accordance with the specifications detailed in the section on mine clearance marking systems in chapter 3 - Mine Clearance and Battle Area Clearance marking systems. Semi permanent marking should endure the elements for six months to one year.

5.7.4. Permanent fencing: Is for areas where it is not possible to conduct mine/UXO

clearance operations in the immediate future. Permanent marking should be a physical and visual barrier to the movement of humans and livestock. It will consist of metal pickets, barbed wire, and mine warning signs. This type of marking should endure the elements for one to five years. Permanent fencing of a more fixed type may all be used, depending on duration minefield is expected to remain un-cleared.

5.8. Operational Support

5.8.1. Communications: Survey teams will be equipped with suitable radios to contact each other, Survey Coordinator, medical assistance, and the LMAC.

5.8.2. Medical: Team members must be trained in first aid, including immediate treatment

of trauma casualties. The team must be equipped with a comprehensive medical kit containing the appropriate treatment equipment to sustain a traumatic casualty over an extended period of time.

5.8.3. Casualty: Survey teams are to have a proven casualty evacuation plan, which is

practised regularly.




6. REFERENCES

6.1. Normative references are important documents to which reference is made in this

standard and which form part of the provisions of this standard.

IMAS 08.20 Technical Survey (Ed. 1 Amendment 1) IMAS 08.30 Post-clearance Documentation (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 08.40 Marking of Hazards (Ed. 2 Amendment 1 & 2) IMAS 08.50 Data Collection and Needs Assessment for MRE (Ed. 1 Amendments 1, 2 & 3)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 02 SITE PREPARATION

& SETTING OUT



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 02 SITE PREPARATION AND SETTING OUT


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.





Contents 1. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 3 2. SCOPE .................................................................................................................................. 3 3. DEFINITION .......................................................................................................................... 3 4. RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................. 4 5. PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 4

5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Mine Clearance / Battle Area Clearance (BAC) Site Setup ............................................ 4 5.3. Specification of Clearance Quality .................................................................................. 5 5.4. Task ................................................................................................................................ 6 5.5. Clearance Plan ............................................................................................................... 6 5.6. Site ................................................................................................................................. 7 5.7. Designated Areas ........................................................................................................... 7 5.8. Working Area .................................................................................................................. 7 5.9. Administration Area ........................................................................................................ 7 5.10. Site Reference Points ................................................................................................ 11 5.11. Setting Out the Boundary (Base) Line and Boundary Lane ....................................... 12 5.12. During Clearance ...................................................................................................... 12

6. REFERENCES .................................................................................................................... 19 7. ATTACHMENTS ................................................................................................................. 19




1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to set out clear procedures for Mine Action clearance operations, for the searching, locating and destroying of mines and UXO’s.

2. SCOPE

2.1. Task site Organization and manual operations are tightly connected through the whole of humanitarian Mine Action activities. Methods and techniques outlined in this chapter are designed to increase effectiveness, flexibility, safety of personnel and equipment as well as the requested quality of the area cleared. All the procedures and experiences gained from practice that are used in working lanes must be thoroughly described within Standing Operational Procedures documents (SOP).

2.2. Mine Action Organizations are to detail in their SOP planned team structure for the site, in accordance with the Mine Action activities (Team/Section) for technical survey, manual clearance, mechanical preparation of the ground, use of MDD teams, house clearance, and removal of explosive ordnance. According to this structure, individual responsibilities of the personnel from the planned structure are to be detailed (site manager, team leader, deminer, surveyor, medics, dog handler etc.).

3. DEFINITION


3.2. Safety Distance: The term ‘safety distance’ shall be used when describing the agreed minimum distance which personnel, MDD, equipment, machines or vehicles shall be situated in order to avoid the effects of an explosion.

3.3. Tolerable Risk: For the purpose of this NMAS, the tolerable risk is an accepted level

of risk to personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles, after considering the Explosive Ordnance (EO) hazards associated to the risk.

3.4. Directly Involved: Personnel who conduct clearance and hazardous area marking

operations: e.g. Site Supervisor, Deminer/Searcher, MDD Handler and Machine Operator.

3.5. Indirectly Involved: Personnel who support clearance and hazardous area marking operations: e.g. Medic and Driver.

3.6. Not Involved: Personnel who do not conduct or support clearance and hazardous

marking operations: e.g. Non-Mine Action Organization personnel.




3.7. Clearance Depth: An agreed distance using the metric unit of measurement calculated from ground level to below ground level that shall be cleared of mines / UXO or other specified items according to LMAC clearance requirements.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leader at all working locations to ensure that all requirements in accordance with National Mine Action Standards are met before any work starts.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction 5.1.1. Methods and techniques outlined in manual humanitarian Mine Action operations are

designed to ensure quality of the area cleared, safety of personnel and equipment, effectiveness and flexibility in all types of terrain in Lebanon. Geography of the terrain along with the principles of humanitarian Mine Action will dictate the task site Organization as well as the type of Mine Action operations.

5.2. Mine Clearance / Battle Area Clearance (BAC) Site Setup 5.2.1. The nature of the ground shall determine the layout of any mine clearance / BAC

Site, however a consistent arrangement with correct marking shall increase the safety of those involved in the mine clearance / BAC operation. The standardization of all clearance marking systems is paramount.

5.2.2. The safety distance should be calculated by using a recognized EOD Fragmentation

Hazard Zone (safety distance) formula. The primary considerations for confirming the safety distance shall be the hazard (e.g. Explosive Ordnance type and effects) and the protection afforded (e.g. armour, PPE, natural or man-made cover). Additional considerations such as the tolerable risk to certain personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles may influence the safety distance, however, the safety distance shall only be concluded after a pertinent assessment of the hazard and protection has been conducted and authorization has been granted by the LMAC.

5.2.3. When conducting Mine Action operations which involve the search, location, removal

or disposal of explosive ordnance; the minimum safety distance shall be calculated from the designated safe area (e.g. Control Point) to the nearest operative (e.g. person, MDD or machine) in the Working Area. This distance may be reduced on authorization from the LMAC in certain circumstances; e.g.

a. No personnel are at the designated safe area. b. Personnel within the safety distance are afforded adequate protection from the

effects of an explosion.




c. An assessment has concluded that the risk to equipment or vehicles is tolerable.

5.2.4. The unit of measurement used when calculating safety distances shall be metric and

all distances shall be written in meters (m). These distances are the mandatory minimum distance and shall only be reduced on authorization from the LMAC.

5.2.5. The tolerable risk shall be determined after a pertinent risk evaluation / assessment

has been conducted. In order to determine the tolerable risk to personnel involved in Mine Action operations it may be necessary to separate personnel into categories according to their specific roles.

5.2.6. The following categories shall be used when determining the tolerable risk to

personnel during Mine Action clearance operations:

a. Directly Involved. It is generally accepted that there is an accepted degree of risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) to personnel Directly Involved due to the nature of the work and their responsibilities.

b. Indirectly Involved. It is generally accepted that the risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) is minimal to personnel Indirectly Involved.

c. Not Involved. There should be no risk (where feasible) from Explosive Ordnance

(EO) to any personnel not involved.

5.3. Specification of Clearance Quality 5.3.1. Land shall be accepted as cleared when the Mine Action Organization has ensured

the removal and/or destruction of all mine and UXO hazards from the specified area to the specified depth.

5.3.2. The specified area to be cleared shall be determined by a technical survey or from

other reliable information which establishes the extent of the mine and UXO hazard area.

5.3.3. Generally, the priorities for clearance shall be determined by the impact on the

individual community balanced against national infrastructure priorities. 5.3.4. Clearance Depth: The specified clearance depth shall be determined by a technical

survey, or from other reliable information which establishes the depth of the mine and UXO hazards and an assessment of the intended land use. In the absence of reliable information on the depth of the local mine and UXO hazard, a default depth for clearance shall be established by the LMAC. It should be based on the technical threat from mines and UXO in the country and should also take into consideration the future use to which the land is to be put. The current clearance depth for mine clearance and Battle Area Clearance (BAC) is 20 cm. This shall only be reduced on authorization from the LMAC.




5.3.5. Surface: The clearance of Mines / UXO or other specified items situated above

ground level. Items protruding from the ground / partially buried shall be considered as above ground level (surface).

5.3.6. Sub-Surface The clearance of mines / UXO or other specified items situated below ground level.

5.3.7. Clearance Area or Box: Clearance Areas or Boxes are normally used during BAC

operations to demarcate the Working Area where systematic search and clearance is conducted. The size of the area / box is decided by the Clearance Organization and may be determined by a number of factors including the level of UXO contamination, the threat, terrain and available resources. Obvious boundaries such as roads, fences, walls or fields may be used to define the Working Area.

Note: Depending on the procedures conducted, e.g. surface or sub-surface BAC, the Clearance Area or Box may be divided into Clearance Lanes prior or during clearance.

5.3.8. Cleared Lane: A lane that has been cleared of all pertinent mines / UXO to the

required standard. 5.3.9. Intermediate Line: This is a line forward and parallel to the Start Line or Base Line

demarcating where clearance lanes and clearance areas / boxes end and begin. The distance from the Start Line / Base Line to the Intermediate Lane and between any consecutive Intermediate Lanes shall be a maximum of 50 meters.

5.3.10. Intermediate Lane: This is a cleared lane forward and parallel to the Start Line or Base Line which connects clearance lanes and areas / boxes for safety and command / control purposes. The rear edge of the Intermediate Lane is the Intermediate Line. The distance from the Start Line / Base Line to the Intermediate Lane and between any consecutive Intermediate Lanes shall be a maximum of 50 meters.

5.4. Task 5.4.1. A Task is approval by the LMAC for Mine Action Organizations to undertake specific

Mine Action activities in accordance to an agreed Clearance Plan. Prior to the commencement of mine clearance / BAC operations a unique IMSMA Task number should be allocated by the LMAC. A Task Dossier is issued to the Mine Action Organization by the LMAC and may contain several Tasks.

5.5. Clearance Plan 5.5.1. A Clearance Plan is required for each clearance Site which shall include the purpose

and clearance methodology, to facilitate an effective response to the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be prepared by the LMAC/RMAC Operations Officer after conducting a Site visit which shall involve a ground appreciation and




assessment of the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be agreed between the LMAC/RMAC Operations Officer and relevant Mine Action Organization representative prior to the commencement of clearance operations at the Site. Any subsequent amendments to the Clearance Plan shall be approved by the LMAC/RMAC Operations Officer before they are implemented by the Mine Action Organization.

5.6. Site 5.6.1. A Site is an approved location where Mine Action operations are proposed, active,

suspended or completed. Depending on the stage of operations, the Site may include several Designated Areas. In the context of a Mine Action Accident or Incident, Workplace may used to describe a Site.

5.7. Designated Areas 5.7.1. It is paramount that the locations of all Designated Areas at the Site are known to all

Mine Action Organization personnel operating there and, that they are appropriately marked and sited. Designated Areas shall be clear of Explosive Ordnance in accordance to the Clearance Plan. Designated Areas are categorized as Working Area and Administration Area.

5.8. Working Area 5.8.1. A Working Area is where clearance is conducted at the Site and is normally within

the Hazardous Area Fragmentation Hazard Zone. A Site may have one or more Working Areas.

5.9. Administration Area 5.9.1. Administration Areas: are normally located outside the Hazardous Area

Fragmentation Hazard Zone in support of clearance operations. Administration Areas may accommodate personnel, Mine Detection Dogs, vehicles, equipment and items removed during clearance at the Site.

5.9.2. Control Point (CP): A command post from which a commander can control the

operation. The Control Point also acts as an administration and briefing area and is the point at which all visitors shall arrive. Ideally it should be on level, well-drained land and have vehicle access and preferably some shade. The minimum safety distance shall be in accordance to the tables below.

5.9.3. Vehicle Park: This should be close to the Control Point and large enough to

accommodate the Mine Action Organization’s vehicles and visitor’s vehicles. All vehicles should be positioned in the park so they do not have to manoeuvre to depart




in the event of an emergency. The minimum safety distance shall be in accordance to the tables below.

Note: See Chapter 7 for specific details regarding the positioning of the ambulance.

5.9.4. Stores and Equipment Area: Where all equipment is securely stored. Usually part of,

or adjacent to, the Control Point. 5.9.5. Medical Area: A marked area at the Site where a qualified Medic shall be located

during clearance operations and where medical treatment shall be administered to a casualty/s in the event of a Mine Action Accident. The ambulance may be located at the Medical Area and the Medic shall ensure that sufficient medical equipment is available at all times. The Medical Area may be collocated with the Control Point or other Administration Areas and the area should be flat, dry and shaded. Depending on the Site CASEVAC Plan one or more Medical Areas may be required. For example: The Medic may be situated at one Medical Area and the casualty/s may be recovered to another Medical Area for treatment. The Medic shall however, always be situated in order that he / she can reach the Medical Area in which to administer medical treatment to a casualty/s within five minutes of being alerted to the situation.

Note: See Chapter 7 for specific details regarding the positioning of the Medic.

5.9.6. Explosives Area: When not in use all explosive materials shall be stored in a secure

and marked Explosives Area a minimum safety distance of 50 meters away from other designated areas. Exemptions from this minimum distance may be approved in cases where security is an issue; approval is to be requested from the LMAC. Explosives and accessories shall be kept dry, shaded and stored in accordance to Chapter 13 Transport and Storage of Explosives.

5.9.7. Rest Area: Rest areas should be located for personnel directly involved in operations

for use during their breaks. Sufficient space should be allowed for resting, preparing / storing certain equipment, and other necessary reasons. The area should be dry and shaded if possible. If occupied during clearance, personnel at the Rest Area shall wear PPE or the Rest Area shall be positioned at a safe distance. The minimum safety requirements shall be in accordance to the NMAS.

5.9.8. Latrine: To prevent people inadvertently straying into hazardous areas, and for

hygiene purposes, a latrine should be designated for each clearance area. Latrines should be located in the vicinity of the Rest Area or the Control Point and shall be adequate for the number of personnel on the Site.

5.9.9. Metal Collection Area: Pertinent metal located during clearance shall be placed in the

metal collection areas which should be situated at a convenient location at the Site. The dimensions of the pit should be a minimum of 1 meter square and a suitable depth to ensure that the contents of the pit are below the surface, to prevent spillage. In circumstances where there are difficulties in achieving the required depth then, an earth or sandbag wall may be created around the edge. Prior to the Completion or Suspension of the Site the contents of the metal collection area shall be moved to an




LMAC approved area for disposal. This shall be agreed with the LMAC. In order to facilitate quality control, metal collection pits should not be located in areas cleared that day and shall be regularly checked by the Supervisor to ensure that they do not contain any Explosive Ordnance (EO).

5.9.10. Explosive Ordnance (EO) Area: The purpose of the EO Area is for temporary storage

of Explosive Ordnance located at the Site. This is to be separated from other Administration Areas and should be situated outside the Working Area. In order to maintain greater control it may be preferable to locate safe EO within the Explosive Area. The dimensions of the area shall be a minimum of 1 meter square and a suitable depth to ensure that the contents of the area are below the surface, to prevent spillage.

In circumstances where there are difficulties in achieving the required depth then, an earth or sandbag wall may be created around the edge. All EO removed during clearance shall be placed within the area unless removed to another approved location away from the Site for storage or disposal. Only EO which is found in a safe condition or has been rendered safe, neutralized or disarmed may be stored in the EO Area, which shall be marked as hazardous until the items have been removed. All items shall be checked by a qualified EOD Operator prior to placing them in the EO area and recorded in a Site register. The Site Supervisor shall endeavour to dispose of all EO on the same day that it is located. EO remaining at the Site at the completion of daily operations which is confirmed to be a hazard (e.g. containing functional component parts – primers/boosters, detonators or main charge) shall be reported to the LMAC. Prior to the Completion or Suspension of the Site, the contents of the EO Area shall be destroyed at the Site or moved to an LMAC approved area for disposal.

5.9.11. Explosive Ordnance (EO) Scrap Area: All EO located at the Site which is Free from

Explosive (FFE), shall be placed in the EO Scrap Area. A qualified EOD Operator shall ensure that all items in the EO Scrap Area are FFE. The EO Scrap Area is to be separated from other Administration Areas and should be situated outside the Working Area. The dimensions of the area shall be a minimum of 1 meter square and a suitable depth to ensure that the contents of the area are below the surface, to prevent spillage. In circumstances where there are difficulties in achieving the required depth then, an earth or sandbag wall may be created around the edge. All EO removed during clearance which is FFE shall be placed within the area unless removed to another approved location away from the Site for storage or disposal. Prior to the Completion or Suspension of the Site, the contents of the EO Scrap Area shall be moved to an LMAC approved area for disposal.

5.9.12. Demolition Area: A location cleared for the disposal, by explosive demolition, of

Explosive Ordnance (EO). The Demolition Area shall be designated at a set distance from the Working Area in order to avoid any fragmentation from falling into cleared areas where quality control or sampling may be planned.

5.9.13. Sentry Point: Positioned at Mine Action clearance Sites when required, particularly on

route, road and verge clearance Sites. It shall have adequate communications with




the senior person on site. 5.9.14. Detector / Locater Test Area: Each Mine Clearance / BAC Site shall have a testing

area in order to ascertain that the detectors / locators’ are serviceable, calibrated to the manufacturer’s standard and capable of locating the pertinent target at the required clearance depth, prior to operational deployment. The Testing Area shall comprise an equal soil type to the Working Area and shall be divided into two areas.

The dimensions of each area shall be at least 1 square meter and shall afford sufficient space to perform the test with the relevant detector / locator. If necessary, the Test Area shall be excavated to remove any metal. The first area shall be totally metal free, whereas the second area shall be metal free with the exception of the relevant test item (specific Site threat), placed at the required clearance depth e.g. No9 Igniter at 20cm or ½ BLU 63 at 20cm. The test item shall be placed in the ground and covered with soil. The test depth shall be measured from the ground surface to the top of the item and the test item shall be accessible to enable an effective QA inspection. To facilitate this, cord may be attached to the item or the item placed in a plastic container (unsealed at the top and filled with soil) prior to burial. Following the normal setting up and calibration of the detector / locator, the detector / locator is to be initially passed over the metal free area where no indication is to be heard or seen and then over the area with the test item has been buried where a visual / audible indication should be noted. The Test Area shall be clearly marked and depending on the variety of detectors / locators and operational requirements, there may be a number of Test Areas at the Site.

5.9.15. Detector and Locator Tests: Detectors and locators shall be tested and adjusted for

optimal performance. When conducting detector and locator tests for mine clearance and BAC operations, the relevant item / test piece shall be positioned at the required clearance depth. The test depth shall be measured from ground level to the top of the item. The test shall be performed in the same soil conditions that the Detector and Locators shall be used. It is recommended that when using instruments (detectors / locators) to search or assist with the search during surface clearance operations that the pertinent item / test piece is placed sub-surface when performing the test to provide a sufficient ‘safety margin’ when conducting the instrument search.

5.9.16. Control lane: There may be a requirement to identify a route through a safe or

cleared area to the Working Area or other designated areas, e.g. direct the movement of personnel or vehicles. White topped or unpainted posts or rocks should be used to mark this.

5.9.17. Access Lane: A marked passage leading through a hazardous area that has been

cleared to provide safe movement to a required point or area. During mine clearance operations, the access lane shall be a minimum of 1 meter wide and a maximum of 30 meters in length before the width is increased to a minimum of 2 meters. During BAC operations, the Access Lane shall be a minimum of 1 meter wide and a




maximum of 50 meters in length before the width is increased to a minimum of 2 meters or the lane is connected to another cleared lane or cleared area for command and control and safety (CASEVAC) purposes.

To increase safety, it is recommended that access lanes are widened to a minimum of 2 meters as soon as possible and mandatory that they are widened to a minimum of 2 meters in circumstances where personnel are required to traverse rocks, undulating ground and other obstacles which may cause additional difficulties when walking, loss of balance or contribute to them stepping into an un-cleared area. This must be made a priority.

5.10. Site Reference Points

5.10.1. Reference Point: Also known as a Landmark, it is a fixed point of reference outside the hazardous area. It should be an easily recognized feature (such as a building, cross-roads or a bridge) which is used to assist in navigating to one or more Benchmarks. The Reference Point description, location and the safe route to the Bench Mark should be included in the survey report. There may be a requirement to identify Intermediate Points when the Reference Point is located at a vast distance from the Bench Mark, the terrain is featureless, there are a number of obstacles or multiple changes in direction along the route.

5.10.2. Bench Mark: A fixed point of reference used to locate a marked and recorded hazard

or hazardous area. It should be located a short distance outside the hazardous area. See Chapter 3, 5.8.2.

5.10.3. Start Point: This has also been known as a Datum Point. It is a clearly identifiable

fixed marker and the point where clearance begins. Navigation of the Working Area commences from the Start Point and it may be decided to position additional Start Points for ease of mapping during or on completion of clearance. The initial Start Point should be clearly visible from the Bench Mark otherwise Intermediate Points shall be located for ease of navigation.

5.10.4. Boundary Line: This has also been known as a Base Line. It is a fixed line located

from the Start Point which forms the perimeter of the known hazardous area normally identified through a survey or the perimeter of a cleared Boundary Lane, providing a definite location of the safe area. As clearance progresses, the minimum necessary markings (E.g., Turning Points, Intermediary Points) should remain in place to identify the Boundary Line for navigation and post clearance marking purposes. The Start Line, which may be initially located on the Boundary Line, should be moved forward after a substantial amount of the area is cleared and subsequently, mark the divide between the cleared and hazardous area.

5.10.5. Boundary Lane: This has also been known as a Base Lane. This is a cleared and

marked lane a minimum of 2 meters wide along the boundary of the hazardous area which is utilized when there is no confirmed safe boundary from which to start clearance. Where possible, a Boundary Lane is to be cleared around the entire




perimeter of the hazardous area. The perimeter of the hazardous area or Boundary Lane is called the Boundary Line. If there is no requirement to clear a Boundary Lane then it may be decided to mark a Control Lane outside and parallel to the Boundary Line. Depending on the requirement to restrict movement of Mine Action personnel, equipment and vehicles in the immediate area around the boundary, it may be decided that a Control Lane is not necessary.

5.10.6. Start Line: This is the line from where mine clearance / BAC begins and marks the

divide between the safe and hazardous area. This may be located on the Boundary Line and should be moved forward after a substantial amount of area is cleared. In circumstances where limited clearance has been conducted (E.g., clearance lanes for technical survey) the Start Line should remain in position.

5.11. Setting Out the Boundary (Base) Line and Boundary Lane

5.11.1. Where possible, existing linear features such as roads, paths, cultivated land etc, should be utilized as a base line. The Base Line divides the safe and hazardous area and when there is a requirement to clear a Base Lane, the Base Line shall be the rear edge of the cleared lane. The Base lane shall be a minimum of 2 meters in width.

5.11.2. The number of clearance personnel may be determined by the minimum length of

the boundary line. For example: 10 personnel x 25 meters safety distance each = a 250 meters boundary line.

5.11.3. Assume all areas at the Site as hazardous unless confirmed as being safe through

clearance or, an accurate threat assessment based on evidence from a reliable source. If necessary, clear access lanes or mark control lanes from the Control Point or Vehicle Park to the Working Area. Prior to the start of operations and as part of the normal daily routine; designated safe areas should be visually checked to confirm whether there has been any disturbance, e.g., movement of marking or inappropriate activities such as vandalism or hostilities. Evidence of inappropriate activities shall be reported to the LMAC as a matter of urgency.

5.12. During Clearance

5.12.1. Clearance Lane: This is also known as a Working Lane and is the lane where one or more clearance personnel, dogs or machines are operating. During manual mine clearance and maybe during BAC operations, the clearance lane width is maintained using a base stick.

5.12.2. During manual mine clearance operations the Clearance Lane shall be clearly

marked along the edges with red topped posts or red painted rocks at a maximum of 2 meters intervals and at all turning points. In addition, hazardous area marking tape (red/white) or cord may be used to assist in demarcating the edges. The tape or cord is normally attached to the Base stick. The Clearance Lane shall be a minimum of 1




meter wide and a maximum of 30 meters in length before the width is increased to a minimum of 2 meters. Therefore, the maximum distance for a 1 meter wide clearance lane shall be 30 meters.

5.12.3. For BAC operations the preferred and most effective method of marking during the

systematic clearance process is cord, which may be deployed from reels or by another means. The cord shall be coloured red or white unless another colour is authorized by the LMAC.

5.12.4. If utilizing Clearance Lanes, they shall be marked along the edges at regular

intervals with red topped posts, red painted rocks or other authorized markers. In addition to this, or as an alternative, hazardous area marking tape (red/white) and red or white coloured cord will be used. The minimum requirements for demarcating BAC Clearance Lanes and the un-cleared area is approved markers positioned along the edge/s at a maximum of 10 meters apart and/or approved marking tape / cord deployed along the edge/s.

The type of marking may vary between Organizations and shall be detailed in an approved SOP. The Clearance Lane shall be a minimum of 1 meter wide and a maximum of 50 meters in length before the width is increased to a minimum of 2 meters or the lane is connected to another cleared lane or cleared area for command and control and safety (CASEVAC) purposes.

5.12.10. To increase safety, it is recommended that clearance lanes are widened to a

minimum of 2 meters as soon as possible and mandatory that they are widened to a minimum of 2 meters in circumstances where personnel are required to traverse rocks, undulating ground and other obstacles which may cause additional difficulties when walking, lose of balance or contribute to them stepping into an un-cleared area. This must be made a priority.

5.12.11. At the cessation of daily mine clearance and BAC operations, the Organization is to

ensure that the cleared area is distinguishable from the un-cleared area and that the working area is demarcated using red topped posts or red painted rocks.

5.12.12. Explosive Ordnance (EO): If located EO is not removed or destroyed immediately it

shall be marked and recorded. During mine clearance operations; when EO is located within the same lane, the clearance lane shall then be closed off, a new lane commenced or the clearance lane redirected. Alternatively, the EO may be destroyed in situ or removed and the clearance lane may continue.

5.12.13. During mine clearance / BAC, prior to the cessation of daily operations, EO located

shall be destroyed or removed unless approval to leave them has been granted from the LMAC. All EO located, removed and destroyed shall be reported to the LMAC at the cessation of daily clearance operations.




The tables beneath show the minimum safety requirements to be enforced at a mine clearance and BAC Site:

Minimum Safety Requirements for a Mine Clearance Site

Serial

Situation

Min - Safety Distance Min - PPE

1. Between working units/teams. 25 meters Body armour and visor

2. Between personnel operating in suspected Anti Personnel blast mine areas.

25 meters Body armour and visor

3. Between personnel operating in suspected Anti Tank mine areas.

50 meters

Body armour and visor

4. Between personnel operating in suspected Anti Personnel stake, bounding or directional fragmentation mine areas.

50 meters


5. Between personnel operating in suspected Booby trap mine areas.

According to threat


6. Between personnel conducting Supervision or Quality Assurance and personnel operating in the working area.

N/A Body armour and visor

7. Between Personnel directly involved in clearance and personnel without PPE who are indirectly or not involved in clearance.

100 meters

8. Between the Explosive storage point, the working area and other designated areas.

50 meters

9. Between the Control Point / Vehicle Park and personnel operating in the working area.

100 meters

10. Between unprotected machines / vehicles and personnel operating in the working area.

100 meters

Any reduction to these safety requirements must be authorized by the LMAC. These safety requirements shall be increased when required in accordance to the UXO threat.

Table: 1.1 Minimum Safety Requirements for a Mine Clearance Site Note: The term ‘Body Armour’ is used to describe approved PPE which provides

sufficient frontal protection from the effects of blast and fragmentation in accordance with PPE Chapter 24. Other terminology such as ‘Apron’ may be used to describe the same thing.




Minimum Safety Requirements for a BAC Site

Serial

Situation

Min-Safety Distance Min-PPE

1. Between working units/teams. 25 meters

2. Between personnel conducting non-intrusive actions. N/A Refer to Org SOP

3. Between personnel conducting intrusive actions (except for excavation). 5 meters

Body armour and goggles

or visor

4. Between personnel excavating the ground. 25 meters Body armour and visor

5. Between personnel excavating the ground and personnel without PPE. 100 meters

6. Between personnel conducting Supervision or Quality Assurance and personnel operating in the working area. N/A In compliance

to Serials 1 -5

7. Between Personnel directly involved in clearance and personnel without PPE who are indirectly or not involved in clearance.

100 meters

8. Between the Explosive storage point, the working area and other designated areas. 50 meters

9. Between the Control Point / Vehicle Park and personnel operating in the working area. 100 meters

10. Between unprotected machines / vehicles and personnel operating in the working area. 100 meters

Any reduction to these safety requirements must be authorized by the LMAC. These safety requirements shall be increased when required in accordance to the UXO threat.

Table: 1.2 Minimum Safety Requirements for a Battle Area Clearance (BAC) Site

Note: The term ‘Body Armour’ is used to describe approved PPE which provides

sufficient frontal protection from the effects of blast and fragmentation in accordance with PPE Chapter 24. Other terminology such as ‘Apron’ may be used to describe the same thing.




INTERMEDIATE LANE

BASE LANE

Explosive Area

CP

50 M

RP

BM

25 M

Reference Point

Legend

N

Main RoadRoad Junction

BM

Bench Mark

Control Point

RP

Medical Area

CP

BM

1 m

Clearance Lanes

Start Point

Min 2 m

2 m

Cleared

Figure: 1.1. Example of a Mine Clearance Site Layout




Figure: 1.2. Example of a Mine Clearance Working Area




CENTRE STRIKE - UTM

50 Metre Box50

Metr

e Box

BASE LANE

INTERMEDIA

TE LANE

ACCESS LANE

ACCESS LANE

Main Road

100

Met

res

Road Junction

50 M

50 M

Boundary Pickets 1.2 M

N

Legend

Reference Point

CP

Bench Mark

Control Point

Explosive Area

CBU

RP

BM

CP

RP

BM

AC

CESS LA

NE

Figure: 1.3. Example of a Battle Area Clearance Site Layout




6. REFERENCES

6.1. Normative references are important documents to which reference is made in this standard and which form part of the provisions of this standard.

IMAS 10.20 S&OH Mine Action worksite safety (Ed. 1 Amendments 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5) 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 03 MINE CLEARANCE &

BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE MARKING SYSTEMS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 03 MINE CLEARANCE& BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE MARKING SYSTEMS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. The following painted colouring system is to be used: .................................................... 4 5.3. Improvised Marking ........................................................................................................ 6 5.4. Base Stick ....................................................................................................................... 7 5.5. Mine Warning Signs ........................................................................................................ 8 5.6. Minefield Fencing ............................................................................................................ 8 5.7. Cluster Bomb Warning Sign ........................................................................................... 9 5.8. Marking on the Completion of a Mine Clearance or BAC Task ..................................... 10 5.9. Marking on the Suspension of a Mine Clearance or BAC Task .................................... 11





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to make perfectly clear to all on-site personnel and visitors which ground is safe and which is dangerous. Additionally to ensure that after work has completed at a site the population has a clear indication as to which ground has been released and which land remains potentially dangerous.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All field operations involving ground potentially contaminated with mines or unexploded ordnance.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Marking: Emplacement of a measure or combination of measures to identify the

position of a hazard or the boundary of a hazardous area. This may include the use of signs, paint marks etc, or the erection of physical barriers.

3.1.2. Marking system: An agreed convention for the marking of hazards or hazardous

areas.

3.1.3. Mine sign: A sign which, when placed as part of a marking system, is designed to provide warning to the public of the presence of mines.

3.1.4. Permanent marking system: A marking system having an indefinite period of use,

usually requiring maintenance.

3.1.5. Reference point: A fixed point of reference some distance outside the hazard (ous) area. It should be an easily recognized feature (such as a cross-roads or a bridge), which can be used to assist in navigating to one or more benchmarks. Internationally these are often also referred to as Geodetic Points when they refer to a pre-surveyed location such as a trig point.

3.1.6. Benchmark: In the context of mine action, the term refers to a fixed point of reference

used to locate a marked and recorded hazard or hazardous area. It should normally be located a short distance outside the hazardous area. A benchmark may not be necessary if the reference point is sufficiently close to the perimeter of the hazardous area. A benchmark will also be used to mark a cleared area; this benchmark may be a natural or manmade feature, which is unlikely to be moved.




3.1.7. Survey marker: A durable and long lasting marker used to assist in the management

of marked and cleared land demining operations.

3.1.8. Temporary marking system: A marking system having a stated finite period of use. 4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all marking requirements are in accordance with National Mine Action Standard.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Mine clearance and Battle Area Clearance tasks Sites shall be clearly marked to differentiate between the safe and hazardous area and to identify specific points or objects. Reference should be made to Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Setting Out for additional information on marking for mine clearance and BAC tasks.

5.1.2. The primary temporary marking system used during mine clearance and BAC

operations shall be wooden pickets/posts painted a distinctive colour. In circumstances where ground conditions are too hard / rocky to position wooden posts, then painted rocks shall be used, so long as the colouring system remains the same. Short wooden posts shall have at least 30 cm above the ground and long wooden posts shall have at least 1 meter above the ground. When using rocks, they shall be a minimum of 10 cm in diameter and a minimum of 5 cm in height.

5.1.3. During mine clearance operations marking shall not be placed in the hazardous area.

During BAC operations it may be necessary to position markers in the hazardous area; however marking pickets/posts shall not be inserted into the ground unless it has been confirmed as cleared to the specified depth in accordance to the Clearance Plan.

5.2. The following painted colouring system is to be used:

a. Long Red Topped Posts: Indicate the boundary of the hazardous area. During

mine clearance operations the confirmed boundary of the hazardous area shall be marked with long red topped posts positioned at a maximum of 15 meters intervals and at each Turning Point (TP). A mine warning sign should be positioned on this post at a maximum of 30 meters intervals. The LMAC may stipulate that these distances are reduced where there is a concern regarding safety. During BAC operations the confirmed boundary of the hazardous area shall be marked with long red topped wooden posts positioned at a maximum of 50 meters intervals and at each Turning Point (TP). The LMAC may stipulate that these distances are reduced where there is a concern regarding safety. Long red topped posts may be used to




demarcate the Working Area and should be used in areas where the terrain has a detrimental effect on visibility and safety.

b. Short Red Topped Posts: Demarcate clear and unclear areas in the Working

Area, during mine clearance operations they shall be positioned at a maximum of two meters intervals. During BAC operations they shall be positioned a maximum of 50 meters apart when used in conjunction with another authorized marking system, such as cord, 10 meters apart if used solely when conducting surface clearance and 5 meters apart if used solely when conducting sub-surface clearance.

Note: The LMAC will stipulate that these distances are reduced where there is a concern regarding safety. Long or short red topped posts may be used to mark the location of Explosive Ordnance (EO) located. During BAC operations, red topped posts shall be used to mark EO which has not been removed or destroyed at the cessation of daily BAC operations. A minimum of 3 red topped posts shall be positioned on the outside of the EO demarcating it as hazardous.

c. Yellow Topped Posts: Indicate the location of Anti-personnel mine destroyed

or removed during clearance. The location, date located, type and depth of mine shall be recorded in the site documentation and the type of the mine should be written on the Post. In cases when clearing large military pattern laid minefields, where the mines are all of the same type, this will not be necessary.

d. Yellow/White Topped Posts: Indicate the position of a missing mine. e. Yellow/Red Topped Posts: Indicate the location of UXO destroyed or removed

during clearance. The location, date located, type and depth of the UXO shall be recorded in the site documentation and the type of the UXO should be written on the Post.

f. Black Topped Posts: Indicate the location of an Anti-tank mine destroyed or

removed during clearance. The location, date located, type and depth of mine shall be recorded in the site documentation and the type of the mine should be written on the Post.

g. White/Black Topped Posts – Indicate the location of a missing Anti-tank mine.

h. Blue Topped Posts: Indicate the start of daily clearance. i. White Topped or unpainted Posts: Indicate all other boundaries. j. Green Topped Posts: Indicate boundaries or the centre of sampled boxes

during Sampling Operations. k. Orange Topped Posts: Marking for a MDD indication




Figure: 1.1. Marking Posts

5.2.1. Hazardous area marking tape (red/white) and red or white coloured cord will be used in conjunction with red topped wooden posts, to demarcate the working area, red cord is preferable for this purpose. Hazardous area marking tape and white or un-coloured cord may be used between white topped or unpainted posts.

5.3. Improvised Marking

During Mine Clearance and BAC Operations the use of Improvised markers such as plastic cones or wooden triangles may be authorized by the LMAC. These shall be removed or if necessary, replaced at the end of the working day with temporary marking, e.g. wooden posts or rocks.

Figure: 1.2. Improvised Marking

Plastic Cones are often used in BAC to Mark Clearance areas and UXO’s




Figure: 1.3. Improvised Marking

Wooden/Plastic Triangles are often used in BAC & Mine Clearance to mark

Detector/locator signals, Mines &UXO’s

5.4. Base Stick

5.4.1. The Base Stick shall be used during manual mine clearance operations.

5.4.2. The primary purposes of the Base Stick is to demarcate the clear and unclear area, ensure that the 1 meter clearance lane width is maintained and provide a clear indication of the minimum width and overlap (10 cm safety margin) when performing the detector search procedure. The general rule is that the area behind the Base Stick is clear (safe) and the area to the front is unclear (unsafe).

5.4.3. The standard Base Stick used for manual mine clearance operations shall be manufactured from wood and the dimensions should comply to the following:

Length = 1.2 meters, width = 2.5-10 cm, and depth = 1.5-3 cm.

The Base Stick shall be painted white at both ends (100 millimetres) and red along the centre (1 meter). The red painted (1 meter) centre portion of the stick marks the correct lane width and the white (100 millimeters) ends serve as a reminder to the deminers to overlap their clearance area into the adjoining lanes.

Figure: 1.4. Base Stick

Note: During manual mine clearance operations, lane marking tape or cord should be connected to the Base Stick to assist with maintaining the lane width, the direction and demarcation of the clear / un-cleared area. The tape or cord shall be attached at the red 1 meter mark and not on the outside edge of the 1.2 meters base stick.




5.5. Mine Warning Signs

5.5.1. The International triangular mine sign has been adopted as the recognized sign for a

hazardous area in Lebanon. The minimum size of a mine warning sign is to be 20 cm x 20 cm x 28 cm. This minimum stipulated size of the mine sign ensures that it is clearly visible at a distance of at least 50 meters. Of note; the LMAC is intending to introduce distinctive UXO and hazardous area markers.

5.5.2. The background colour of the sign is red, which is an internationally recognized

warning to "stop". The symbolism is white, so that it is clearly recognizable on its red background and discernible by both day and night.

5.5.3. The skull and cross-bones symbol is an internationally recognized symbol, warning

of danger. It visually depicts death or serious injury and is easily identified. Mine warning signs should be printed in the Arabic and English languages with the word “MINES” printed in bold lettering, so as to be easily identified at a distance of at least 50 meters. The lettering should be in white, to contrast with the red background.

5.5.4. The unmarked side of the sign must face the inside of the minefield and the marked side must be visible from the outside of the minefield. The sign must be securely fastened to the minefield fence at intervals of no greater than 30m.

Figure: 1.5. Mine Warning Sign

5.6. Minefield Fencing

5.6.1. Fencing is the most effective barrier for mined/UXO areas that are in places of frequent or dense human and animal traffic. Fencing materials such as barbed wire are effective barriers to humans and animals. Coated or galvanized barbed wire will usually endure the elements for a long period of time. Other types of materials, such as plastic rope, plastic tapes etc are used only for expedient and temporary marking.




5.6.2. Strands for fencing are to be placed at heights which are easily visible, and which will

not allow a child or an adult, or livestock to cross without specific effort. For example, one strand placed at 25 cm from the ground and one strand placed at 1.25 m high would be adequate to cause a man to lift his feet or bend over to penetrate the fence. This action, coupled with the visual warning of painted posts and mine signs, gives ample warning to individuals.

5.6.3. Pickets are used to suspend fencing material and to hang or affix mine signs. Picket

material can range from reinforced concrete to angle iron, and wooden poles. The use of these types of materials may depend on their cost. Pickets must be designed for the soil type in which they will be placed. For example, clay type soils are capable of holding a picket in place with only a short portion of the picket below the surface of the ground, whereas sandy soil requires a much larger portion of the picket to be driven into the ground. The height of the picket must be calculated to permit suspension of mine signs at the appropriate height so as to be clearly visible, despite surrounding vegetation, the minimum height is 1.5 m above ground level. The maximum distance between pickets is to be 15 m.

5.6.4. Fasteners for fencing materials and mine signs must be a material that has equal or

greater durability than the product it is fastening.

5.6.5. Material used for all aspects of mine marking must be durable enough to resist the deteriorating forces in their environment, and to conform with the length of time of their intended use. Minefield marking material must be such that it has no economical local use.

Not more than 30 Metres

Not more than 15 Metres

0.25 m – 0.5 m

1.0 m – 1.25 m

Figure: 1.6. Minefield Fencing

5.7. Cluster Bomb Warning Sign

5.7.1. The cluster bomb warning sign should be used to demarcate areas which contain a cluster bomb hazard and should be positioned similarly to Mine Warning Signs.




The Size and dimensions are the same as the International triangular mine sign.

20 cm

28 cm

20 cm

Figure: 1.7. Cluster Bomb Warning Sign

5.8. Marking on the Completion of a Mine Clearance or BAC Task

5.8.1. The marking of any cleared area following clearance has to be unambiguous and permanent. When the entire hazardous area has been cleared and no adjacent areas are left un-cleared, then all perimeter points have to be permanently marked.

5.8.2. The Bench Mark (BM) is to be marked with a white painted concrete slab measuring

50 cm x 50cm x 20cm. It is to be set into the ground so that the top face is flush with the ground surface. Three 60 cm metal pickets are also to be inserted flush into the concrete to act as an anchorage and means of detection. The task number, clearance Organization name or logo and UTM are to be embossed into the slab surface and highlighted in red. In circumstances where it is not practical to use a concrete slab, e.g. the likelihood that it shall be removed or if it is unsuitable for the terrain, then, the LMAC may authorize an alternative fixed natural or manmade object for marking of the Bench Mark. The same information as detailed above shall however, be permanently recorded on the Bench Mark.

Organization Name

Figure: 1.8. Bench Mark (concrete slab)




5.8.3. The Start Point (SP), each boundary and cleared area Turning Point (TP) and

Intermediate Point (IP) shall be marked with 1 x 30 cm steel picket driven into the ground (10 cm protruding painted red). On completion of a mine clearance or BAC Site, Intermediate Points (IP) shall be marked when the distance between TP’s is greater than 100 meters and if the view between TP’s is obscured. These pickets are not to be driven flush with the ground until after the LMAC QA Completion evaluation has taken place, and the site accepted. Only on acceptance of the site will the pickets be driven flush with the ground.

5.8.4. If only a portion of a minefield is cleared, and suspected areas remain, then the un-

cleared areas shall be fenced in accordance with Section 5.6. In circumstances where it is not possible to construct a fence, then the LMAC may authorize alternative marking such as red painted steel pickets positioned around the boundary at regular intervals including TP’s and IP’s. Un-cleared areas that are assessed as not posing a hazard need not be fenced but should be recorded as not being cleared with any clearance asset.

5.8.5. All perimeter points are to be indicated on both the IMSMA Completion Report and

associated schematic diagram or map submitted, along with all perimeter coordinates (distances and bearings). Instances where the ground is unsuitable for metal picket insertion, then a red painted rock (a minimum of 20 cm in diameter) or a pile of red painted rocks shall be positioned at each perimeter point. Intermediate Points (IP’s) may be recorded on the Completion Report and schematic diagram as Turning Points (TP’s).

5.8.6. IMSMA Completion Reports and schematic diagrams are to clearly define the

parameters of all different clearance assets used on the site and also to identify those areas that received sampling.

5.8.7. Any un-cleared areas shall be marked in accordance with Paragraph 5.8.3.

5.9. Marking on the Suspension of a Mine Clearance or BAC Task

5.9.1. Mine Clearance and BAC tasks may be Suspended for variety of reasons, e.g. on completion of specific Demining operations and pending the commencement of further operations, climate changes, hostilities, and the termination of an Organizations contract or Accreditation. Intermediate Points (IP’s) may be recorded on the Suspension Report and schematic diagram as Turning Points (TP’s).

5.9.2. Marking shall be in accordance with marking for a Completion with the following

differences:

After the LMAC QA Suspension evaluation, the Start Point, Turning Points and Intermediate Points shall be driven into the ground with 100 mm (painted red) protruding. This is to ease identification on recommencement of the task. In certain circumstances, e.g., there is evidence to suggest that the marking shall be removed prior to the resumption of clearance, then the LMAC may authorize that the pickets are driven in flush with the ground




TP. 2

TP. 1

TP. 3

TP. 4TP. 5

TP. 6 TP. 7

BM

Legend

Reference Point

Bench Mark

Turning Point

Starting Point

SP

RP

TP

RP

BM

SP

Main Road Road Junction

N

TP. 9

TP.13

TP. 12

TP. 14

TP. 15

TP. 10TP. 11

TP. 8

UXO/CBU

TP. 16

Access Lane

A

B Surface Cleared

Sub - Surface

Figure: 1.9. Marking on Suspension or Completion of a Mine Clearance and BAC Task




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 08.40 Marking mine and UXO hazards (Ed. 2 Amendments 1 & 2) 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 04 MANUAL MINE CLEARANCE


NATIONAL MINE ACTION STANDARDS ISS: 1 REV: 1 Page 2 of 32

SUBJECT: CHAPTER 04 MANUAL MINE CLEARANCE


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 6 5.2. Clearance Depth ............................................................................................................. 7 5.3. Clearance Lane .............................................................................................................. 8 5.4. Clearance Lane Marking ................................................................................................. 8 5.5. Visual Search .................................................................................................................. 8 5.6. Detection of Tripwires ..................................................................................................... 9 5.7. Manual Vegetation Removal Using Hand Tools ............................................................. 9 5.8. Use of the Metal Detector ............................................................................................. 10 5.9. Detector Signal, Isolation and Marking ......................................................................... 12 5.10. Investigation of a Detector Signal .............................................................................. 13 5.11. Technique for the Investigation of a Detector Signal by Excavating .......................... 15 5.12. Technique for the Investigation of a Detector Signal by Prodding and Excavation .... 16 5.13. Investigation of a Surface Mine/UXO......................................................................... 17 5.14. Full Excavation .......................................................................................................... 17 5.15. Technique for Full Excavation ................................................................................... 18 5.16. Action on Locating Metal ........................................................................................... 19 5.17. Action on Locating Mines and UXO ........................................................................... 19 5.18. Action on Locating a Tripwire .................................................................................... 21 5.19. Mountainous Terrain with Loose Rocky Areas .......................................................... 21 5.20. Clearance of Obstacles ............................................................................................. 21 5.21. Burning Of Vegetation in Un-Cleared Areas .............................................................. 22 5.22. Missing Mine Procedures .......................................................................................... 23 5.23. Single Missing Mines ................................................................................................. 23 5.24. Multiple Missing Mines .............................................................................................. 24 5.25. Multiple Missing Mines due to Natural Earth Movement ............................................ 24 5.26. Pulling Procedure ...................................................................................................... 25 5.27. Render Safe Procedure (RSP) .................................................................................. 28 5.28. Daily Work Routine .................................................................................................... 28 5.29. Organization and Responsibilities ............................................................................. 28 5.30. Safety Requirements ................................................................................................. 29 5.31. Command and control ............................................................................................... 29 5.32. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ....................................................................... 31




5.33. Internal Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC) ........................................ 31





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all clearance operations are carried out safely and the released land is to the required quality standards.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All Field Operations involving the release of land from suspected mine or UXO contamination through manual mine clearance operations.

3. DEFINITION

3.1. Definitions in this NMAS are in compliance with IMAS 04.10 (Glossary of mine action terms, definitions and abbreviations) and all terms that have been developed in Lebanon have been captured in the Glossary of Mine Action Terms, Definitions & Abbreviations.

3.1.1. Qualified: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term Qualified is used to describe a

person who has received operational Accreditation from the LMAC, authorising them to perform specific mine clearance activities in accordance to their accredited position.

3.1.2. Site Supervisor: For the purpose of this Chapter Site Supervisor shall be used to

describe the following person:

a. A suitably qualified person who is responsible for a mine clearance Site. b. The senior person at the operational Site who is qualified to manage the mine

clearance operations being conducted. c. A designated qualified person who is responsible for up to three (3) demining

units or teams at the Site providing that adequate supervision is in place for all units / teams.

d. Terminology may vary between Organizations and therefore, Site Supervisor

may be replaced with other terms such as ‘Team Leader’. The demining Organization SOP shall detail pertinent Organization structures and responsibilities. See 5.31. Command and Control and 5.29. Organization and Responsibilities.

3.1.3. Deminer: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term Deminer is used to describe a

person responsible for conducting Demining operations as directed by the relevant Demining Organization. The word ‘Deminer’ is interchangeable with ‘Searcher’ and unless otherwise stated in the Demining Organization SOP, shall be used to describe the same person. The Deminer shall always be supervised when conducting Demining clearance operations and his primary responsibilities shall involve searching in accordance to the Demining Organization SOP and NMAS.




3.1.4. Demining: Activities, which lead to the removal of mine and UXO hazards, including

technical survey, mapping, clearance, marking, post-clearance documentation, community mine action liaison and the handover of, cleared land. Demining may be carried out by different types of organizations, such as NGOs, commercial companies, national mine action teams or military units. Demining may be emergency-based or developmental. In IMAS standards and guides, mine and UXO clearance is considered to be just one part of the demining process. In IMAS standards and guides, demining is considered to be one component of mine action. In IMAS standards and guides, the terms demining and humanitarian demining are interchangeable.

3.1.5. Drill: An inert replica of ammunition specifically manufactured for display or

instructional purposes.

3.1.6. Mine Clearance: The clearance of mines and UXO from a specified area to a predefined standard.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Demining agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all manual clearance activities are implemented in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Manual Mine clearance techniques used during each project may differ according to equipment, the terrain, type of mines / UXO, etc. All procedures used in manual mine clearance operations shall be accurately and progressively detailed in Demining Organizations SOP’s. The most efficient system will be the safest and not necessarily the fastest. Speed of clearance will never be allowed to compromise safety. The following are established manual mine clearance procedures and although, certain techniques may vary between Demining Organizations, these shall be recognized as the minimum standard required by the LMAC.


SUBJECT: CHAPTER 04 MANUAL MINE CLEARANCE DOC: NMAS-004 August 01, 2010

Flow Chart 1.1. - Ground Assessment

5.2. Clearance Depth

5.2.1. The minimum depth when searching for mines is 20 cm. When conducting the detector test, the depth shall be measured from the surface of the ground to the top of the mine / test piece. It is acknowledged that the location of metal within mines may vary between mine types and therefore, this standard test should ensure consistency and afford an additional safety margin. Any reduction in the clearance depth must be authorized by the LMAC. The depth shall be increased when required, e.g. where evidence exists to suggest that mines are buried at a greater depth than 20 cm.




5.3. Clearance Lane

5.3.1. A manual mine clearance deminer is responsible for clearing a 1 meter wide lane

primarily using one or a combination of the following recognized methods:

a. Hand-held metal detector search. b. Prodding. c. Excavation.

5.4. Clearance Lane Marking

5.4.1. Red topped pickets/posts or rocks shall be placed along both sides of the 1 meter wide clearance lane at a maximum of 2 meters and intervals at all turning points, defining the cleared and un-cleared area. The area outside these pickets/posts or rocks shall be considered as un-cleared. In addition, hazardous area marking tape (red/white) and red or white coloured cord may be used to demarcate the edges of a clearance lane where one or more personnel are operating. The tape or cord may be attached to the base stick.

5.4.2. A Base Stick shall be used to mark the end of the clearance lane where the deminer

is working. The area to the front of the Base Stick shall be considered as un-cleared. In circumstances when the Base Stick is removed or not used, e.g. conducting excavation or the work is stopped then, each of the front corners of the clearance lane shall be marked with one red topped post or a red painted rock.

Note: Additional marking such as crossed red topped pickets/posts may be used to close a clearance lane if required.

5.5. Visual Search

5.5.1. Prior to conducting a manual search, a visual search of the un-cleared area shall be conducted. As a minimum, the area where the manual search is to be performed shall be visually searched. The following should be considered when conducting the visual search:

a. Tripwires, cords. b. Producing fuzes, mines, UXO, booby traps. c. Disturbance to the ground. d. Depressions, holes, mounds. e. Suspicious objects (inconsistent to the surroundings).




f. Other mine / UXO indicators (packaging, components, animal remains).

5.6. Detection of Tripwires

a. When searching for trip wires the person conducting the procedure shall face towards the immediate area to be searched.

b. If the vegetation permits, a tripwire feeler may be used to locate tripwires. c. This should be made from light-gauge wire and fabricated in such a way to

allow the detection of both slack and taut wires. d. Starting from a crouched / kneeling or prone position, the tripwire feeler is

moved along the ground, forward of the base stick and raised slowly upwards until clear of the vegetation or above head height when standing, ensuring that any high trip-wires are not missed.

e. This is completed a minimum of three times, over the full width of the

clearance lane and overlap. f. In addition, the feeler shall be held vertically (point facing downwards) and

moved across the complete width of the lane (including the overlap to the sides) in order to search for any wires running forward and across the lane.

g. In order to deploy the trip wire feeler safely, the operator should be able to see

the end of the feeler at all times. h. The trip wire feeler shall be used to check a maximum distance of 500 mm

into the un-cleared area. i. If the vegetation does not allow the use of a tripwire feeler, the search is

completed using the eyes and hands. j. After a thorough visual check of the area, search the area by slowly moving

the hands forward, gently parting any thick vegetation that may obscure tripwires. The deminer shall not pull vegetation and shall avoid touching any trip wires.

5.7. Manual Vegetation Removal Using Hand Tools

5.7.1. When there is a requirement to cut vegetation to aid the clearance process and ensure the safe movement of personnel then the following shall be adhered to:

a. When clearing vegetation the person conducting the procedure shall face

towards the immediate area to be cleared.




b. To avoid overstretching into the un-cleared area during the cutting procedure,

vegetation shall be cut up to a maximum distance of 50 cm forward from the front of the clearance lane (e.g. base stick) and across the complete width of the lane, incorporating the overlap to the sides up to a maximum distance of 50 cm.

c. The clearance of vegetation is to be done in a safe, controlled method,

avoiding any disturbance of vegetation outside the immediate area to be cut. d. The deminer shall ensure that he/she looks into the vegetation for any signs of

mines/UXO or suspicious objects prior to cutting the vegetation. e. If any mines/UXO or suspicious objects are seen then, this shall be brought to

the attention of supervisory staff who shall take the appropriate action. f. If necessary, one hand shall be used to hold the tree, branch, or clump of

vegetation, while the other uses the cutting tool. g. The vegetation shall be cut systematically from the top downwards in a safe

and controlled manner at a maximum of 50 cm segments at a time. h. The vegetation shall not be pulled prior to it being cut. i. Vegetation shall be cut as close to the ground as necessary and a sufficient

amount of vegetation removed to ensure an effective visual and detector search of the ground prior to walking forward.

j. The tools should not make contact with the ground during the cutting process. k. Large / heavy vegetation should not be allowed to fall into un-cleared areas. l. Large / heavy vegetation should be placed in a cleared area, ensuring that it

does not become an obstacle. m. The vegetation cutting process shall be regularly supervised. n. The detector or locator may be used to check the vegetation prior to it being

cut and any signals shall be carefully investigated. The use of the detector shall be clearly explained in the Organization SOP.

5.8. Use of the Metal Detector

a. When using the metal detector the person conducting the procedure shall face towards the immediate area to be searched.

b. Prior to its use, the metal detector shall be checked to ensure that it is

functioning correctly.




c. The detector shall be used to check the 1 meter wide lane and, as a safety

margin, a minimum of 10 cm and maximum of 50 cm overlap to the sides of the lane.

d. The metal detector search shall be conducted to a maximum distance of 50 cm forward of the Base Stick to avoid the deminer overstretching and losing balance. The ground shall be checked at least twice.

e. When conducting the detector search using a hand held detector which

involves sweeping the search head (or equivalent) over the ground (across the clearance lane), the search head shall be moved over the same area of ground at least twice during the detector search procedure prior to it being considered as effectively searched. When using detectors which involves a different method of search, e.g. UPEX 740M Large Loop detector, it may not be practical to search the same ground twice. Therefore, additional monitoring of the procedure and QC should be conducted.

f. The detector search process shall incorporate an overlap, ensuring that the

distance moved forward is at least 10 cm less than the distance searched with the detector, therefore, providing a minimum of 10 cm safety margin.

g. The sensitivity of the metal detector is to be checked regularly in accordance

with the manufacturer guidelines and Organization SOP to ensure that it is capable of searching the ground to the required depth. However, when conducting the detector search procedure, the detector’s sensitivity shall be checked at least once every 15 minutes.

h. Details for the calibration of the detector shall be included in the Organization

SOP’s.



Limit of travel of metal detector

BASE STICK

1 Metre

Max

imum

50

cm

Prog

ress

ion

of L

ane

UNCLEARED AREA

Position of Base Stick after Search

Min 10 cmM

ax 4

0 cm

10 - 50 cm Overlap

Figure: 1.1. Use of the Metal Detector

5.9. Detector Signal, Isolation and Marking

5.9.1. The following are the general recommendations and requirements for detector signal

isolation and marking: a. All detector signals within the designated search area to the front of the lane

(base stick) and the 10 cm overlap to the sides shall be investigated. b. When isolating and marking a signal the person conducting the procedure

shall face towards the immediate area to be marked. c. Prior to investigating the detector signal, the precise location of the signal shall

be identified and marked. d. Nothing shall be placed on the area of the detector signal. e. A signal marker shall be placed before the closest point of the signal and/or

isolation markers may be used to mark the extremities of the signal. f. No attempt should be made to mark the rear of the signal from this position.

g. If it is deemed necessary, then it should be approached from a cleared area



from another side.

h. Extreme caution shall be taken when using these markers to ensure that they are carefully positioned outside the site of the signal.

Figure: 1.2. Detector Signal Marking

5.10. Investigation of a Detector Signal

5.10.1. The following are the general recommendations and requirements when investigating (probing / excavating) the ground for a detector signal:

a. When investigating a signal the person conducting the procedure shall face

towards the immediate area to be investigated. b. The person conducting the investigation procedure shall be wearing full PPE

(visor and body armour).




c. No other personnel shall be within 25 meters from a person conducting the

investigation process. The only exception to this shall be personnel required conducting supervision, quality assurance, or authorized visitors (authorized by the LMAC) however, they shall wear full PPE.

d. During the investigation process, personnel within a 100 meters radius of the

person conducting the procedure shall wear full PPE. e. These safety distance and PPE requirements may only be reduced on

authorization from the LMAC or when sufficient natural or man-made protection from the effects of a mine explosion is afforded. This should be reflected in the Clearance Plan.

f. The precise location of the signal shall be clearly marked prior to commencing

the investigation process. g. The front forward edge of the lane shall be marked using authorized marking

(e.g. base stick, red topped posts or red painted rocks) prior to commencing the investigation process.

h. A visual inspection of the area to be investigated shall be conducted prior to

commencing the investigation process. i. Any loose metal on the surface should be removed, if it is safe to do so, and

the area rechecked using the detector. j. The investigation shall commence from a minimum of 15 cm back from the

nearest point of the signal. k. The prodder and hand-trowel (or other approved tool) shall be used to identify

the cause of the signal through prodding and excavation or excavation only. The metal detector should be used to assist during the process.

l. The signal shall be investigated from a clear area in a safe/methodical

process towards the signal and never from the top. m. The ground shall be investigated to the minimum search depth (e.g. 20 cm)

and investigation shall commence from a minimum distance of 15 cm from the nearest point of the signal.

n. In hard ground, resulting from extremely dry conditions, water may be used to

soften the ground prior to commencing the excavation process. This shall be applied with caution and in moderation to avoid unnecessary disturbance of the ground.

o. On seeing what he/she believes to be a Mine or suspicious object, the

Deminer shall stop the investigation process, mark the item with a standard hazard marker at a minimum of 10 cm before the object, and inform the




pertinent supervisory staff.

p. The deminer should expose the absolute minimum of the object to assist in

recognition.

q. The cause of the signal shall be confirmed by supervisory staff and the relevant action taken, prior to removing the signal marker.

5.11. Technique for the Investigation of a Detector Signal by Excavating

5.11.1. The following detail recommendations and requirements when for the investigation of a detector signal by excavation:

a. The deminer shall measure a minimum of 15 cm back from the nearest point

of the signal. b. From this point, the deminer should then excavate as a minimum, a 20 cm

deep trench with a vertical flat face. The trench should be at least as wide as the signal and shall be wide enough to ensure a safe investigation procedure.

c. The deminer shall then excavate forward using the trowel or another approved

tool in a safe and methodical manner. d. The trench should be carefully excavated towards the signal by using the tool

in a side to side pattern. Pressure shall not be applied either downwards or upwards when excavating. Any excessive pressure and abrupt movements with the tool when excavating shall be avoided.

e. The excavation process shall continue until the signal has been cleared or a

mine, UXO or suspicious object is identified. f. Any non-dangerous metal found should be removed to the fragmentation

container, and the area re-checked with the detector. When no signal remains the deminer may continue ahead.



20cm

10cm

20cm

Hazard Marker Triangle

Target

Isolation Markers

Figure: 1.3. Example of Investigating a Detector Signal by Excavation

5.12. Technique for the Investigation of a Detector Signal by Prodding and Excavation

5.12.1. The following detail recommendations and requirements when for the investigation of

a detector signal by prodding and excavation:

a. The investigation process shall commence a minimum of 15 cm back from the nearest point of the signal and to the required width, which, is dependent on the size of the signal.

b. All prodding shall be at an angle of no greater than 30 degrees and the ground

should be prodded at intervals of no greater than 2.5 cm. c. The prodder shall be used with an even motion, avoiding any excessive force

or stabbing. d. The depth prodded should be dependent on the ground conditions, search

depth and tool design however, should not exceed 10 cm prior to the ground being investigated through excavation. This is to ensure that undue pressure is not exerted while prodding deeper.




e. If it is not possible to conduct prodding from the surface of the ground to the

required search depth, then a certain amount of excavation shall be conducted in order to achieve the required prodding depth. Alternatively, the prodding procedure may be replaced with excavation only.

f. After the location and, if possible, the size of the source of the signal has been

established, the hand-trowel (or other approved tool) should be used to excavate the soil to reveal its identity.

g. Any non-dangerous metal found should be removed to the fragmentation bag /

bucket, and the area re-checked with the detector. When no signal remains the deminer may continue ahead.

h. In hard ground, resulting from extremely dry conditions, water may be used to

soften the ground prior to commencing the prodding and excavation process. This shall be applied with caution and in moderation to avoid unnecessary disturbance of the ground.

Note: Extreme vigilance shall be exercised when working in areas which may contain ‘box’ type anti-personnel mines (e.g. No 4 or PMD-6) which incorporate a fuze protruding from the end. The detector should be used where possible to assist during the investigation process and information such as survey and minefield records should be reviewed to understand the most safe and effective method of approach. In circumstances where this is unavoidable or it is uncertain as to the position of the fuze, then additional caution shall be taken when conducting the investigation process to avoid any disturbance to the fuze. It may also be decided to increase the distance from which the prodding and excavation process begins to reduce the risk of movement to the pressure plate.

5.13. Investigation of a Surface Mine/UXO

5.13.1. Where there is a requirement to investigate a mine/UXO on the surface (e.g. prior to removal or disposal) then procedures as detailed in 5.10. - 5.12. should be followed.

5.14. Full Excavation

5.14.1. In certain areas the metal detector may be ineffective and therefore, the procedure should be replaced with Full Excavation to ensure that all mines/UXO are located to the required depth. The prodder may be used to assist with full excavation procedure. The following are examples of when Full Excavation may be required:




a. There is too much metal contamination in the soil, making it impossible to

distinguish signals. b. The hazardous area contains mineralized or magnetic soil and ground

compensating detectors are not available or unable to prevent interference. c. The maximum depth that mines are anticipated to be found is beyond the

range of the current in-service detectors. d. Minimum metal mines. e. Electrical interference (e.g. from power lines). f. The Detector Method is unsuitable. g. There is a requirement to investigate or remove obstacles, e.g. trenches,

bunkers, mounds, rocks, fences. h. Missing mine procedure. See 5.22.

5.15. Technique for Full Excavation

5.15.1. The following detail recommendations and requirements when conducting Full Excavation:

a. When excavating the person conducting the procedure shall face towards the

immediate area to be excavated. b. The minimum depth excavated or prodded and excavated shall be 20 cm and,

the full width of the 1 meter wide lane and a minimum of 10 cm to each side of the lane (overlap) shall be investigated to this depth.

c. The deminer shall create a trench a minimum width of 1.2 meters with a

vertical flat face, a minimum of 15 cm back from the nearest detector signal to a minimum depth of 20 cm.

d. The trench shall be carefully excavated forwards by using the trowel (or other

approved tool) in a safe / methodical process using the tool in a side to side pattern. Pressure shall not be applied either downwards or upwards when excavating. Any excessive pressure and abrupt movements with the tool shall be avoided.

e. If the prodder is used the method described in Section 5.12. should be

followed. f. As the detector is not being used to identify any signals; there may be no prior

indicator that a mine/UXO is present and therefore, the Deminer shall be cautious.




g. The detector should be used to regularly check the soil contamination level

and confirm whether the full excavation process can be replaced with the detector search procedure.

h. As an alternative to full excavation; mark the boundary of the high metallic

area / obstacle for clearance using another procedure, e.g., Mine Detection Dogs (MDD) or mechanical.

i. The size of the area, type of terrain and available assets may determine the

most effective method of clearance.

5.16. Action on Locating Metal

5.16.1. The metal shall be carefully removed from the ground and placed in the metal collection area. The area where the metal was removed from shall be checked visually and with the metal detector for additional signals, prior to moving forward.

5.17. Action on Locating Mines and UXO

a. The deminer shall stop clearance activities, place a standard hazard marker a minimum of 10 cm before the mine/UXO and notify the supervisory person.

b. The lane may be cordoned and clearance activities started in a new lane. c. During mine clearance operations, no personnel shall be allowed to pass a

located mine/UXO in a 1 meter wide clearance lane until the mine/UXO has been removed or destroyed.

d. In circumstances where the mine/UXO is not destroyed or removed

immediately, the deminer shall be moved to an alternative lane or the clearance lance shall be redirected to safely by-pass the mine/UXO.

e. No mine clearance shall be conducted within 30 cm of a located mine/UXO. f. The Site Supervisor is responsible for ensuring all actions relating to the

removal or destruction of the mine/UXO in situ are carried out correctly and by a qualified EOD operator.

g. Where possible all mines/UXO should be destroyed in situ. If this is not

possible, or proves to be impractical, the mines/UXO shall be manually neutralized/ disarmed and moved to a secure location.

h. All mines/UXO shall be pulled prior to neutralizing/disarming if is it suspected

that they are placed as a booby trap. i. The planned destruction of located mines/UXO should be carried out during or

after each working day unless approval from the LMAC has been granted, e.g.



in circumstances where there is a specific safety hazard or lack of/limited amount of explosive materials. Only qualified EOD personnel shall conduct demolitions or render safe procedures.

j. When planning demolitions at a clearance Site the Demining Organization

shall request authorization for disposal from the LMAC at least 30 minutes in advance. In circumstances where this may not be possible, e.g. explosive ordnance is located immediately prior to the cessation of daily operations then, the Demining Organization shall inform the LMAC Operations Department of the situation. The LMAC may request that the items are destroyed the same day or authorize for them to remain at the Site overnight.

k. All located mines/UXO remaining at the Site at the cessation of daily

operations shall be accurately marked, reported on the daily work sheet and the weekly progress report including justification. The items shall be destroyed or removed as soon as possible.

l. No located mines/UXO shall remain at the Site without approval from the

LMAC.

Hazard Marker Triangle

BASE STICK

Mine/UXO

Figure: 1.4. Marking of Located Mine / UXO




5.18. Action on Locating a Tripwire

5.18.1. The deminer shall stop, place a hazard marker a minimum of 10 cm before the tripwire and notify the supervisory person. The supervisory person is responsible for ensuring that both ends of the tripwire are located and cleared. Normally, a one meter wide lane is cleared parallel to the tripwire, no closer than 50 centimeters to the wire, to locate both ends of the wire. In cases were thick vegetation prohibits visually following the tripwire at 50 cm distance the supervisory person may authorize a closer distance. At no point is the tripwire to be disturbed.

Note: A threat assessment shall be made by the Site Supervisor with regards the possible area covered by the tripwire(s) and the configuration in which mines maybe laid. The conclusion may be to move all personnel not involved in the tripwire search to another area of the minefield or to the control point during the procedure. In any case, there shall be no mine clearance activities within 50 meters from the personnel involved in the tripwire search.

5.19. Mountainous Terrain with Loose Rocky Areas

5.19.1. In areas where the ground is mountainous and rocky and the metal detector drill

cannot be used, prodding and/or excavating drills should be used. The checking of booby traps should be completed prior to any rock actually being removed. Under no circumstances are rocks forward of a mine/UXO to be cleared prior to the actual clearance of the mine/UXO; all clearance is to be completed in a systematic manner. The Site Supervisor shall make an appraisal regarding the approach and clearance methods used for each particular site and problem encountered. When removing rocks by hand, caution shall be made so as to avoid disturbing the ground and the rocks should be lifted vertically.

5.20. Clearance of Obstacles

5.20.1. In areas with obstacles that contain a threat of mines or UXO, a procedure for clearing obstacles should be used. The following are considered as potential obstacles:

a. Former trenches in defensive positions. b. Any ditches in mined areas. c. Fortified wire entanglements. d. Abandoned vehicles.

5.20.2. During the clearance of minefields, obstacles shall be identified and distinctive

clearance drills should be adopted, e.g., sapping, pulling, EOD. Obstacles should ideally be cleared 360 degrees around or along its axis on both sides. Those




obstacles that cannot be cleared immediately shall be marked and if necessary fenced for future clearance operations. No clearance should be conducted closer than 50 cm to these obstacles. The Site Supervisor shall give consideration to the approach and clearance method used for each type of obstacle encountered.

5.21. Burning Of Vegetation in Un-Cleared Areas

5.21.1. Burning of un-cleared areas may be conducted in order to remove vegetation to facilitate mine clearance operations. Prior to commencing burning, the Organization concerned shall notify local authorities and gain authorization from LMAC. Caution shall be exercised by the Organization and the burning shall be controlled in order to prevent the undesired burning of other areas and cause an unacceptable risk to the local population. The results from burning must be considered, such as, the altered state and instability of mines and UXO. The burn shall be conducted by a suitably qualified person, e.g. Site Supervisor or EOD Officer and the burning procedure, including the method of initiation shall be detailed in the Organization SOP.

5.21.2. Any demining Organization conducting burning of un-cleared areas shall ensure that

the following precautions are adhered to:

Prior to conducting burning

a. Gain authorization for burning from the LMAC. Burning should be included in the Clearance Plan.

b. If possible, notify local authorities including the local emergency fire services. c. Ensure that the landowner agrees to the burning which should include a

written statement. d. If necessary, coordinate activities with other agencies. e. If necessary, construct a firebreak to prevent the fire from spreading. f. Ensure that adequate precautions are taken to extinguish any small fires in

cleared areas. (e.g., fire extinguishers, sand, water). g. Calculate the fragmentation hazard zone (safety distance) depending on the

threat (e.g., UXO) and post sentries accordingly.

5.21.3. During burning

a. Monitor the burning procedure from a safe distance. b. Record any detonations and other relevant occurrences.

c. Sentries are to keep the fragmentation hazard zone clear of all personnel




during the burn.

5.21.4. Post burning

a. Inform the LMAC and relevant authorities on completion of burning.

b. Ensure that the burning has ceased prior to leaving the Site. c. Allow a 48 hours soak time, from the last signs of smoke before conducting

demining operations in the burned area.

Note: A minimum wait time of four (4) days is to elapse between burning an area and MDD clearance taking place.

5.22. Missing Mine Procedures

5.22.1. In a number of instances there will be occasions where mines will be found to be missing from the established pattern during the clearance of the mine rows. This may be due to a number of reasons: removal by local people, migration due to weather, buried deeper than detector detection depth due to subsidence of soil, detonation and burning. In all these cases the area where the mines were has to be searched to confirm and ensure that no mines have been left and all mines in the row have been accounted for.

5.22.2. It is the responsibility of the Site Supervisor or the Team Leader to establish the

cause of these missing mines during either the initial survey of the minefield or during the clearance phase itself.

5.22.3. If during the survey phase of the minefield the area appears to be level and without

any evidence of movement such as subsidence or washout due to weather then the mine rows will probably be intact and normal clearance methodology will be put into practise, however if the High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) appears to have been subjected to some form of natural movement then alternative clearance methods may be required.

5.23. Single Missing Mines

5.23.1. If during normal clearance of a mine row the deminer encounters an area where a mine would normally be and there is no evidence of ground movement, burning, detonations, surface laid mines or mines removed by local people then a full missing mine drill will be conducted. The Site Supervisor / Team Leader and the deminer will, during the clearance of the row establish the pattern of the mines and the average distance they are apart i.e. one mine every one meter. If during the clearance another mine is not located 1 meter from the last located mine then the deminer must assume that the mine has moved, is missing or buried deep and therefore is to conduct a full missing mine drill to confirm that the mine is not in actual fact a deep buried mine. This will be achieved by conducting the following drill.




5.23.2. When the deminer has reached the location of the next expected mine and

establishes that there is no signal he is to dress back 50 cm from the expected location of the mine and conduct full excavation down to 20 cm the full width of the base stick and overlap each side up to and then past the expected location of the next mine to a distance of 50 cm, thus making a 1.2 m x 1 m box where the mine should be. During this full excavation the deminer is to regularly check with the detector the excavated area to confirm that the mine is not buried deep and investigate all signals before progressing forward with the excavated trench to prevent possibly kneeling on a mine. Once the deminer has excavated the full 1.2 m x 1 m box over the assessed area of the missing mine he is to check with the detector the base of the excavated pit to confirm another 20 cm clearance depth. This will effectively achieve a clearance depth of 40 cm. If a signal is heard at this stage then the deminer is to check the signal, until that signal is discounted.

5.23.3. Once this has been achieved and the deminer has established that the mine is

missing and not buried deep he is to place a missing mine picket where he thinks the mine would have been and continue with normal clearance up to where the next mine is or should be. If the deminer locates the mine then he continues with his clearance as per the companies SOP’s, however if once again he encounters no signal then the missing mine drill is repeated. If in the case of multiple missing mines within the same mine row, the drill will be conducted for a minimum of three (3) times to which this drill will cease and the situation assessed by the Site Supervisor.

5.24. Multiple Missing Mines

5.24.1. There will be occasions where more than three mines in a row could be missing, this as mentioned above could be due to a number of reasons. Once the third missing mine drill has been completed it will be the responsibility of the Site Supervisor / Team Leader to establish why the mines are missing and how best to confirm the remainder of the row that more mines are not missing. It is not practical to conduct full excavation along the row until a mine is located, therefore the Site Supervisor must consult with the LMAC how this area is to be cleared. If there is no evidence that the mines have migrated due to weather or subsidence then there is a possibility that local people might have removed these mines. In this situation it is recommended that this section of the mine row be cordoned off and the row breached further along. The area cordoned off can then be manually cleared and then verified using MDD assets at a later date.

5.25. Multiple Missing Mines due to Natural Earth Movement

5.25.1. During the clearance of the High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) the Site Supervisor is to closely monitor the area to establish whether there has been any movement due to weather. If the deminer encounters missing mines then the Supervisor is to check the area and reassess his clearance method. Once again the deminer must conduct his missing mine drills to establish the reason for these missing mines. In the case of natural movement the mines would have either migrated or could be buried deep due to subsidence. In the case of natural movement it is recommended that the area be




cordoned off and then a mechanical excavating method incorporating a sifter or crusher will be appropriate.

5.25.2. When the Site Supervisor alters the Clearance Plan due to a change in the lay of the

land or an area where a large number of missing mines is located he is to consult with the LMAC Operations. Any anomalies within the minefield are to be ascertained in the Additional Information box on the Completion Report.

5.26. Pulling Procedure

a. When it is necessary to remotely pull a mine/UXO the procedure shall be conducted by a qualified EOD operator. When pulling a non-explosive item the procedure may be conducted by a person who is not EOD qualified however, he/she shall be trained to conduct the pulling procedure. A person who is not EOD qualified may remotely pull a mine/UXO if he/she is trained to do so only under the supervision of an EOD operator.

b. All personnel not directly involved in the pulling operation are to be withdrawn

to a safe area and sentries shall be posted to impose a cordon. c. A pulling cable (capable of providing adequate support for an effective pull)

shall be unrolled and laid along the clear ground between the pulling point and the location of the item.

d. A fulcrum (e.g. stacked sandbags) should be placed at a safe distance before

the item to afford some blast and fragmentation protection, act as a barrier, and provide a greater angle to dislodge the item from its position.

e. Before attaching the cable to the item, a check of the cable and the area of the

pull shall be conducted to ensure that there are no kinks, breaks or obstacles which may impede the pulling procedure.

f. EOD evacuation and safety distance calculations should be used to determine

how far the pulling point is located from the item to be pulled. This distance shall only be reduced to a minimum of 50 meters when:

There is adequate protection from blast and fragmentation in relation to the

item to be pulled and the threat from secondary devices.

The person conducting the pull is wearing full PPE (visor with/without helmet and body armour) and is close the ground, ensuring that the PPE is affording the maximum protection possible. This shall only be conducted as a last resort and when there is no alternative protection from blast and fragmentation.




g. Once all personnel have retired to the safe area, a hook/clip is attached or the cable is tied to the item.

h. The item is pulled in a slow, continuous movement, avoiding any sharp,

jerking action. A minimum wait-time of 2 minutes is to be allowed before approaching the item.

i. The type of item being pulled shall dictate requirements for extended wait

times. If signs of smoke are seen from the area where the item is located, a wait-time of at least 30 minutes shall be enforced, commencing from the last signs of smoke.

j. After the wait-time has elapsed, the sentries shall remain in position while the

pulled item is checked. k. The check should be a ‘one-man risk’ and shall only be conducted by a

person who is qualified to do so. l. Once the item is identified and made safe, the original position of the item is

then checked as per normal clearance procedures for any sign of mines, UXO or booby trap devices.

5.26.1. The following shall be considered when conducting the pulling drill:

a. The type of ordnance (e.g., mine, mortar, grenade, projectile, rocket). b. The effects of the ordnance (e.g., blast, fragmentation, incendary). c. The condition of the ordnance (e.g., fuzed or unfuzed, fired or unfired). d. The explosive quantity of the ordnance. e. Booby traps / secondary devices. f. Proximity of personnel, animals, equipment and buildings.



Unclear Area

UXO

Fulcrum/Swivel

Fulcrum/Swivel

Picket

PicketPulling Point

Pulling Line

Protected CoverBehind

Cle

ared

Are

a

Cleared Area

Figure: 1.5. Pulling Procedures (Example)




5.27. Render Safe Procedure (RSP)

5.27.1. If it is necessary to render safe mines or UXO then, the Demining Organization shall

establish pertinent RSP’s. If an Organization is conducting manual neutralization or disarmament of a mine then this procedure is to be clearly explained in a step by step manner, where necessary incorporating diagrams and/or photographs. The RSP shall only be conducted by suitably EOD qualified personnel who shall wear full PPE (ballistic visor and body armour). The RSP must be authorized by the LMAC.

5.28. Daily Work Routine

a. Prior to the start of the working day, the Site Supervisor or other supervisory staff shall give a daily brief to the team which should include the daily clearance plan and safety.

b. A person conducting manual mine clearance deminer shall not work for longer

than sixty (60) minutes before taking a break of at least ten (10) minutes. The working time may vary between Organizations and specific situations, e.g., climate (heat, cold, and rain) and the terrain (vegetation, mountainous) however the aforementioned times shall be adhered to. The working time is subject to Site Supervisor’s judgment.

c. A normal working day for a person conducting mine clearance shall not to

exceed 7 hours actual mine clearance work a day unless otherwise authorized by the LMAC.

d. When determining the working routine the Demining Organization must

consider factors such as the travel duration, contracts, the national labour law and security.

e. In excessive climatic conditions, the working hours may be reduced or the

daily routine changed. A safe and sensible approach shall be made by the Demining Organization in order to achieve the best possible mine clearance results without compromising the safety of demining personnel.

f. The daily working routine shall be recorded at the Site. g. The working routine must be agreed by the LMAC.

5.29. Organization and Responsibilities

5.29.1. The structure of a Manual Mine Clearance team and job titles may vary between Demining Organizations and although, the quantity of qualified personnel may differ, there shall be a sufficient amount to conduct safe and effective mine clearance operations.




5.29.2. The minimum requirement to conduct mine clearance at one Site is for one person to

supervise the operations at the Working Area, with an additional person with similar ability within 5 minutes of the Working Area. Each person shall be qualified and accredited in manual mine clearance procedures, be able to manage the Site and control the casualty evacuation process if required. In situations where there are two persons capable of supervising at a mine clearance Site, e.g., Team Leader and Deputy then, if required, one of them may conduct certain mine clearance procedures, e.g., detector search, signal investigation, providing that the other person is overseeing the operation. In these circumstances, there is no requirement for an additional supervisor within 5 minutes of the Working Area. Command and control shall be in accordance to 5.31.

5.30. Safety Requirements

5.30.1. During mine clearance operations there shall be sufficient operational personnel at the Site in case of an accident. The minimum requirement to facilitate a safe and effective casualty evacuation (CASEVAC) is for one Supervisor and three additional personnel directly involved in the operations (i.e. deminers / searchers) to be situated within 5 minutes of the Working Area.

5.31. Command and control

5.31.1. It is the responsibility of the Site Supervisor to ensure that there is sufficient command and control during clearance operations.

5.31.2. Command and control may become more problematic particularly in built up areas. Therefore consideration should be given to the overall task and threat posed, with an appropriate response thought-out.

5.31.3. The maximum number of personnel conducting clearance operations at the Site

simultaneously and the distance between personnel and units shall be dictated by certain factors including the clearance methodology, threat, nature of the ground, climatic conditions and the ability of supervisory personnel.

5.31.4. The minimum requirement is that a single qualified person, e.g. Team Leader, may

supervise up to six (6) personnel conducting manual mine clearance operations simultaneously and that he/she shall be positioned at the Working Area during clearance to enable effective monitoring. The maximum distance from the person supervising to working personnel shall be 150 meters. These personnel shall be considered as one unit or team and there shall be a minimum distance of 25 meters between each unit. Where possible, the person supervising should ensure that he/she is in a position to watch all people under his/her responsibility simultaneously however, as a minimum requirement he/she shall observe each person under his/her responsibility at least once during each working shift. The person supervising shall ensure that he/she is aware of the activities of all personnel under his/her responsibility and that they are working safe and effectively;



INTERMEDIATE LANE

BASE LANE

Bench Mark

Control Point

Explosive Area

CP

100 M

RP

BM

Note: Site Supervisor/Deputy – within 5 minutes of Working Area

25 M

25 M

Reference Point

Legend

Deminer

N

Main RoadRoad Junction

CP

BM

RP

Figure 1.6 Command & Control (Example)




5.32. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

5.32.1. The minimum PPE requirements for personnel conducting mine clearance operations

and personnel within the hazardous area during mine clearance operations is as follows:

a. Body armour and a full face visor which shall provide adequate protection

from blast and fragmentation in accordance to NMAS Chapter 22 and IMAS 10.30.

b. Depending on the results of a pertinent threat assessment, it may be decided

that a full face visor provides inadequate protection across a full 360º threat spectrum and therefore, in addition to the visor, a helmet with a similar ballistic rating to the body armour should be worn.

5.33. Internal Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC)

5.33.1. This is conducted by the mine clearance team during operations and it may involve dedicated QA personnel whose primary role is to conduct on-site inspections. These Site visits should be coordinated with the Site Supervisor and shall involve the assessment of personnel, equipment and procedures to ensure safe and effective practices. QA forms shall be completed and the pertinent Site Supervisor informed of the results. The QA personnel may also conduct QC inspections of cleared areas.

5.34. Responsibility for QA and QC during Mine Clearance Operations

5.34.1. It is the responsibility of the Site Supervisor to ensure that personnel under his/her command are diligent and conducting safe / effective procedures in accordance to the Organization SOP and NMAS. The Site Supervisor shall regularly observe the clearance operation, maintain discipline, give advice and correct any mistakes.

5.35. Level of QC (inspection of cleared ground)

5.35.1. Site Supervisory personnel shall conduct at least a 10% QC inspection of the cleared area each working day. In circumstances where this is not possible, such as a suspension of daily operations (e.g. deteriorating weather conditions) an explanation shall be recorded in the Site documentation. QC shall be conducted using the same procedures as used during clearance. The area where the QC is conducted should be marked on the ground each day as a visual reference (e.g. for any subsequent internal or external QC) and shall be accurately recorded in the Site documentation on the day that it was conducted.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 08.20 Technical Survey (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS 08.40 Marking Mine and UXO hazards (Ed. 2 Amendments 1 & 2) IMAS 10.30 S&OH Personal protective equipment (Ed.2 Amendment 1)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 05 HOUSE CLEARANCE



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 05 HOUSE CLEARANCE


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.





Contents 1. PURPOSE .................................................................................................................................. 3 2. SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................... 3 3. DEFINITION ............................................................................................................................... 3 4. RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................................. 4 5. PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................ 4

5.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Threat Assessment .............................................................................................................. 4 5.3. Working Parties ................................................................................................................... 7 5.4. Exterior Reconnaissance and Initial Entry ........................................................................... 7 5.5. Search Procedures .............................................................................................................. 8 5.6. Precautions during Search .................................................................................................. 8 5.7. Command and Control ......................................................................................................... 9

6. REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 10 7. ATTACHMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 10




1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that clearance in buildings is carried out safely and this releases land/property to the required quality standards.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All Field Operations involving clearance in and around buildings resulting in the release of land and property from suspected mine or UXO contamination.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Clearance Plan: A Clearance Plan is required for each clearance Site which shall

include the purpose and clearance methodology, to facilitate an effective response to the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be prepared by the LMAC\RMAC Operations Officer after conducting a Site visit which shall involve a ground appreciation and assessment of the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be agreed between the LMAC\RMAC Operations Officer and relevant Mine Action Organization representative prior to the commencement of clearance operations at the Site. Any subsequent amendments to the Clearance Plan shall be approved by the LMAC\RMAC Operations Officer.

3.1.2. Booby trap: An explosive or non-explosive device, or other material, deliberately placed

to cause casualties when an apparently harmless object is disturbed or a normally safe act is performed.

3.1.3. Detection: In the context of demining, the term refers to, the discovery by any means of

the presence of mines or UXO.

3.1.4. Working Area: A Working Area is where clearance is conducted at the Site and is normally within the Hazardous Area Fragmentation Hazard Zone. A Site may have one or more Working Areas.

3.1.5. Disarm: The act of making a mine safe by removing the fuze or igniter. The procedure

normally removes one or more links from the explosive firing chain.

3.1.6. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): All equipment and clothing designed to provide protection, which is intended to be worn or held by an employee at work and which protects him/her against one or more risks to his/her safety or health.




3.1.7. Anti-handling device: A device intended to protect a mine and which is part of, linked to, attached, or placed under the mine and which activates when an attempt is made to tamper with or otherwise intentionally disturb the mine. [Mine Ban Treaty]

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the demining agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders at all working locations to ensure that clearance in buildings are carried out in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. All houses not occupied after recent conflicts are to be considered as having been booby trapped or contaminated by UXOs. The tasks of searching and clearing will require extremely cautious organization and precaution measures. The buildings being cleared will be required for occupation by displaced persons or returned refugees and any damage must be avoided as far as possible.

5.1.2. During demining operations, there is a possibility that buildings inside a minefield may

have to be demined. When there is a requirement to clear inside a building the contents of this chapter are to be adhered to. The demining procedures and safety precautions are exactly the same as for any demining task except that the safety distances are modified to adapt to the constraints of a building.

5.1.3. All marking of the clearance is to be applied using the methods described in Chapter 3 Marking. Demining the inside of buildings, which are inside a minefield, is treated as a part of the overall task. The site Organization and safety cover in place will support the demining of buildings. If a building is an isolated task then all requirements stated in chapter 26 Onsite Requirements and chapter 2 Site Layout must be in place before any demining is carried out.

5.2. Threat Assessment

5.2.1. When there is a requirement to provide a trained assessment of the state of individual houses and buildings it is recommended that the following procedure be adopted:

Receipt of request for house/building clearance.




Ascertain the necessary degree of search required according to the following

criteria:

1. Has any mine/UXO been visually seen, in or around the house/building?

2. Did military and/or police units occupy the house/building?

3. Was there any fighting or bombardment of the locality?

4. Is the house/building located within a known Dangerous Area?

5. Have there been any casualties, attributable to mine/UXOs, in the locality?




Receive Request for

house/building clearance

Evaluate the following:

1. Has any mine/UXO been visually seen, in or around the house/building?2. Did military and/or police units occupy the house/building?3. Was there any fighting or bombardment of the locality?4. Is the house/building located within a known Dangerous Area?5. Have there been any casualties, attributable to mine/UXOs, in the locality?

EvaluateSearch

Requirements

In accordance with the above criteria, is it PROBABLE that the house/

building may contain a mine/UXO? It is UNLIKELY that the house/building may contain a

mine/UXO

Evaluate

Conduct a full house/building clearance in accordance with the

procedure NMAS Chapter 5 House Clearance

Yes Conduct a visual search of the house/building No

If any doubt exists, conduct a full house/building clearance

No to any

Yes to any

Working Parties

External Reconnaissance & Initial Entry

The working party for an average sized house or building will not exceed two qualified operators working as a team

Safety Distances

Selecting a point of entry:

1. Doorways.2. Windows.3. Mouse holes.

Search Procedures Consider the following:

1. Floors and furniture,2. Walls, including doors, windows, fireplaces, fitted cupboards etc.,3. Fittings, including light switches and pictures, and Ceilings.4. As each area or item is cleared it will be marked as SAFE. This will be done using spray paint, chalk, felt tip pen etc in green or white colour.

Precautions During Search

Consider the following:

1. Check both sides of a door before opening it. 2. Examine floor coverings for signs of disturbance.3. Open cupboard doors, drawers, moving any furniture by using a pulling cable.4. Check upholstered furniture and beds by remotely dropping a heavy object on them.5. Electrical wiring in a house provides a ready-made circuit for electric booby traps and every switch will be treated with suspicion.6. Leave open all windows, doors, cupboards and drawers that have been cleared.7. Clearly mark all routes, areas, and items that have been cleared.8. Check plumbing by remotely turning on all water taps and allow the water to run into baths and basins for at least one minute.9. Check cisterns before flushing toilets.10. In dark places, such as attics and chimneys, be aware of light-sensitive devices.11. After remotely pulling anything, allow at least 10 minutes wait time, as there may be a delay fuse.




5.3. Working Parties

5.3.1. The working party for an average sized house or building will not exceed two qualified

operators working as a team. No other person will enter the building until it has been cleared. In very large buildings two or more pairs may be employed provided they work a safe distance apart, and have clearly defined boundaries. As a general rule, either two walls or two floors will be the minimum distance between parties. When conducting hut clearance, each hut will be treated as a single room of a house.

5.4. Exterior Reconnaissance and Initial Entry

5.4.1. Before approaching a house/building a Control Point must be set up and searched for any mines/UXO. Once this is completed, the Team Leader is to determine the approach path and point of entry. Both the approach path and a working area around the selected point of entry must be searched and cleared of any mine/UXO. When selecting a point of entry the following points must be considered:

5.4.2. Doorways: These must never be considered as safe unless the door is fully open and

the entrance can be seen to be safe. For example, if a house is built on a concrete slab, it is unlikely to have a pressure-firing device located in the floor.

5.4.3. Windows: These offer excellent opportunities for trapping. Particular attention will be

given to the ground outside, and the floor inside, as these are classic sites for pressure firing devices. If access has to be gained through windows, the following procedure is recommended: If the windows is unsecured and can be moved by pulling, pull it. If it is secured, break the glass by using a small charge, or a heavy object. If there is a choice between readily opened and fixed windows, choose the fixed. Deal with blinds and curtains in a manner similar to windows.

5.4.4. Mouse Holes: If it is decided not to enter through a door or windows, a mouse hole may

be made in the wall, roof, or floor. Where possible this should be made using explosives, as this offers not only a remote and hence safe method of creating an access point, but may also set off any traps in the near vicinity. Caution should be exercised if entering through the roof or the second floor of a two-storey house, as it is far more difficult to clear stairs going down than it is going up.




5.5. Search Procedures

5.5.1. The following sequence should be considered when searching all buildings.

a) Floors and furniture.

b) Walls, including doors, windows, fireplaces, fitted cupboards etc.

c) Fittings, including light switches and pictures, and Ceilings.

d) As each area or item is cleared it will be marked as SAFE. This will be done using spray paint, chalk, felt tip pen etc in green or white colour.

5.6. Precautions during Search

a) Check both sides of a door before opening it. This can be done by drilling a hole through it and using a mirror to check the other side. They can be further checked, or opened, by remote pulling or by blowing the lock and hinges with a small explosive charge. Each door must be both opened and closed, remotely, before it may be considered clear.

b) Examine floor coverings for signs of disturbance.

c) Open cupboard doors, drawers, moving any furniture by using a pulling cable.

d) Check upholstered furniture and beds by remotely dropping a heavy object on them.

e) Electrical wiring in a house provides a ready-made circuit for electric booby traps and every switch will be treated with suspicion.

f) Leave open all windows, doors, cupboards and drawers that have been cleared.

g) Clearly mark all routes, areas, and items that have been cleared.

h) Check plumbing by remotely turning on all water taps and allow the water to run into baths and basins for at least one minute.

i) Check cisterns before flushing toilets.

j) In dark places, such as attics and chimneys, be aware of light-sensitive devices.

k) After remotely pulling anything, allow at least 10 minutes wait time, as there may be a delay fuse.




5.7. Command and Control

5.7.1. Close supervision of the demining of buildings is to be carried out by the

Supervisor/Team leader. Visual contact is lost with the deminers and the observers cannot monitor the actions of their partners. The Supervisor/Team Leader is to ensure the following:

a) Radio communication can be maintained to the clearing party inside the building

(unless a radio controlled or influence fuse booby trap threat has been established).

b) Deminers are to change over every 20 minutes. c) When anyone enters the access corridor or room all demining is to stop inside

the building.

d) No other demining activity is to take place within 25 - 100 meters of the building depending on mine/UXO type hazards.

e) The access around and into the building is to be completed before demining of

rooms commences. f) Deminers are not to work in adjacent rooms. g) There must be at least two walls or floors between deminers.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 08.40 Marking Mine and UXO hazards (Ed. 2 Amendments 1 & 2) 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 06 DEMOLITION OF MINES & UXO’s



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 06 DEMOLTIONS OF MINES & UXO’s


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 5 5.2. Coordination and Control ................................................................................................ 6 5.3. Conduct of Demolitions ................................................................................................... 7 5.4. Sentries .......................................................................................................................... 7 5.5. Charge Placement .......................................................................................................... 7 5.6. Safety ............................................................................................................................. 8 5.7. Large Scale Open Burning and Open Detonation (OBOD). ............................................ 9





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all demolitions are conducted safely, effectively and with the minimum impact on the surrounding population and environment.

2. SCOPE

2.1. Any demolition of mines, ordnance or obstruction.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Unexploded ordnance (UXO): Explosive ordnance that has been primed, fuzed,

armed or otherwise prepared for use or used. It may have been fired, dropped, launched or projected yet remains unexploded either through malfunction or design or for any other reason.

3.1.2. Deflagration: The conversion of explosives into gaseous products by chemical

reactions, at or near the surface of the explosive (detonation).

3.1.3. Demolition: Destruction of structures, facilities or material by use of fire, water, explosives, mechanical or other means.

3.1.4. Demolition ground: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and

explosives by detonation.

3.1.5. Detonator: A device containing a sensitive explosive intended to produce a detonation wave.

3.1.6. Explosives: A substance or mixture of substances, which, under external influences,

is capable of rapidly releasing energy in the form of gases and heat.

3.1.7. Explosive materials: Components or ancillary items used by demining organizations, which contain some explosives, or behave in an explosive manner, such as detonators and primers.

3.1.8. Explosive ordnance: All munitions containing explosives, nuclear fission or fusion

materials and biological and chemical agents. This includes bombs and warheads; guided and ballistic missiles; artillery, mortar, rocket and small arms ammunition; all mines, torpedoes and depth charges; pyrotechnics; clusters and dispensers; cartridge and propellant actuated devices; electro-explosive devices; clandestine and improvised explosive devices; and all similar or related items or components explosive in nature.




3.1.9. Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD): The detection, identification, evaluation, render

safe, recovery and disposal of UXO. EOD may be undertaken: To dispose of UXO discovered outside mined areas, (this may be a single UXO, or a larger number inside a specific area). To dispose of explosive ordnance which has become hazardous by damage or attempted destruction.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all manual clearance and UXO disposal activities are carried out in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

4.2. Explosive Ordnance Disposal can be carried out at many levels from the

neutralization of large bombs and missiles to the destruction of grenades and sub-munitions. EOD qualifications should be appropriate to the UXO threat and the munitions most likely to be found. The qualifications of all staff shall satisfy the requirements and regulations of the National Mine Action Standards. As a guide:

1. Level 1 (EOD): qualification enables a deminer to locate, expose and destroy

under supervision in situ mines that the deminer has been specifically trained on;

2. Level 2 (EOD): qualification enables a deminer to undertake the destruction in-situ of single small UXO such as sub-munitions, grenades and mortar ammunition up to 84 mm this includes High Explosive Anti Tank (HEAT) charges. These categories of munition normally represent the majority of UXO found in and around mined areas;

3. Level 3 (EOD): qualification is for a deminer who has had specific EOD training

in the disposal by detonation of larger UXO, such as rocket and tank gun ammunition, and artillery ammunition up to 240 mm; this includes High Explosive Anti Tank (HEAT) charges. Under the supervision and direction of a qualified supervisor, a Level 3 (EOD) deminer should be qualified to render safe UXO for safe removal from the demining worksite, and to undertake their final destruction; and

4. Level 4 (EOD): qualification is for those small number of specialist EOD staff who

have been trained, and are qualified, to destroy the remaining EOD hazards with specialist EOD techniques, including the bulk disposal of rendered safe UXO and other recovered ammunition. Such specialist skills would include the render safe of liquid propellant systems, disposal of Depleted Uranium or the clearance of conventional munitions with improvised firing systems. The Level 4 (EOD) qualification shall clearly indicate the specialist areas of operation for each individual.




4.3. Some UXO fall within the guidelines for the above categories of operators, but

present a specific or additional threat. Examples are items containing white phosphorous, missiles, or the requirement for bulk demolitions. Special consideration is needed regarding the need for additional training, or specific exclusion from the category of competence.

4.4. Where particular items are frequently encountered, specific training in the disposal of these items may be given to enable the operator subsequently to deal with them rather than continually refer the problem to the next higher level of expertise.

4.5. It should be noted that sub munitions are particularly hazardous to deal with and should only be dealt with by appropriately trained and qualified personnel.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. All mines and UXO found during demining operations are to be destroyed using explosive methods. The only exception will be when the LMAC has authorized alternative methods.

5.1.2. As a general rule all buried armed mines incorporating cocked striker mechanisms

are to be destroyed in-situ. However an exception to this rule will be the case where mines are mechanically sifted or sieved from bunds and earth mounds. In this case they may be remotely moved a short distance with the use of an accredited mine grab or claw to a demolition pit and then destroyed. All other mines may be manually neutralized providing that they are neutralized in accordance with accredited and approved SOP’s (mine specific), and are physically checked for booby traps prior to removal (pulling drill for anti-tank mines). Destruction of located mines/UXOs will be carried out at the end of each day or at a prearranged time daily. Mines should not be stored or transported overnight before their destruction. All mines should be destroyed on the day that they are found unless approval has been granted or an order given from the LMAC not to destroy the mines that day. In this case the mines should be clearly marked before the Organization leaves the site.

5.1.3. Surface laid mines incorporating a MUV type fuze may, if necessary, be moved a short distance to aid safe demolition. This is providing that the mine is deemed safe to move by a qualified site supervisor and that the fuze must be sleeved and pinned. On no account are buried mines incorporating an MUV or cocked striker type fuze to be manually excavated and moved for demolition.

5.1.4. Live fuzes incorporating a cocked striker mechanism, which have become separated

from a mine, are generally to be destroyed in-situ. However, if deemed safe to move by a qualified site supervisor they may be moved short distances providing that they are sleeved and pinned or they are moved with an accredited removal tool/grab.




5.2. Coordination and Control

5.2.1. Prior to any demolitions, or task involving the firing of an explosive charge, the

following Organizations are to be informed of the location and time of demolition, quantity and type of explosive/munitions within the given time parameters:

a. LMAC Ops (4 hrs min).

b. RMAC Ops (4 hrs min). c. Local LAF Unit (4 hrs min). d. UNIFIL Ops (2 hrs min).

5.2.2. All mine/UXO clearance supervisors must have an approved qualification in demolitions. The Supervisor is ultimately responsible for the co-ordination and control of all demolition activities. This is to include the activities listed below, both in the field and at a demolition range practice.

a. Selection and clearance of the demolition area.

b. Handling of explosives.

c. Testing of safety fuse and electrical cable.

d. Preparation and placement of all explosive charges.

e. Maintaining standards in accordance with safety regulations (including the co-

ordination and control of sentries).

f. In addition to the requirements in 5.2.1. – The clearance Organization conducting demolitions is to warn the required local authorities, local military establishments, police stations and surrounding residences of the demolition.

g. Control of the firing.

h. Clearance of the demolition area after detonation of charges.

i. Completion of reports.




5.3. Conduct of Demolitions

5.3.1. Demolitions are to be planned and conducted in the following sequence:

a. Identify target. b. Plan cordons, brief sentries and warn local people and authorities. c. Prepare demolition charge. d. Establish a safety cordon around the danger area. e. Place charges. f. Warn sentries and local people that a demolition is about to occur. g. Observe area. h. Initiate demolition if “all clear”. i. AII personnel are instructed to look up and observe for falling fragments or

debris as a result of the demolitions. j. Check demolition safely completed. k. Lift cordon.

5.4. Sentries

5.4.1. Sentries are critical to the safety of demolitions and are to be positioned at every possible entry point of the cordon, set sufficiently clear of the demolition site and danger areas. Sentries are to be carefully briefed about their duties, in particular about warnings and stand-down instructions. They are to be equipped with communications to reach the supervisor and each other. Radios must not influence demolitions, and are to be tested before and after the sentries are posted.

5.5. Charge Placement

5.5.1. If mines/UXOs are buried, only the minimum amount of soil should be removed to create access to the mine/UXO. The demolition explosive charge must be placed as close as possible, without touching the mine/UXO.

5.5.2. All explosive charges used for the destruction of mines/UXOs in-situ are to be calculated to be of sufficient quantity to ensure complete destruction. The type, age, and origin of explosives used may dictate the size of charge.




5.5.3. Ensure that shock-wave transmission is directed to the main explosive charge of the

mine/UXO. The charge should also be placed so as to guarantee that the blast and fragmentation are directed away from vulnerable areas. Whenever possible tamping should be used to arrest the effects of detonation.

5.5.4. In order to achieve precise control, electrical initiation will always be the primary method of firing explosive demolitions.

5.6. Safety

5.6.1. The following minimum safety rules are to be observed during demolitions.

a. The minimum number of persons will be employed in the preparation of the charges; all other personnel will stay at the firing point or place of safety until the Supervisor instructs otherwise.

b. Smoking within 25 m of explosive is forbidden. Designated smoking areas are

to be nominated. c. A qualified person must be appointed by the supervisor to be in charge of

explosives and accessories at the site, he/she is to keep a record of explosive issued and explosive returned after demolition.

d. In case of a misfire, wait ten minutes for electrical misfire and thirty minutes for

non-electrical. After the appropriate time the Supervisor, will approach the charge and place a fresh charge next to it. The charge that has not fired must never be touched.

e. All storage and transportation of explosives is to be in accordance with

Chapter 13 of this document. f. Detonators are to be treated with care and always kept separately from

explosives (including detonating cord) until they are introduced into the planned firing circuit/demolition train. Detonators must not be left unattended at any time. This is to include before and after attachment to detonating cord or safety fuze and pending attachment or insertion into a charge. Neither detonators nor safety fuze will be buried under any circumstances. All Electric Detonators are to be electrically tested for continuity before being introduced to the firing circuit.

g. Detonating cord is to be treated as explosives. h. Electrical firing cable must be a minimum of 150 m in length, two-strand cable,

with a resistance of 8 to 10 ohms. It is always to be tested for continuity and discontinuity before use.

i. The minimum danger areas applicable to the mines/UXOs being destroyed

and the explosive charges used to destroy them are to be observed at all times. Sandbags may to be used to reduce the effects and influence the




direction of any shrapnel or fragmentation mines. Minimum safety distances must always be carefully determined and adhered to.

j. The minimum safety distance of VHF radios from all electrical firing circuits is 25 m. The minimum safety distance of mobile phones from all electrical firing circuits is 15 m.

k. During demolitions, all personnel are to take cover and look upward for falling

debris when the shot is fired. l. After demolitions, the supervisor will go forward to check that all charges have

fired correctly and to announce the all clear.

m. Supervisor is to make sure there are adequate explosives kept in reserve in case of miss-fires.

5.7. Large Scale Open Burning and Open Detonation (OBOD).

5.7.1. For large scale open burn and open detonation operations, the rules and regulations as detailed in Chapter 21 should be adhered to at all times, particular attention should be made to the revised way of calculating the fragmentation and evacuation safety distances. Clarification on any part of can be sought from the LMAC/RMAC QA section.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.50 S&OH Storage, transportation and handling of explosives(Ed 2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS 11.10 Guide for Stockpile Destruction (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS 11.20 Open Burning and Open Detonation (OBOD) (Ed. 2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS 11.30 National Planning Guidelines for Stockpile Destruction (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 07 MEDICAL SUPPORT & CASUALTY

EVACUATION



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 07 MEDICAL SUPPORT & CASUALTY EVACUTION


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Preparations before Execution of Mine/UXO Clearance Activities .................................. 6 5.3. Medical Evacuation Procedures ..................................................................................... 7 5.4. Supervisor ...................................................................................................................... 8 5.5. Medical Assistant ............................................................................................................ 8 5.6. Casualty Evacuation ....................................................................................................... 9 5.7. Procedure In the Event of an Accident ........................................................................... 9 5.8. Procedure Following an Accident ................................................................................. 10





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to detail the Lebanon Mine Action Centre requirements for medical support cover. This would include emergency resuscitation, stabilisation of the wounded and their further evacuation.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This chapter covers the minimum requirements for medical support to demining operations. It also details the procedures to be followed in situations where demining accidents occur. While this chapter specifically refers to demining Organizations and demining operations, the provisions of the chapter also apply to Organizations carrying out other mine action operations, including UXO disposal operations.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. CASEVAC: (Casualty Evacuation). The evacuation of a casualty from the scene of

an accident to the nearest appropriate medical facility that can stabilize and treat the injuries.

3.1.2. Demining accident response plan: A documented plan developed for each demining

workplace, which details the procedures to be applied to move victims from a demining accident site to an appropriate treatment or surgical care facility.

3.1.3. Medical support staff: Employees of demining Organizations designated, trained and

equipped to provide first aid and further medical treatment of demining employees injured as a result of a demining accident.

3.1.4. Demining incident: An incident at a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO

hazard.

3.1.5. Demining accident: An accident at a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through the qualified medical personnel to ensure that all medical procedures are carried out, in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.




5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Demining has inherent dangers however, by ensuring demining personnel are adequately prepared and supported and that safe work practices are applied, the level of risk can be minimized. Provision of good medical support to demining operations is one of the ways of ensuring that demining personnel are adequately prepared and supported. Medical support is not just about support for the tasks themselves. Medical support also includes all of the preparatory and preliminary requirements to ensure that demining staff are fit to work and have confidence in their Organizations to look after them in an emergency. The Lebanese Mine Action Centre (LMAC) is the authority responsible for safety and efficiency in mine action in Lebanon. This responsibility includes establishing the minimum requirements for medical support to demining operations and ensuring compliance with these requirements.

a. It is expected that one trained medical assistant with all his equipment shall be

sited within 5 minutes of each mine/UXO clearance or marking team. Every medical assistant must have immediate access to an ambulance and driver, which, during activity hours is used for no other purpose.

b. In the case of survey teams, a medical assistant must be on standby and the

survey team must ensure immediate radio communication should assistance be needed.

c. The medical equipment must be sufficient to stabilize large-scale shrapnel

injury or traumatic amputation within 15 minutes, and to provide surgery in a properly equipped hospital within one (1) hour. In circumstances where this is not achievable, e.g. remote Sites, then the Mine Action Organization shall prepare an effective casualty evacuation plan and request its authorization from the LMAC. The minimum medical equipment is detailed in Table 1.1. and 1.2. at the end of this chapter.

d. Organizations are responsible for ensuring that a qualified medical doctor is

available within 60 minutes travelling time of any mine/UXO clearance team. In circumstances where this is not achievable, e.g. remote Sites, then the Mine Action Organization shall prepare an effective casualty evacuation plan and request its authorization from the LMAC.

e. The evacuation vehicle must be able to carry at least one stretcher and be

equipped with the equipment as detailed in Table: 1.1. and 1.2. at the end of this chapter.

All equipment must be fixed in the vehicle when it is used as an evacuation

vehicle.




The vehicle used as an ambulance must have blue or red flashing lights

and a siren. The driver must also be trained and licence d to drive this vehicle/ambulance.

It should be remembered that the comfort and safety of the casualty in

transit is more important than speed.

5.1.2. If such medical cover is removed or unavailable, clearance/survey shall cease immediately until it has been restored.

5.1.3. The method of evacuation in the event of an accident must always be specified and

understood by all. The primary method of evacuation is by road to the nearest hospital.

5.1.4. Every operator should have his/her blood group recorded before he/she starts work.

5.1.5. The LMAC may authorize a reduced level of medical support and casualty

evacuation due to co-locate operational sites. The minimum medical support and casualty evacuation requirement for co-located operational sites is:

a. A minimum of one (1) accredited medic and one (1) dedicated ambulance

vehicle may service up to three (3) working sites if the ambulance and the medic are positioned no more than five (5) minutes from each of the working sites they allocated to support.

b. In the event of an accident on any of the three (3) individual working sites that

the medic and the ambulance are supporting, operations shall cease on all of the three (3) sites until medical coverage has been reinstated to the levels above and authorization by the LMAC has been granted to re-commence operations.

c. The location of the ambulance and the Medic shall be known to all Demining

Organization personnel at the Site. d. There shall be adequate communications between the Site Supervisor, the

Medic and the ambulance driver. e. The ambulance shall have medical equipment to service the operational sites. f. The ambulance shall afford sufficient space in the rear for the transportation of

at least one injured person laying down and for an additional person to administer effective medical treatment.

g. The ambulance shall be parked in an unobstructed position in order to

facilitate an effective response.




h. The response time shall be confirmed by rehearsal prior to commencing

clearance and hazardous area marking operations.

i. One ambulance and Medic shall be required to support a maximum of 30 personnel directly involved in clearance and hazardous area marking.

See Chapter 2 Site Preparation and Setting Out for the definition of directly and indirectly involved.

Figure: 1.1. Examples of Minimum Medical Support Requirements

5.2. Preparations before Execution of Mine/UXO Clearance Activities

5.2.1. Before commencement of any mine/UXO clearance activity a Medical Co-coordinator shall be nominated and be responsible for all preparations related to the medical support and evacuation plan. The responsibilities of the Medical Co-coordinator are to:

a. Ensure that all personnel, who are deployed to site, have passed at least a

basic first aid course. If necessary, arrange refresher courses monthly, in first aid, for personnel.




b. Locate, visit and establish the necessary contacts and agreements with the most suitable hospital in the vicinity. Any casualty shall be at the hospital within 60 minutes from the time of injury. In circumstances where this is not achievable, e.g. remote Sites, then the Mine Action Organization shall prepare an effective casualty evacuation plan and request its authorization from the LMAC.

c. Establish agreements for onward evacuation, from the local hospital, to a

suitable hospital for long-term treatment. d. If applicable select and mark a helicopter landing site, (minimum radius of 20

meters cleared area) making co-ordinates and exact location details available to the LMAC and the clearance Organizations HQ via their chain of command in case that helicopter support is required and is available in theatre.

e. Ensure that communication lines are always functional and that every mine

clearance operation site has communications with its own headquarters, with its medical support, with LMAC Operations.

f. Ensure that the demining worksite management documentation includes

details of the blood group and any known allergies for each demining worker are held in secure personnel folders within the organization’s HQ element in Lebanon. These are only to be released to the receiving medical facility if any individual is actually involved in a traumatic accident (all medical documents are to be considered “MEDICAL – IN – CONFIDENCE”).

5.3. Medical Evacuation Procedures

5.3.1. Although the medical evacuation procedure may differ for every project, the responsibilities of personnel within the operation remain the same. The following responsibilities apply.

5.3.2. Operators

a. Stop demining immediately. b. Clear the base line of personnel and equipment not required for the medical

evacuation. c. Prepare to assist in first aid/recovery as required.

d. All Team Leaders report to the supervisor.




5.4. Supervisor

a. Assesses the scene of the accident, including the location and condition of the casualty and possible presence of other mines/UXO.

b. Organize moving the casualty into the nearest cleared area (if necessary

organize deminers to clear lanes to the casualty). c. Maintains overall responsibility and control for the safety of all personnel

during the medical evacuation procedure. d. Maintains overall responsibility and control for the execution of the medical

evacuation. e. In the event that the medical assistant is a mine/UXO victim, takes over the

responsibility for the execution and control of the medical evacuation procedure.

f. Maintain radio communications with the Organization HQ to provide the

correct information when required. g. Informs the LMAC as soon as practically possible of the accident either

directly or indirectly via the Organization HQ. h. Secures the accident site and awaits further instructions.

5.5. Medical Assistant

a. Using personnel from the rest area brings the stretcher and medical equipment to a point close to the casualty, but still within a cleared area.

b. Maintains VHF radio contact with the supervisor. c. Once the casualty has been brought to the cleared area, takes the appropriate

action to stabilize and evacuate the casualty. d. Recommends the method of evacuation, in accordance with the extent of the

casualty’s injuries. e. Stays with the casualty and to report to the next level of medical aid. f. Monitor and record the casualty’s progress, this documentation is to follow the

casualty through the various stages of medical aid.




5.6. Casualty Evacuation

To ensure effective casualty evacuation in the event of an accident, the following procedure shall be used:

a. Nominate a road evacuation route from the Site to:

The nearest surgical facility.

The nearest registered helicopter-landing site (if applicable).

b. If using a helicopter evacuation, clear a helicopter-landing site of vegetation to a radius of 20 m prior to starting the demining task.

c. Inform the LMAC of the location and provide a UTM grid reference of the

landing site. d. Ensure communications to headquarters and LMAC is always effective. e. A vehicle designated as an ambulance must be on site at all times during

operations. This should be parked so that it can be loaded with a casualty and leave the site without having to manoeuvre. The driver must be available at all times. The ignition key should be left in the ambulance at all times when parked at a task site.

f. The medical assistant must be available to the site at all times during

demining operations (maximum 5 minutes away). g. All personnel involved in the operation must be competent in basic first aid,

casualty evacuation procedures, and with procedures for loading a stretcher into their ambulance vehicle.

h. Teams shall formally practice casualty evacuation on each new site, at least

once a month if the task takes longer than this and when there are personnel changes at the site such as supervisory staff, the medic and ambulance driver. These practices shall be recorded on the site documentation.

5.7. Procedure In the Event of an Accident

In the event of an accident the following procedure shall be adopted:

a. Stops work and inform supervisor and medical assistant that an accident has occurred.

b. Supervisor shall organize team members to clear around the casualty, if he is

in an un-cleared area, and move casualty to a safe area.




c. The supervisor informs his headquarters and the LMAC that there has been an accident.

d. Medical assistant administers first aid and arranges evacuation by stretcher

from the safe lane to the vehicle.

e. Transport casualty to nearest hospital or helicopter landing site if helicopter is available. The medic or the Paramedic/Doctor must follow the transport.

f. Transfer from stabilization unit to hospital under the supervision of the Medic

or Paramedic/Doctor.

g. The headquarters shall recommend method of evacuation away from the task site. If communications are lost, then evacuate by road to the nearest hospital.

h. If by road the team vehicle, in the absence of an ambulance shall normally be

used for evacuation. It should be driven carefully and if possible, escorted by a second vehicle.

i. If evacuation is by helicopter then the patient should be made as comfortable

as possible whilst waiting for it to arrive.

5.8. Procedure Following an Accident

Subsequent to an accident, the following procedure is to be adopted:

a. Account for all personnel and make sure no one else is injured. b. Support those personnel shocked by the accident. c. Account for all equipment and stores, but do not move any equipment directly

involved in the accident. d. Close off the lanes and area of the accident. e. List all the people who witnessed the accident or worked in the immediate

area and assist them to write their statements. f. Prepare for headquarters staff and LMAC Board of Inquiry members to

conduct an investigation. g. Collect the injured person’s belongings and equipment and secure them. h. Start preparations for the Accident Investigation according to chapter 16.

i. An accident should always be followed by a debrief, with all people that were

involved in the accident.




j. An Internal Incident/Accident Report and IMSMA Mine/UXO Incident/accident

Report must be completed and submitted to the LMAC within 72 hours after the accident (See Annex E) and Chapter 16).

ITEM QUANTITY Manual ventilation bag with oxygen reservoir + masks 1 Oral airway disposable size 2. 1 Oral airway disposable size 3 1 Oral airway disposable size 4 1 Universal scissors 1 Artery Forceps 2 Stethoscope 1 Blood pressure manometer. 1 Tourniquet 1 Burn dressing set 2 Gauze Pads, medium 25 Elastic bandage 5 rolls Absorbent dressing, medium 10 Absorbent dressing, large 5 Adhesive tape 1 roll Personal field dressing 5 Abdominal/Chest dressing 2 Triangular bandage 2 Syringe 1 ml 2 Syringe 5 ml 5 Syringe 10 ml 5 Injection needle 5 Injection needle, s.c. 5 Injection needle, i.m. 5 Infusion set 5 Intravenous cannula 16–20 G 5 Cervical collar set (preferable Stifnec) 1 Splint for upper limb 1 Splint for lower limb 1 Antiseptic solution 100 ml Alcohol Swabs 25 Gloves 5 par Inj. Morphine 10 mg/ml (or similar drug) 5 x 1 ml. Inj. Naloxon 0.4 mg/ml (if using opoid) 2 x 1 ml. Inj. Anti-emetic drug (if using opoid) 2 amp. Inj. Adrenaline 1 mg/ml (or similar drug) 3 x 1 ml. NaCl 9% for inj. 10 x 10 ml Ringer Solution (or similar drug) 2 x 1000 ml

Table: 1.1. Minimum Medical Equipment for a Trauma Care Pack




Table: 1.2. Minimum Medical Equipment for Casualty Evacuation.

6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.40 S&OH Medical Support to Demining Operations (Ed.1 Amendment 1, 2 & 3)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

ITEM QUANTITYStretcher 1 Scoop stretcher (or similar) 1 Blanket 2 Oxygen. See example below 1000 liters

1 Oxygen manometer & regulator with minimum flow of 10 liters/minuteOxygen mask with reservoir 1 Suction pump set 1 Water container 10 liters

1 VHF communication radio (on the RMAC communication net) Signal smokes (if possible) 1

Example: Oxygen cylinder of 5 liters and a pressure of 200 Bar = 1000 liters. The oxygen cylinder is to give 60 minutes of 80% oxygen at a rate of 15 Litres/minute

CHAPTER 08 REPORTING



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 08 REPORTING


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3 5.2. Reports ........................................................................................................................... 4 5.3. Timings ........................................................................................................................... 6





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all reports and records are complete and accurate before they are released by the Organization.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All operational reports detailing intentions, progress, suspension, within tasks or detailing the situation on completion of a task as well as any other progress reports required by clients/partners.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. The Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA): This is the United

Nation's preferred information system for the management of critical data in UN-supported field programmes and at the UN headquarters in New York. IMSMA consists, essentially, of two modules: the Field Module (FM) and Global Module (GM). The FM provides for data collection, information analysis and project management. It is used by the staff of the LMAC at national and regional level, and by the implementers of mine action projects - such as demining Organizations. The GM refines and collates data from IMSMA FMs (and other field-based information systems) and provides the LMAC and others with accurate, aggregated information for the strategic management of mine action.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all records and reports are completed correctly, in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The process indicates the general sequence and logical progression from information gathered from the fieldwork conducted through to the entering data into the LMAC/RMAC IMSMA database. The information gathered provides the basis for future planning and further task prioritization. Regular reporting on task progression enables LMAC/RMAC to adjust the database information and priorities as necessary and reallocate priorities if required. Agencies have a responsibility to submit weekly/monthly reports in a punctual manner. This process enables the LMAC to




monitor the yearly work plan in order to manage the overall calculated plan, and report to Government on the progress.

5.1.2. Accurate and timely reporting of all mine action activities are a key feature of an

effective mine action programme. All mine/UXO clearance Organizations are to submit regular reports, in the correct format, to the LMAC.

5.1.3. The Task Completion Report is to be submitted to the LMAC Operations, no later than five (5) working days following a task completion (QA completion field evaluation).

5.2. Reports

5.2.1. Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate: Following the QA completion and final field QA evaluation of a task site, the LMAC will instigate the Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate release. The certificate provides sufficient evidence that the clearance requirements have been met, the certificate is to be signed initially by the clearance Organization and then by the LMAC Director on behalf of the people of Lebanon (See Annex A).

5.2.3. Weekly/Monthly Summary Reports: Mine/UXO clearance Organizations are to

submit weekly/monthly summary reports to the LMAC. Organizations will not be credited with clearance figures stated in the Weekly Reports until the Completion Report has been received and verified. Examples of these reports are shown at (Annex G)

5.2.3. Weekly Plan (Intentions): In addition to the Weekly Summary Report, Mine/UXO clearance Organizations are to submit weekly plans detailing their operations for the forth coming week by close of operations every Saturday. This is to allow the LMAC to plan QA monitoring visits to all operational assets.

5.2.4. The Mine Clearance Completion and Suspension Reports: form part of the QA and

QC procedures and is intended to accurately record areas cleared and areas that have yet to be cleared by mine clearance teams. The reports also provide a permanent record of mine clearance activities in an area, whether it is total or partial clearance. This report is written at the completion/suspension of mine/UXO clearance of a specific area and must clearly state, by text and diagram, the area of definition and the level of clearance conducted. The Completion or Suspension Report is also to contain the following: (See Annex C)

a) Photographs of the Reference Point and Bench Mark used.

b) Photographs of all cleared areas.

c) Photographs of all un-cleared areas.

d) Photographs of any structures cleared or un-cleared.




e) Photograph of any Control Point briefing board schematics.

5.2.5. The Completion or Suspension Report is part of the Task Dossier (TD) and is to be

returned to the LMAC with the Task Dossier. The Task Dossier is to contain all information regarding the site generated during the life of the site by the clearance Organization; this includes all daily work sheets, site schematic drawings and documentation. The original site diagrams used as part of the site briefing boards are to be included, if this is not possible then clear readable photographs of such are to be included in the Completion or Suspension Report.

5.2.6. Dangerous Area Reports are to be submitted when Organizations identify dangerous areas not previously shown on minefield maps. Dangerous area reports are also useful if they can provide additional information for the records. It is important to show new dangerous areas on minefield maps as soon as possible. Organizations are to submit a written report using the IMSMA format to the LMAC within 72 hrs of identifying the area (See Annex D).

5.2.7. Mine/UXO Incident/Accident Reports are to be submitted in the event of an

accident/incident involving a clearance Organization. Organizations are to submit a written report within 5 working days of the event. (See Annex E) and Chapter 16).

5.2.8. EOD/UXO Demolition Disposal Reports are to be submitted to the LMAC operations

in the event that an Organization destroys items of UXO or mines outside of their normal tasking. The report is to include photographs and diagrams and is also to record explosive usage and final disposal details. This report is also to include any items that are removed from a minefield/task site and is to be submitted within 72 hours (See Annex S).




5.3. Timings

5.3.1. The following information is to be submitted to LMAC within the designated timelines:

a. Dangerous Area Report (if required)

Within 72 hours.

b. Completion/Suspension Report

Within 72 hours of task completion.

c. Initial Incident/Accident Report

Within 30 minutes of the event.

d. Internal Incident/Accident Report

Within 5 working days of the event.

e. Weekly Summary Report

Weekly, within 2 working days after the end of each week.

f. Monthly Summary Report

Monthly, within 2 working days after the end of each month.

g. Weekly Intentions plan

Weekly, 2 days before the end of operations each week.

h. EOD Completion Report

Within 72 hours of demolitions.

6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.60 Reporting and Investigation of Demining Incidents (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4) IMAS 05.10 Information Management – still under development

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 09 ACCREDITATION & QUALITY

ASSURANCE



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 09 ACCREDITATION & QUALITY ASSURANCE


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.





Contents 1. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 3 2. SCOPE .................................................................................................................................. 3 3. DEFINITION .......................................................................................................................... 3 4. RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................. 4 5. PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................... 4 5.1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 4 5.2. Accreditation - Basic Considerations ................................................................................. 5 5.3. Modification or Changes in the Management System ........................................................ 5 5.4. Modification or Changes to Operational Procedures .......................................................... 5 5.5. Quality Assurance - Introduction ........................................................................................ 6 5.6. QA for Manual Clearance Operations ................................................................................ 7 5.7. Mine Detection Dogs .......................................................................................................... 7 5.8. MDD Internal Evaluation .................................................................................................... 8 5.9. MDD External Evaluation ................................................................................................... 9 5.10. Accreditation of MDD .................................................................................................... 10 5.11. MDD Operational Accreditation .................................................................................... 11 5.12. Mechanical Clearance .................................................................................................. 15 5.13. Information Systems ..................................................................................................... 16 5.14. Sampling ....................................................................................................................... 16 5.15. Summary ...................................................................................................................... 19 6. REFERENCES .................................................................................................................... 19 7. ATTACHMENTS ................................................................................................................. 19




1. PURPOSE

1.1. The Purpose of this chapter is to ensure that Organizations achieve the minimum quality standards.

2. SCOPE

2.1 This National Mine Action Standard provides standards for the implementation of a system for the accreditation and licencing of international and local Mine Action agencies, donors and other Organizations involved with the planning and implementation of mine action activities in Lebanon including operational, administrative and support activities throughout the Organization.

2.2. Although this standard focuses on demining, the concept of accreditation and

licencing in Lebanon will be applied to other components of mine action including national technical assessment missions, impact surveys, mine awareness projects or any other mine action activities in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Accreditation: The procedure by which a Mine Action Organization is formally

recognized as competent and able to plan and manage mine action activities safely, effectively and efficiently. For most mine action programmes, the national mine action authority will be the body which provides accreditation. International Organizations such as the United Nations or regional bodies may also introduce accreditation schemes. ISO 9000 usage is that an “Accreditation” body accredits the “Certification or Registration” bodies that award ISO 9000 certificates to Organization s. The usage in IMAS is completely different to this, and is based on the main definition above, which is well understood in the mine action community.

3.1.2. Accreditation body: An Organization, normally an element of the national mine

action authority, responsible for the management and implementation of the national accreditation system.

3.1.3. Inspection: In the context of mine action, the term refers to the process of

measuring, examining, testing or otherwise comparing a sample of cleared land with the clearance requirements.

3.1.4. Inspection body: An Organization which conducts post-clearance QC on behalf of the

national mine action authority by applying random sampling procedures, or other appropriate and agreed methods of inspection.




3.1.5. Quality management: Coordinated activities to direct and control an Organization with regard to quality. [ISO 9000:2000]

3.1.6. Quality Control (QC): Part of quality management focused on fulfilling quality

requirements. [ISO 9000:2000] QC relates to the inspection of a finished product. In the case of humanitarian demining, the 'product' is safe cleared land.

3.1.7. Quality Assurance (QA): Part of quality management focused on providing

confidence that quality requirements will be met. The purpose of QA in humanitarian demining is to confirm that management practises and operational procedures for demining are appropriate, and will achieve the stated requirement in a safe, effective and efficient manner. Internal QA will be conducted by demining Organizations themselves, but external inspections by an external monitoring body should also be conducted.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to maintain all aspects of quality standards applicable to their position in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. All agency staff must be familiar with the accreditation and quality assurance chapter which is relevant to their job function.

5.1.2. Following a recent amendment to IMAS 07.30 Ed. 2, 2003, the previous terms of

Accreditation and Licencing has been amended to Organizational Accreditation and Operational Accreditation. Organizational Accreditation is the procedure by which a demining Organization is formally recognized as competent and able to plan and manage demining activities safely, effectively and efficiently.

5.1.3. The LMAC shall accredit all Organizations before any clearance being conducted in

Lebanon. 5.1.4. The LMAC shall be the Operational Accreditation Certification issuing body for all

Organizations wishing to work in Lebanon. 5.1.5. Operational Accreditation is the procedure by which a demining Organization is

formally recognized as competent and able to carry out demining activities. The granting of Operational Accreditation assumes that the capability shall not change beyond the scope or intention of the original Operational Accreditation. The LMAC shall conduct a field assessment of all operational assets and then recommend to the LMAC Director that a Provisional Operational Accreditation Licence be issued prior to that asset for a period of one month. At the completion of the one month




probation period if the clearance asset is conducting clearance in accordance with the clearance Organizations accredited SOP’s and has been subject to a minimum of four separate QA monitoring visits, each with an acceptable evaluation, on an operational site then the LMAC shall recommend that the LMAC Director issues a full Operational Accreditation Licence (See Annex I). In the case of UNIFIL assets, these four QA monitoring visits may be spread over a period of six weeks.

5.2. Accreditation - Basic Considerations

5.2.1. The basic considerations for obtaining and retaining Organizational and Operational Accreditation are that:

a. The applicant shall be competent to apply the general provisions of IMAS and

the specific provisions of the national mine action authority, including financial and insurance requirements.

b. Accreditation shall only be granted to a demining Organization so long as it

remains in conformity with IMAS and with NMAS.

c. Operational Accreditation Certificates shall only be granted to an Organizationally accredited Organization and its demining sub-units, however named, that are within the scope of the agreement and are in conformity with IMAS and with NMAS.

5.3. Modification or Changes in the Management System

5.3.1. If during the mine action programme the management of the demining Organization intends to make major or significant changes to its management structure, which could impact on its management capability, the LMAC may require an extension or revision of the accreditation and licence(s). For this reason, the accredited Organization shall inform the LMAC of any intended modification to its management system, or other changes that may affect compliance with its accreditation. The LMAC shall determine whether the announced changes require any form of re-assessment, either desk or on-site. Significant changes such as any Senior Management, Supervisors or Team Leaders are to be notified.

5.4. Modification or Changes to Operational Procedures

5.4.1. In the same way, the accredited Organization shall inform the LMAC of any intended modification to the operational procedures of one or more of its sub-units, or of the introduction of new or modified equipment. The LMAC shall determine whether the announced changes require a desk or on-site re-assessment.

5.4.2. If the changes are minor and are consistent with IMAS and NMAS, then no further

action should be necessary. If the changes are significant, then the LMAC shall consider conducting an on-site assessment. If the changes are substantial and the conditions and scope of the original licence(s) are no longer valid, then the LMAC shall require the demining Organization to request a new licence(s).




5.4.3. Full details on the accreditation process can be found in IMAS 07.30.0I Technical Note and (Annex I) to this NMAS details the Accreditation checklist for desk and on-site assessment.

5.5. Quality Assurance - Introduction

5.5.1. Quality Assurance (QA) covers the whole process of mine/UXO clearance while Quality Control (QC) is a combination of activities during or after as in the case of Sampling to provide the overall confidence levels in the process. All mine/UXO clearance shall be carried out according to this NMAS as established in the LMAC, and according to individual SOP’s that have been submitted and approved by the LMAC.

5.5.2. The standards have been established to ensure that procedures provide operations

with a maximum degree of safety and that once the land has been cleared, it is indeed free of mines or UXO to a minimum depth of 20 cm from the natural ground and is safe for use by civilians.

5.5.3. Determining the amount of QC and establishing an acceptable degree of QA requires good common sense and practicality be applied. Otherwise the process becomes difficult to implement in a timely manner and extremely costly in terms of resources and associated funding. It is understood that QC shall vary depending on the clearance technique such as mine detection dogs, mechanical options, manual clearance and the local conditions such as the mine/UXO threat and the soil conditions.

5.5.4. The basic framework for meeting humanitarian standards and the degree of QC is

as follows:

a. Adherence to Training Standards and enforcement of these standards. b. Adherence to the NMAS laid down by the LMAC. c. Adherence to individual SOPs accredited and approved by the LMAC. d. Evaluation of capacities before clearance (evaluation of dogs, mine detectors,

and demonstration of the use of mechanical means). e. Discipline in the danger area. f. Levels of supervision and the associated internal QC checks. g. The mine/UXO threat. h. The final use of the land shall determine the depth of clearance, which is set

at a minimum of 20 cm from the natural ground in Lebanon.




5.6. QA for Manual Clearance Operations

5.6.1. The general sequence of events for QA of manual clearance assets is attached at Appendix 1 to this chapter. This Appendix outlines the QA Monitoring and Special Monitoring sequences from the issuing of the task dossier to site set up and mine clearance.

5.6.2. Appendix 2 to this Chapter outlines the QA evaluation process showing the various

QA Evaluation Forms (QAEF) attached at (Annex J) and how they are employed in the entire QA process from site set up until the final QA Completion Evaluation.

5.6.3. Manual clearance operations fall into two categories; clearance with metal detectors

and prodders/excavation or prodders/excavation only. An essential part of the QA process is QC and at least 10% of QC is conducted during mine clearance operations daily. Good, continuous supervision is essential.

5.6.4. The most difficult environment for QC is when the ground does not permit the use of

mine detectors. In this situation, additional supervision is mandatory, as it makes no sense to prod/excavate the area a second time. The only option to check the area is to use mine detection dogs or mechanical options, if available.

5.6.5. If metal detectors can be used, the area, i.e. the lanes, shall be checked daily by the

supervisors as this shall be expedient since all required metal shall be removed from the cleared area as specified in the NMAS Chapter 4 Manual Mine Clearance.

5.6.6. In summary it is recommended that for manual clearance the following QA is

acceptable provided that a sound internal QC system is in place:

a. Manual clearance with metal detectors requires QC of at least 10% of all cleared areas each day.

b. Manual clearance without metal detectors using prodding/excavation only shall

require additional constant supervision and should be checked using mine dogs or a mechanical option of the cleared area. If these options are not available, additional supervision shall be required.

c. It must be emphasized that sound procedures and close supervision

associated with well-trained personnel provides a high degree of reliability towards providing cleared safe land for use by civilians.

5.7. Mine Detection Dogs

5.7.1. The general sequence of events for QA of MDD clearance assets is attached at Appendix 3 to this chapter. This Appendix outlines the MDD QA Monitoring and Special Monitoring sequences from the initial MDD evaluation.

5.7.2. Appendix 4 to this Chapter outlines the MDD QA Accreditation and QA evaluation

process showing the various MDD QA Evaluation Forms (MDD QAEF) attached at




(Annex J) and how they are employed in the entire MDD QA process from site set up until the final Task QA Completion Evaluation.

5.7.3. Appendix 5 to this Chapter shows the source documentation used for MDD QA

during the desk assessment, field assessment, internal and external QA monitoring process used in Lebanon.

5.7.4. Mine Detection Dogs (MDD) are most effective for Technical Surveys, in order to reduce large suspected mined areas to small areas that are actually mined. Dogs are also suitable for mine/UXO verification. Many suspected mined areas may not be mined after all but the suspicion prevents people from putting the land into use. Dogs can effectively verify the presence or absence of mines, which shall often result in the release of many areas without further clearance due to absence of mines. Dogs are also suitable for the clearance of roads and railways, areas that are often difficult to demine by other means. Again good supervision and well-trained teams are mandatory. Land surveyed in this manner may need to have additional QC. Where mines are found manual clearance procedures and QC measures shall be used.

5.7.5. Dogs shall also require accreditation in order to operate in Lebanon. No MDD team

shall be accepted for operational work without prior evaluation and subsequent accreditation. MDD teams will also be externally reassessed if there is a major change in weather conditions, such as the onset of winter rains or post winter whilst ground conditions are still wet. MDD teams should be accredited in the same environmental and ground conditions that they shall work.

5.7.6. The purpose of the evaluation is to determine the dogs’ ability to find mines/UXO

under the same conditions as the mines encountered in the mined areas. Management routines should not be tested in the evaluation but may be checked upon by QA teams during operations.

5.7.7. A minimum standard for the use of dogs in Lebanon is that at least two different

licenced dogs, with handler/s shall clear an area before it is considered clear. However one licenced dog can be used for QC on manual, mechanical or another MDD teams work area. The LMAC has the mandate to withdraw the accreditation for a MDD team, if it is shown that the MDD team does not fulfill the parameters as defined in the NMAS. It is important that the dogs are used in such way that the dog handlers and dogs are not put at unnecessary risk during operations.

5.7.8. When a MDD team has not been operational or training for a period of 10 working

days, e.g. dog handlers on leave or dog on sick leave, an external evaluation must take place before MDD team are allowed to commence operational work again.

5.8. MDD Internal Evaluation

5.8.1. Internal Evaluation must be undertaken by the Organization at least every second month. The Organizations own evaluation site may be used. The internal evaluation processes must be included in the SOP. Results from the evaluations must be recorded properly and signed by the person responsible for the evaluation. The




following are the minimum requirement for the internal evaluation:

a. Minimum 200 m² (2 boxes/panels) to be searched by each dog. b. At least 1 to 3 mines/items in the boxes. Test items should be AP-mines, AT-

mines and UXO regularly cleared in Lebanon.

c. Mines/UXO must have been in the ground for at least 3 months. d. Pass criteria:

The SOP is followed correctly. 100% indication of all mines/UXO per dog within 100 cm from the target. No scratching or digging on indication. 4 or less false indications per box per dog.

e. Failure criteria:

5 or more false indications per box per dog. Less than 100 % of all the items found per dog. The dog scratches or digs on any indications. The SOP is not followed correctly.

f. If a dog fails the evaluation, the dog must be taken out of work for re-training

for one week period. LMAC can approve a shorter period of time, if the Organization has been able to conduct successful re-training. A new evaluation must be conducted and passed before the dog can be used for clearance again. An example of the evaluation form should be made available to all Organizations prior to the evaluation period.

g. Records from the internal evaluations must be made available and a copy

sent to the LMAC. Dates of the forth coming monthly evaluation shall be reported to LMAC QA-Section in good time before the evaluation. The LMAC QA Officer has the right to be present during the evaluation.

5.9. MDD External Evaluation

5.9.1. LMAC shall conduct this every second month. The LMAC-MDD accreditation site shall be used. The following are the minimum requirement for the external evaluation:

a. Minimum 200 m² (2 boxes/panels) to be searched by each dog. b. At least 1 to 3 mines/items in the box. Test items should be AP-mines,

AT-mines and UXO regularly cleared in Lebanon. c. Mines must have been in the ground for at least 3 months.




d. Pass criteria:

The SOP is followed correctly. 100% indication of all mines/UXO per dog within 100 cm from the target. No scratching or digging on indication. 4 or less false indications per box per dog.

e. Failure criteria:

5 or more false indications per box per dog. Less than 100 % of all the items found per dog. The dog scratches or digs on any indications. SOP is not followed correctly.

5.9.2. If a dog fails the evaluation, the dog must be taken out of work for re-training for one

week. The LMAC can approve a shorter period of time, if the Organization has been able to conduct successful re-training. A new evaluation must be conducted and passed before the dog can be used for clearance again. The manager or the senior supervisor of the Organization, being evaluated, has the right to be present during the evaluation if desired.

5.10. Accreditation of MDD

5.10.1. All Organizations intending to use dogs, as part of a demining concept must ensure that the dogs and the dog team have received the necessary accreditation.

5.10.2. The accreditation shall only be given subsequent to a practical evaluation of the

dogs and an evaluation of the Organization and the operational concept (SOP), which shall be used by the Organization when working with the dogs.

5.10.3. Before accreditation the responsible Organization must provide the following

information to the LMAC:

a. Company Review/Outline: Detailed information about the Organization, how the project is intended to be organized and managed.

b. Curriculum Vitae: For all team leaders, dog instructors and managers.

Information about how the dog handlers have been trained etc. c. Dog information: Information about each of the dogs that intended to be used,

previous accreditation’s, age, type, name, vaccinations, limitations etc. d. SOP’s: A complete SOP covering all aspects of operation, supervision,

quality control and management. The SOP’s for each Organization must include the following information:




1. Intended Type of Clearance: The dogs are used for primary clearance,

road clearance, quality control, area verification, area reduction of minefields, house/building clearance, confirmation after machines, etc.

2. Detailed Operational Concept: Search pattern, marking, overlap, how many

dogs clear the same area and how, action on finds, dealing with finds, different search techniques dependent on the task, manual demining back-up, procedures to be followed when integrated with ground preparation or other clearance methods, weather and ground limitations etc.

3. Internal Evaluation Procedures: Daily evaluation procedures before work.

Monthly evaluation procedures. How shall the dogs be internally evaluated?

4. Training: Training requirement such as training field, training frequency etc. 5. Tripwires: Is the dog trained to detect tripwires? 6. House/Buildings Clearance: Is the dog trained to search houses/buildings? 7. Health Care: Daily/weekly health care routines. 8. Communication and Medical Evacuation Procedures: Communication

procedures and procedures for medical back up and evacuation in the event of accidents.

5.11. MDD Operational Accreditation

5.11.1. In order for any Mine Detection Dog (MDD) team to carry out clearance operations in Lebanon, the LMAC-MDD Accreditation Board on behalf of the Lebanon Mine Action Center (LMAC) must first accredit them. Accreditation shall be in line with the provision and procedures as outlined in the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS 09.42 Edition 1) and this document.

5.11.2. The MDD Accreditation Board comprise of LMAC-QA-MDD Officer’s

5.11.3. When the Organization being evaluated arrives on site, the LMAC-MDD

Accreditation Board shall brief them. The scope of the briefing include: a. Presentation of MDD Accreditation Board members. b. Borders of the evaluation areas. c. Borders of training area. d. Location for airing the dogs. e. Location for car parking.




f. Area for spectators. g. An explanation of the marking system in the evaluation area and allocation of

a minimum of four boxes/panels to be searched individually per dog, giving a minimum total of eight boxes per MDD team.

5.11.4. Organizations shall be briefed on the evaluation procedure and may rehearse the

process if desired in a warm up box.

5.11.5. Evaluation shall only be carried out if the weather is the same as, or better than the conditions under which the MDD team would normally operate. If the weather is such that the Organization would not use the dogs and this is stated in the SOP, the test shall be postponed until conditions improve. As a general rule, tests shall not be carried out if the ground is too wet or it is too cold, rainy, hot, and or windy.

5.11.6. The test area shall include some of the mine/UXO found in the area of operations.

5.11.7. Boxes or panels of 100 square meters containing a varying number of mines/UXO

shall be used. Each box/panel contains from zero to three mines/UXO. Each dog individually search a minimum of four boxes/panels (400 square meters) making a total of eight box/panels per team, additional boxes may be allocated at the discretion of the accreditation board. Within the four box/panels allocated for each dog within a team there shall be a minimum of five (5) mines/UXO.

5.11.8. Boxes be provided at the LMAC approved MDD Training area which should be

available to allow an Organization to acclimatize/rehears prior to the evaluation.

5.11.9. Search times during a test are 30 minutes per box/panel. The clock starts when the search in a box begins and shall not stop until that box has been completed. The recorded time shall only start again when the search in the next box commences and so on and so forth.

5.11.10 All the munitions i.e. Neutralized various types of UXO and Landmines, excluding

sub-munitions were transported in a vehicle and hand carried to their test location within evaluation boxes. No munitions were placed on the ground in any other part of the evaluation area.

5.11.11. To be able to pinpoint the objects within in each box during any evaluation, the

objects were laid using a coordinate system. Relevant Documents are under the Control of the LMAC MDD QA Officer’s.

5.11.12. The MDD Accreditation Board shall accept procedures and standards stated in

Organizations SOP’s of regarding the size and the performance of the MDD Team. The area is to be searched in accordance with the Organizations SOP during the evaluation process.

5.11.13. The following information must be provided to the MDD Accreditation Board for desk

assessment and approval prior to any testing:




a. SOP: The SOP covering all aspects of MDD-operation, supervision, quality control and management.

b. Handler Information: CV, to including previous accreditation’s and other

relevant experiences.

c. Dog Information: Information about every dog that intended to be evaluated, including previous accreditations, age, type, name, ID, vaccinations, limitations regarding employment (if any).

5.11.14. An MDD Team pass the accreditation by achieving the following criteria:

a. The SOP is followed correctly.

b. The MDD Team has to achieve 100% indication of the presence of all

mines/UXO within the test boxes.

c. All indications are within 100 cm from the targets.

d. No scratching or digging on indication.

e. 4 or less false indications per box per team are allowed.

5.11.15. An MDD Team may fail the accreditation by achieving the following criteria .

a. The MDD Team did not achieve 100% indication of the presence of all mines/UXO within the test boxes.

b. Indications are not within the allowable 100 cm from the targets. c. 5 or more false indications per box per team. d. If a dog scratches or digs on an indication. e. The SOP is not followed correctly.

5.11.16. If a dog fails the test, the dog can only be tested again after 7 days of refresher

training. If a dog fails a second test, a third test shall be undertaken after a month. The LMAC can approve a shorter period of time, if the dog has been able to conduct successful re-training. If a dog fails the accreditation three times then the dog shall be denied to be re-accredited for a period of one (1) year.

5.11.17. Dog handlers have the right to observe the area prior to the accreditation and to

walk the dog(s) around the test area outside the boundary marking before the accreditation commences.

5.11.18. When a dog indicates a find, the handler must mark the area in accordance with the

Organizations SOP. If this process, for example, includes notification of a team




leader/equivalent that puts out a marker, then this must be followed verbally.

5.11.19. Each dog in a team must be tested individually in a minimum of four boxes/panels

during a test.

5.11.20. An example of the evaluation form is available in (Annex J).

MDD Operational Accreditation Test 1-Landmine Test, Primary Clearance of Land/Roads

5.11.21. The LMAC-MDD Accreditation area shall be sited at a LMAC approved location.

There shall be no access to this area by any Organization or team unless accompanied by the LMAC-QA-MDD Officer’s.

5.11.22. The accreditation area was formerly used as agricultural land for planting sesame

and has been leased by LMAC from the landowner. As far as the LMAC can ascertain the land has never been mined.

5.11.23. The LMAC has had access to the area since the beginning of October 2006, and all

test items in the area were laid during the period of the 15th of November through till the 16th of December 2006.

5.11.24. The area is fenced to prevent tampering with the laid test items and to ensure that

livestock does not contaminate the ground. Moles/Rodents infest the area, which can cause problems during evaluations, as the rodent tunnels can spread the scent of a mine. This can cause the dog to indicate it further than the allowable 100 centimeters. The LMAC Accreditation Board shall take this into consideration during the evaluation and efforts shall be made to avoid testing in recently affected boxes.

5.11.25. The aim of the test is to determinate the dog’s capability to detect mines/UXO with a

minimum of false indications.

5.11.26. No dogs shall be evaluated on areas that have recently been used by other dogs. The time since the previous accreditation shall be a minimum of 1 month. Each box shall contain mines/UXO that have been in the ground, untouched for at least 3 months.

5.11.27 The mines are buried to a maximum depth of 20 cm from the natural ground (200

mm) and under the same conditions as the mines encountered throughout Lebanon.

MDD Operational Accreditation Test 3-Landmine Test, Clearance behind Machines

5.11.28. A MDD team must undergo and pass Operational Accreditation Test 1 before attempting Operational Accreditation Test 3 unless otherwise authorized by the LMAC.




5.11.29. The accreditation site shall be located in an area previously processed by the

particular machine that the MDD Team’s Organizations are using. The LMAC-QA- MDD Officer’s notifies the MDD representative of each Organization of the exact location of the accreditation area. An LMAC approved area shall be set aside for Operational Accreditation Test 3. There is a minimum 2 week preparation period which shall be taken into consideration.

5.11.30. The aim of the test is to determinate the dog’s capability to detect mines/UXO in

machine processed ground with a minimum of false indications.

5.11.31. Dogs are normally used to verify areas behind one specific machine type. The MDD Team shall be tested in an area previously processed by the particular type of machine that the MDD Team’s Organization is using. All test items shall be placed in the ground in accordance with IMAS 09.42 (Second Edition March 2008) chapter 10, Operational Accreditation Test 3.

5.11.32. Dogs shall not be evaluated on areas that have been previously used by other dogs.

The test site shall have a minimum of 2 days soak time after the mechanical mine clearance has taken place, provided that it has rained at least one time during these days. In periods with no rain the soak time shall be increased to a minimum of 7 days. No MDD Team’s shall be evaluated on a shorter soak time. Evaluation must take place no later than 4 weeks after the area was processed or the procedure must be redone.

5.11.33. Although this is a different test that shall determine the MDD teams capability to

locate items after mechanical processing; the same pass/fail criteria apply as mentioned above for Operation Accreditation test 1.

5.11.34. The depths of the mines/UXO should vary between the surface and a maximum of

20 cm (200 mm).

5.12. Mechanical Clearance

5.12.1. Machines are suitable for area reduction and verification of mine/UXO suspected areas but not necessarily for the clearance of regular minefields. Mechanical mine clearance machines have often been tested based on the ability to demine high-density minefields in varying terrain and environments. Under such conditions where severe limitations based on vegetation and topographic constraints often exist, the poor clearance efficiency has discredited the use of mechanical mine clearance for humanitarian mine/UXO clearance operations. Considering that only 10-30% of suspected land is normally mined however, selective use for verification and well-suited clearance tasks have been extremely valuable in the support of humanitarian mine/UXO clearance operations.

5.12.2. For mechanical mine clearance to become successful and increase the cost

efficiency of overall mine clearance, it is necessary to be aware of the machines limitations. Machines should never be used in areas not suited to mechanical mine clearance. If used incorrectly this shall reduce the overall confidence of the




clearance and cause unnecessary accidents.

5.12.3. It is recommended that clearance evaluations are carried out before the

implementation of mechanical mine clearance.

5.12.4. In support of manual clearance, the mechanical clearance equipment prepares the ground and is followed a 100% by manual clearance. Mechanical clearance is ideal to support QA operations. If mechanical clearance is scarce and manual clearance has taken place, the mechanical equipment can be used for QA on 5% of the cleared land. Mechanical systems such as remote mini-flails are therefore options to provide the QA confidence levels.

5.13. Information Systems

5.13.1. QA needs to be applied to the mine database in terms of input and output of information. A system is being developed to streamline the format of information that is entered in the database, a verification system, as well as a system to create credibility in the output. Full details of all QA Evaluation forms can be found at Annex J to this document. Organizations are welcome to also use the QA Evaluations forms for their own QA internal evaluating processes.

5.14. Sampling

5.14.1. Inspection bodies, acting on behalf of LMAC, shall do the inspection of cleared land. This inspection forms part of a management process which aims to verify the quality of clearance, and to establish sufficient confidence that the demining Organization has removed and/or destroyed all mine and UXO hazards from the specified area to the specified depth, in accordance with its agreed contractual obligations.

5.14.2. Confidence can be objective or subjective. The term 'confidence' used in ISO 2859-

0 and this chapter refers to the objective mathematical probability of achieving the required level of clearance. Subjective confidence, which involves human factors such as perception, judgment and opinion, is not addressed in this Chapter.

5.14.3. The effectiveness and validity of inspection by sampling requires the clearance

process to be 'continuous and under control'. A 'continuous' process implies that each lot presented for inspection should include land, which has been cleared under similar conditions; i.e. by sub-units with similar capabilities, using similar operational procedures and with similar equipment.

5.14.4. The procedures and equipment used by the inspection body to inspect the samples

of cleared land should be approved by the LMAC, and should be agreed with the clearance Organization as part of the contract or agreement. Any major changes to sampling or inspection procedures (such as the introduction of mechanical or dog-assisted sampling) should be agreed between the LMAC and demining Organization prior to the start of inspection. The LMAC and the demining Organization should agree a mutually acceptable time limit within which the sampling inspection must take place.




5.14.5. A 'lot' should be considered as 'cleared' only if all the samples in the lot are found to

be free of mines or UXO down to the depth specified in the contract. The following is the non conformity criteria and procedures.

a. Critical Non-conformity – De-mining sites: A mine or an item of UXO being located within the lot of land. This will be regarded as a QC failure.

b. Non conformity – De-mining sites: A single piece of ferrous metal (previously

un-investigated by the clearance team within the specified clearance depth) equal or greater in mass to the metal content of the type of mines located with the smallest metal content on the lot.

c. For example: De-mining site containing M15 Anti-Tank mines and No 4A Anti-

personnel mines. The metallic mass of the No 9 igniter fuze assembly from the No 4A Anti-personnel mine would be considered the size of the non-conformity in this situation.

d. Critical non-conformity – BAC sites: A sub-munition or an item of UXO that is

equal to or greater in mass than the smallest type of sub-munition previously located on the lot, being located within the lot of land within the specified clearance depth. This will be regarded as a QC failure.

e. Non conformity – BAC sites: A single piece of ferrous metal (previously un-

investigated by the clearance team within the specified clearance depth) equal to or greater in mass to the metal content of the smallest type of sub-munition located during the clearance of the lot.

f. Non-conformity to critical non-conformity (all sites): The identification of three

or more separate sample boxes, in a single lot, with each found to contain one or more non-conformities. This will constitute a lack of confidence in the clearance. In these circumstances the lot shall be declared to have failed the inspection and be considered a QC failure.

g. Note: Items of UXO of a metallic mass below the mass of the non-conformity

size determined for the lot shall not be considered as critical non conformities. The non-conformity rules shall not apply for sites cleared by the area excavation technique (full excavation) or by MDDs.

5.14.6. The LMAC shall determine the corrective action to be taken on lots that are rejected. Guidance on corrective action should be provided in advance, should be based on NMAS, and should form part of the demining organization’s contract or agreement.

5.14.7. Action on QC failure: The following shall then be carried out:

a. An on-site meeting will be held by the between the LMAC and a representative

from the de-mining Organization. The de-mining Organization shall be informed of the reason for the QC failure and have an opportunity to make their representations.




b. An investigation shall be carried out by the LMAC to ensure any mine/UXO located during sampling was not imported onto the site after the site was completed or handed over. Or any mine/UXO was located below the specified clearance depth during the clearance and has since being brought within the specified clearance depth due to agricultural plowing or some other action.

c. If it is deemed that a mine/UXO located during sampling was not missed by the

de-mining Organization then the LMAC shall then take responsibility for the mine/UXO and task an Organization to deal with the item(s). The task area shall be re-assessed and a new clearance plan may be necessary. The sampling record and schematic shall be added to the task file and be returned to IMSMA. The land owner shall be informed that the land may still contain mines/UXO and that it shall be re-cleared when a team becomes available.

d. If it is deemed that a mine/UXO located during sampling was missed by the

de-mining Organization, the clearance Organizations are obligated to return and initiate a 10,000m² box sub-surface search to a clearance depth of 20cm, or to the specified clearance depth as detailed in the clearance plan. If however during clearance operations any additional items are discovered within the 10,000m² box, it is up to the operations officer to decide whether to clean the entire site or to continue Fade Out from the item found.

5.14.8. The demining Organization should investigate every critical non-conformity, shall provide the inspection body with reasons for each critical non-conformity, and shall provide a programme of corrective action. If a lot fails re-inspection following corrective action, the inspection body may require the lot to be cleared again using a different sub-unit using different operational procedures and with different equipment, if these alternate methods exist. If no acceptable reason is given for a critical non-conformity, either by the clearance Organization or by the inspection body, the inspection body should require the lot to be marked and fenced until the reasons for the non-conformity can be established.

5.14.9. Lots should not be offered for re-inspection until the demining Organization has

taken corrective action as agreed with the inspection body in accordance with the LMAC. The inspection body should specify whether normal or tightened inspection shall be used for re-inspection. This shall be based on guidance provided by the national mine action authority.

5.14.10. The sample plan, the methods used for inspection, and the results should be

recorded by the inspection body, including the location, depth, types of hazard and other non-conformities specified in the contract such as metal fragments or explosive residue. Details of all corrective action shall also be recorded. All records shall be passed to the LMAC.




5.15. Summary

5.15.1. It is important to keep QA in perspective and apply it in a judicious manner. In the mine clearance process QA is a continuous process accomplished through QC of training, procedures, and supervision. Additional QC to provide the levels of QA is required only when the QC process has limitations or obvious shortcomings. QA must enhance the overall mine/UXO clearance process and not slow it down unnecessarily or create financial and resource barriers. Establishing a QA system that imposes serious constraints to productivity does not constitute an effective response to dealing with the problem of mine/UXO contamination. The requirement to achieve the maximum degree of safety must be balanced against the need to remove the threat posed by mines/UXO and to return land to productive use. This requires a common sense approach and degree of risk management by responsible Organization.

6. REFERENCES



IMAS 07.30 Accreditation of Demining Organizations (Ed. 2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4) IMAS 07.31 Accreditation of MRE Organizations Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 09.42 Operational Testing of MDDs and Handlers (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) Appendix 1 Quality Assurance Sequence Of Events Appendix 2 Quality Assurance Evaluation Process Appendix 3 MDD Quality Assurance Sequence Of Events Appendix 4 MDD QA Accreditation and QA Evaluation Process Appendix 5 MDD QA Source Documentation

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 10 MECHANICAL ASSISTED CLEARANCE

OPERATIONS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 10 MECHANICAL ASSISTED CLEARANCE OPERATIONS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Concept of Operations .................................................................................................... 4 5.3. Limitations ...................................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Guiding Principles ........................................................................................................... 5 5.5. Mechanical System Test and Evaluation ........................................................................ 6 5.6. Working Plan .................................................................................................................. 7 5.7. General Safety Precautions ............................................................................................ 7 5.8. Vehicle EOD Checks ...................................................................................................... 9 5.9. Vehicle Recovery Drills ................................................................................................. 10 5.10. CASEVAC Drills ........................................................................................................ 11 5.11. Personnel .................................................................................................................. 11 5.12. Mechanical Assets in Lebanon .................................................................................. 12 5.13. ARMTRAC 100 .......................................................................................................... 14 5.14. MINECAT 230 FLAIL ................................................................................................. 15 5.15. Armoured Excavators ................................................................................................ 16 5.16. Armoured Bulldozer ................................................................................................... 16 5.17. Mechanical Sifting ..................................................................................................... 17 Actions on detonation during sifting operations ............................................................ 17 Manual clearance of sifted material .............................................................................. 18 MDD Clearance of sifted material ................................................................................. 18

5.18. Mechanical Crushers ................................................................................................. 19 5.19. MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER ............................................................. 20 5.20. Communications ........................................................................................................ 21 5.21. Mechanically Assisted Demining Operations Site Layout .......................................... 22 5.22. Overlaps between Assets .......................................................................................... 22





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that Organizations achieve the minimum quality standards.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This document is a guide on the application of standards to describe the general use of Mechanically Assisted Mine Clearance machines and their application to demining operations in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Mechanically-assisted clearance: The use of appropriate mechanical equipment to

augment other procedures in humanitarian demining such as manual clearance and mine detection dogs (MDDs).

3.1.2. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA): A Low Threat Hazardous Area are any areas

of land that are suspected of containing a mine or UXO threat. Normally reported dangerous areas requiring Level 1 or Level 2 Survey fall into this category. The minimum clearance depth for all LTHA in Lebanon is 10 cm.

3.1.3. High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA): A High Threat Hazardous Area is an area

with a confirmed or known presence of a mine or UXO threat. All areas contained within minefield fencing are deemed to be HTHA. The clearance depth for all HTHA in Lebanon is 20 cm.

3.1.4. Minefield Area (MFA): The Minefield Area is the area containing mines and a

specified area surrounding the mine rows within a military laid pattern minefield. It can also be a specified area around non-military laid pattern minefields. This area is subject to a minimum 10% confirmation clearance with a second demining asset.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to maintain all aspects of quality standards applicable to their position in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.




5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Mechanically assisted clearance is an essential tool for mine/UXO clearance operations in Lebanon. Mechanically assisted clearance must be part of an integrated approach with the associated Organizational structure, logistic and administrative support in order to provide sustainability and allow integration with manual or MDD assets.

5.1.2. Mechanical assets will often significantly reduce the time spent on tasks and

therefore increase production rates and reduce the overall costs of clearing contaminated areas, when integrated correctly into the overall demining process. Mechanically assisted clearance is primarily used for the clearance of vegetation and in the preparation of ground in order to accelerate manual or MDD clearance.

5.1.3. Mechanical assets can be utilised as a tool for rapidly determining the extent of a

suspected dangerous area when conducting area reduction / technical survey in low threat hazardous areas (LTHA). Mechanical assets can also be used to confirm manually cleared areas as part of the QA process so long as the mechanical asset is capable of achieving the required clearance depth in Lebanon of 20 cm.

5.1.4. The introduction of mechanical assets into the overall clearance process must be

controlled and the performance measured, to ensure that the mechanical assets are being used safely, effectively and efficiently.

5.2. Concept of Operations

5.2.1. The general Concept of Operations adopted in Lebanon to clear known recorded military laid pattern minefields is to use mechanical and MDD assets for area reduction and clearing access routes to the minefield perimeter (normally visible minefield fence); then manual clearance assets are used to clear into the minefield and locate the mine rows, once the mine rows, mine orientation and pattern are confirmed, then manually clear the known mine rows. Once the mine rows and the area known as the Minefield Area (MFA) have been manually cleared. Confirmation clearance by a second asset of a minimum of 10% over the MFA (mine rows) will be conducted. Mechanical and MDD assets can then be used to clear the peripheral areas outside of the MFA, inside and outside the minefield fence.

5.2.2. Mechanical flail/rotary tiller assets are never used as a sole clearance tool and will

always be followed by manual or MDD clearance, however in a LTHA or suspected hazardous areas (SHA) where there is no previous history or evidence of mines or UXO in the area and mechanical flailing is conducted as a verification/community confidence building operation then the LMAC Operations Section may authorize mechanical flailing without a second asset clearance on a site-by-site basis.




5.3. Limitations

5.3.1. Due to experience gained from the past employment of mechanical assets in

Lebanon and in particular the use of mechanical flail systems; the LMAC now prohibits the use of mechanical flails as a primary clearance tool over the known mine rows when assisting clearance of “military laid pattern minefields” such as those laid by the Israelis and their Militia Forces.

5.3.2. Mechanical flailing/rotary tillers are not permitted to be used when conducting

clearance of areas known to contain mines fitted with a cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar such as the Israeli No4 APM or the GYATA 64 APM. This is due to the increased risk to follow up manual or MDD clearance assets as a result of mines not detonated or broken up by the flail, but which have been made more sensitive due to the flailing action.

5.3.3. Mechanical flails/rotary tillers are not to be used as a primary clearance tool in any

minefields where a pattern can be determined; manual clearance is always the preferred method of clearing “pattern minefields” followed by confirmation by either mechanical flail or MDD assets. Manual clearance of pattern minefields allows for the accurate recording of the size, shape, pattern and exact quantities of mines located in the area for future reference. Primary mechanical clearance will normally destroy all evidence of any useful information about the minefield. It is possible that Mechanical Flail/ Rotary Tillers maybe used as a primary clearance tool for AT minefields only, but this will only be approved by the LMAC on a site-by-site basis if acceptable.

5.3.4. Mechanical flail/rotary tiller assets are never used as a sole clearance tool in any

High Threat hazardous Areas (HTHA) and will always be followed by manual or MDD clearance, however in a LTHA or suspected hazardous areas (SHA) where there is no previous history or evidence of mines or UXO in the area and mechanical flailing is conducted as a verification/community confidence building operation then the LMAC Operations Section may authorize on a site-by-site basis mechanical flailing without the follow up second asset clearance. However a second clearance asset must follow any mechanical verification or clearance conducted in any LTHA that has a previous history or evidence of a threat.

5.3.5. Mechanical assets such as the excavator/sifter can be used for primary clearance of

contaminated earth spoil and rubbish piles so long as any such sifted spoil/rubbish is rechecked by a second asset afterwards. This secondary clearance is completed to check for fuzes or mine parts that may have passed through the sifter, manual or MDD assets can be employed.

5.4. Guiding Principles

5.4.1. Parameters for each mechanical system will vary, but in general, each system must:

a. Be safe for the system operator and be adaptable in order to cater to the




specific mine threat and specific ground conditions.

b. Have an internal Organizational structure in order to be able to integrate fully

with other clearance assets as required. c. Be designed and structured in such a way that it accelerates mine clearance

operations in a safe, cost effective and productive manner.

5.4.2. The development and employment of mechanical assets must take into account the following factors:

a. The specific mine/UXO threat. b. The simplicity of design and operation. c. The maintainability and sustainability of the equipment in the area of

operations. d. The ability to deploy itself, or be deployed to the clearance site. e. The adaptability of the mechanical assets in differing terrain conditions. f. The requirement for detailed and accredited SOP’s. g. The ability to achieve the clearance depth requirement (20 cm), for Lebanon. h. The requirement for the training of national operators in order to maintain a

national capacity if required.

5.5. Mechanical System Test and Evaluation

5.5.1. The aim of a mechanical system test and evaluation is to trial and assess any mechanical asset prior to its operational deployment. The following evaluation is required for all mechanical assets being deployed in Lebanon:

a. A set test and evaluation time period. b. Desk approval of mechanical SOP’s detailing the mechanical asset

procedures, safety precautions and the clearance asset integration procedures.

c. Follow-up manual clearance or MDD team procedures, in order to provide

invaluable data on the test and evaluation results; also QA results of the mechanically worked area.

5.5.2. A written evaluation report specifying the following operational statistical data:

a. Clearance capacity (square meters/hour).




b. Mechanical mobility in differing terrain and soil types. c. Mines or UXOs by type, surface laid or buried, destroyed. d. Mines or UXOs by type, surface laid or buried, partially destroyed. e. Mines or UXOs by type not partially damaged or destroyed. f. Depth of clearance in differing terrain and soil types. g. Command, control and communications procedures. h. Test and evaluation conclusions and recommendations.

5.5.3. This data collected over the trial period should include information and performance

data on deep buried mines; surface irregularities produced by rocks or ditches and maneuverability problems encountered in different soil types. This data should give a high degree of reliability to the conclusions of the report and recommended the future use / working parameters of the equipment. All mechanical trial and evaluation results must be passed to the LMAC Operations Section, in order for the information to be evaluated during the accreditation process.

5.6. Working Plan

5.6.1. Prior to any mechanical work being carried out, a mechanical work plan is to be drafted by the clearance Organization, which is in support and conforms to the issued LMAC clearance plan. The mechanical work plan is to be located on site for both internal and external QA evaluations. All mechanical work plans are to include the following:

a. Full details of the defined mechanical area parameters (to include a schematic

diagram). b. Full details of the mechanical work to be completed. c. If applicable, full details of the follow up clearance required.

5.6.2. Any amendments to the mechanical work plan must first be approved by the LMAC

Operations Section prior to being implemented.

5.7. General Safety Precautions

5.7.1. The following safety precautions should always be adhered to:

a. Observe minimum safety distances as stated in Table 1.1. to this chapter.




b. Strict command / control and appropriate safety distances must always be

enforced when a demining site incorporates mechanical, manual and MDD assets.

c. All sites operating mechanical assets are to have a designated Control Point

established at the required safety distance (250 m); this may be reduced on a site-by-site basis upon approval by the LMAC Operations Section, depending on ground conditions, geographical layout of the site and the mine/UXO threat.

d. On inspecting a mechanically processed area either through clearance or

visual inspection, all found mines or mine parts that include a fuze component are to be destroyed in-situ. Under no circumstances are these objects to be remotely moved or neutralized except in the employment of mechanical sifters (refer to mechanical sifting for further clarification).

e. The minimum safety distance for personnel without PPE and not directly

involved in a mechanical operation is 250 m. f. The minimum distance of 50 m is to be observed by personnel operating

remote controlled mine clearance vehicles from an approved protective control cabin or enclosure. However if the approved protective control cabin or enclosure meets the required ballistic standards this distance can be reduced to 25 m in areas where only an AP mine blast threat is expected.

g. A thorough investigation of the mine/UXO threat in the area prior to the

deployment of a mechanical asset must always be carried out. Many machines are only designed to withstand detonations from anti-personnel mines and will be severely damaged by anti-tank mines.

h. Each worked lane should have at least 0.5 m overlap. i. The worked lanes should be as straight as possible; this will ensure easier

overlapping of lanes. If the machine cannot work in straight lines, the overlap area should be increased to ensure that a minimum of 0.5 m is being maintained throughout.

j. Flailing machines must be backed up at least 10 m before commencing work

as to ensure a proper overlap of the area, where the flail initially stopped. k. An external controller should carefully record all detonations and visible throw-

outs of possible mines/UXO. This will assist the QA checks and the follow-up clearance. If the machine is used for area reduction or area confirmation, this information is vitally important in order to determine the boundaries of the mined area.

l. When conducting mechanical assisted clearance all minefield markings

damaged or destroyed by the mechanical asset are to be replaced once mechanical clearance is completed. This should be completed prior to follow-




up clearance teams moving into the area in order to ensure that these assets know the boundaries of previously cleared areas. This will also assist the follow up clearance assets in determining the overlap clearance required.

m. Areas worked by mechanical assets are to be marked at all times to prevent

personnel moving into the area until total clearance has been conducted. n. When conducting mechanical clearance or vegetation cutting in a HTHA the

area is not to be entered by any personnel until a second means of clearance has been conducted.

o. If the machine is being used for QA confirmation on previously manually

cleared areas then the confirmation clearance depth is to be 20 cm. p. If a mechanical asset is used for verification in a low threat hazardous area

(LTHA), the minimum clearance depth of 10 cm is to be observed, however this clearance depth maybe increased to 20 cm if required by the LMAC Operations Section depending on the positive verification of any threat.

q. All other safety precautions as detailed in clearance organizational SOP’s and

NMAS’s.

r. Access routes are to be established for all mechanical clearance tasks. These access routes are to be a minimum of 4 m width or wider, depending on the machine being employed. Mechanical assets are always to enter any hazardous areas through the designated access route.

5.8. Vehicle EOD Checks

a. When conducting mechanical operations the following should always be adhered to: 1. Before commencing mechanical operations the Site Supervisor /

Mechanical Operator must mark out a designated EOD Inspection area. This area must be clearly marked and situated at least 100 m from the Control Point. This area must firstly be cleared of mines and UXO if required.

2. The Site Supervisor / Mechanical Operator is to ensure that on completion

of all mechanical operations the vehicle is checked and cleared of all mines and UXO. This will be achieved by positioning the vehicle within the designated EOD Inspection area and visually checked by a qualified mine clearance operator in full PPE.

3. In the case of any operator-manned vehicle, the operator is to track the

vehicle into the EOD Inspection area and shut down the engine. He is to remain in the vehicle until the “all clear” has been given for him to disembark from the vehicle after the EOD inspection has been completed.




4. In the case of unmanned remote controlled vehicles, the vehicle is to be tracked into the designated EOD Inspection area and the engine switched off. A qualified mine clearance operator in full PPE is then to approach the vehicle and visually check the machine for mines and UXO.

5. Only once the EOD inspection has been completed and the vehicle has

been deemed as “clear” of mines and UXO can be brought closer to the CP.

6. In the event of an item such as a mine or piece of a mine or a UXO being

located within the working parts of the vehicle, the mine clearance operator is to inform the Site Supervisor / Mechanical Operator immediately. Only a qualified EOD Operator is to deal with the item.

7. When working cleaning thick mud or dirt from the body of a machine it is to be carried out slowly and carefully using hand trowels only. This is a precaution against any hazardous components being in the mud.

8. All mechanical assets and attachments used for mechanically assisted

clearance are to be cleaned of accumulated spoil and an EOD check conducted prior to being moved between sites.

5.9. Vehicle Recovery Drills

a. Vehicle recovery drills are to be conducted on a monthly basis for each individual mechanical asset. These drills are to be logged in the Daily Work Diary of the manual clearance/EOD support team and the vehicle log.

b. It is not a requirement for this drill to be conducted during live operations. This

drill can be conducted during stand-down or training days, at the commencement of the task site set up or on a monthly basis instigated by the Site Supervisor. Recovery drills do not have to be conducted on every new minefield; however as part of the site preparation, planning is to be considered for vehicle recovery drills on each site.

c. The damaged or unserviceable vehicle can be cleared up to using manual or

an MDD asset, depending on what is available. All operating mechanical assets are to have a trained experience mechanical support deminer available on site to extricate such recovery procedures.

d. If another vehicle is to be used as a towing recovery vehicle then it must be of

the same level of ballistic protection if it is to move into the dangerous area. In all cases it is preferable for any recovery vehicle to remain outside the dangerous area.




5.10. CASEVAC Drills

5.10.1. In the event of injury to personnel (other than the operator) the machine will stop

work and return to the designated safe area. CASEVAC drills will be carried out as per standard demining accident CASEVAC procedures.

5.10.2. All mechanical operations are to have medical support. Under no circumstances are

mechanical operations to commence unless there is a qualified medic and ambulance on site or within 5 minutes from the area of operations. The medical support may be provided by a MCT operating on the same site if required. If the mechanical asset is working independently then its own independent medical support assets must support it.

5.10.3. CASEVAC drills involving the machine operator are to be conducted on a regular

basis in the same way as CASEVAC drills are conducted during manual clearance. Each operational mechanical asset shall have CASEVAC drills conducted involving the operator prior to the commencement of mechanical operations on each new site and then at a minimum on a monthly basis should the clearance task last longer than 30 days.

5.10.4. CASEVAC drills will also be conducted whenever there are changes to personnel

within the clearance team, such as medics, deminers or operators; this is to ensure that any new personnel on the site are familiar with the CASEVAC procedures for that asset.

5.10.5. These drills are to be logged in the manual clearance/EOD support team and the

vehicle log. Emphasis is to be on the extraction of the operator from the vehicle and not on the clearance up to the vehicle (clearance to the vehicle will follow normal mine clearance drills).

5.11. Personnel

5.11.1. Command and Control of mechanical operations are imperative and at no time should mechanical operations commence until the following is in place:

a. All mechanical operations will come under the control of the Site Supervisor of

the MCT in support of mechanical operations, however this responsibility can be given to the Team Leader of the MCT should the Site Supervisor be required elsewhere. Under no circumstances are mechanical operations to commence without qualified and accredited supervision.

b. In the event of a Site Supervisor or MCT Team Leader not being available

then only a qualified and accredited Mechanical Supervisor can be used. If the Mechanical Supervisor is not also a qualified and accredited mine clearance Supervisor then a mine clearance qualified Site Supervisor must be within 5 minutes travel time from the work site. This Site Supervisor will be responsible for any assistance required by the Mechanical Supervisor outside his area of expertise.




5.11.2. Any such change to this level of supervision is to be authorized by the LMAC and is to be requested in writing from the clearance Organization.

5.11.3. All mechanical assets are to be operated by a qualified and LMAC

accredited/licenced operator. Under no circumstances is an unqualified operator to be in control of the vehicle whilst conducting operational clearance.

5.11.4. All mechanical assets are to have manual support to conduct EOD check drills and

CASEVAC operations. This support can be in various capacities depending on the asset. What follows is the minimum manual requirement for mechanical assets operating within Lebanon.

5.11.5. When operating mechanical clearance asset there shall be a minimum of 1 (one)

mine clearance operator (deminer) attached to the mechanical team. This operator must have passed an approved Mine Clearance Operators course and be accredited by the National Authorities. He must also be fully conversant with the EOD check procedures of the specific vehicle. A second mine clearance operator or a qualified manual mine clearance Site Supervisor / Team Leader must be within 5 minutes travel time from the work site. In the event of two vehicles working on the same minefield then single mine clearance operators can support each other.

5.11.6. When a mechanical asset is operating independently and without the support of a

full MCT there is to be a minimum of 2 (two) manually trained qualified mine clearance operators and sufficient personnel to carry an injured person from the scene of the accident to the ambulance, taking into account the possibility of a mine clearance operator being injured en-route to a stricken vehicle.

5.11.7. Personnel are not to approach working machines and are to remain outside the working danger area.

5.11.8. Personnel are not to ride on the outside of working machines, except in a casualty

evacuation situation.

5.11.9. Personnel must remain alert and maintain safety distances when operating around working machines.

5.11.10. Machine operators are to stop work immediately if unauthorized personnel, vehicles

or animals enter its working danger area.

5.12. Mechanical Assets in Lebanon

5.12.1. There are various mechanical assets used within the Lebanon theatre; this section explains when and where certain assets can and cannot be employed.

5.12.2. The BOZENA 3 FLAIL: is a versatile remotely operated mechanical asset and can

be utilized in a number of scenarios. The BOZENA 3 flail is only accredited and licenced to clear to a depth of 10 cm due to soil, rock and vegetation conditions in Lebanon. Therefore is limited to its employment as follows:




a. Area Reduction / Verification

1. The BOZENA 3 flail can be used in the reduction of Low Threat Hazardous Area’s (LTHA) outside the minefield fence. If any detonations occur during the flailing the vehicle is to be extracted and a 10 m x 10 m box is to be manually cleared to 20 cm centered over the seat of detonation.

2. The BOZENA 3 can also be used in the construction of access lanes up to the

minefield fence or up to the edge of the HTHA if the area is without a fence, in the event of clearing an access lane to the UTM of a Booby Trap the flailing must cease approximately 35 m from the UTM where the Low Threat Hazardous Area becomes High Threat.

3. Under no circumstances is the BOZENA 3 to be used as a primary clearance

asset in a known recorded minefield area, over mine rows or in any part of the Minefield Area (MFA) as defined in this NMAS. However the BOZENA 3 can be used within the HTHA in the vegetation cutting mode as detailed below.

b. Vegetation Cutting

1. The BOZENA 3 can be used to cut vegetation and prepare the ground for

manual or MDD assets inside High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) only after the manual clearance of the MFA has been completed first.

2. When conducting vegetation cutting the BOZENA 3 is to have all the flail

hammers removed from its chains and to have no more than 9-chain links on each flail chain. This is to ensure that it is used purely for vegetation cutting only and not flailing.

3. In all the above scenarios, if the machine has disturbed the soil, MDD assets

may not be used as a second means of clearance until at least a minimum of two (2) days after the mechanical operation have been completed, provided that it has rained at least one time during these days. In periods with no rain, this wait time must be increased to a minimum of seven (7) days or longer. The LMAC-QA-MDD Officer will define the amount of wait-time prior to allowing MDD clearance in these areas on a site-by-site basis.

4. Mechanical vegetation cutting is only permitted within the HTHA by machines

once an in-country test and evaluation has been conducted with approval of the LMAC. Those mechanical assets that conduct such evaluations; will then be accredited and licenced to operate by the LMAC.

c. Area Confirmation

1. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used as the confirmation clearance asset for

areas manually cleared, as it is not accredited to flail deeper than 10 cm. The NMAS required clearance depth of 20 cm cannot be achieved.




5.12.3. Summary of Restrictions for BOZENA 3 Flail:

a. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used as a primary clearance tool without follow-up

clearance by manual or MDD assets, unless approved by the LMAC as defined above.

b. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used in known minefields where there is a threat of

cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar such as the Israeli No4 APM or the GYATA 64 APM.

c. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used as the confirmation asset on manually cleared

areas. d. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used to cut vegetation inside the HTHA prior to the

MFA being manually cleared. e. The BOZENA 3 cannot be used to clear directly up to the UTM of a Booby

Trap.

f. A qualified and experienced operator who has been accredited and LMAC licenced must operate the BOZENA 3.

g. The BOZENA 3 is not to be deployed in areas where there is a threat of large

Booby Traps or directional Fragmentation mines.

5.13. ARMTRAC 100

5.13.1. The ARMTRAC 100 is a manually driven flail unit with an accredited and licenced clearance depth of 20 cm in Lebanon. As with the BOZENA 3 this vehicle can be used as a tool for Area Reduction and Verification and has been proven when operating in areas where a potential threat of AT mines is suspected.

5.13.2 The ARMTRAC has similar restrictions as the BOZENA when operating in a High

Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA), which contains mines fitted with a cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar.

5.13.3. The ARMTRAC 100 Flail can be employed in the following:


1. Area reduction of Low Threat Hazardous Area’s (LTHA) outside the minefield

fence. Any detonation during the flailing the vehicle is to be extracted and a 10 m x 10 m box is to be manually cleared to 20 cm centered over the seat of detonation. The flailing of LTHA is to be followed by secondary clearance by manual or MDD assets, however the secondary clearance may not be required in some designated LTHA if approved by the LMAC, this will be




authorized on a site-by-site basis in writing by the LMAC.

2. The vehicle can also be used in the construction of access lanes to the

minefield fence or UTM if the area is without a fence, in the event of clearing an access lane to the UTM of a Booby Trap the flailing must cease approximately 35 m from the UTM where the Low Threat Hazardous Area becomes High Threat.

3. Under no circumstances is the ARMTRAC to be used as a primary clearance

asset in a High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA), which contains mines, fitted with a cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar.

4. Once the MFA has been completed the ARMTRAC can be deployed within

the minefield fence and a percentage of the HTHA / MFA can be flailed as confirmation. The use of the ARMTRAC for confirmation on the MFA is to be after discussions between the LMAC Plans Officer / QA Officer and the Site Supervisor to establish whether the ground is suitable for mechanical confirmation. However if during the confirmation the vehicle detonates a mine then the vehicle is to be extracted and the LMAC Plans Officer is informed immediately.

5.13.4. Summary of Restrictions for ARMTRAC Flails:

a. The ARMTRAC cannot be used to cut vegetation within a HTHA. b. The ARMTRAC cannot be used as primary clearance tools without follow up

clearance by manual or MDD assets, unless approved by the LMAC as defined above.

c. The ARMTRAC cannot be used in known minefields where there is a threat of

cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar such as the Israeli No4 APM or the GYATA 64 APM.

d. The ARMTRAC cannot be used to clear directly up to the UTM of a Booby

Trap. e. A qualified and experienced operator who has been accredited and LMAC

licenced must operate the ARMTRAC. f. The ARMTRAC is not to be deployed in areas where there is a threat of large

Booby Traps or directional Fragmentation mines.

5.14. MINECAT 230 FLAIL

5.14.1. The MINECAT 230 flail is a versatile remotely operated mechanical asset and can be utilized in a number of scenarios. The MINECAT 230 flail is accredited and licenced




to clear to a depth of 10 cm in Lebanon.

5.14.2. The MINECAT 230 flail can be employed as for the Bozena 3.

5.15. Armoured Excavators

5.15.1. The Armoured Excavators (Caterpillar 215 / 225) are a multi-role manually driven mechanical asset, which has proved to be extremely versatile in conducting vegetation cutting and the excavation of AP mines from bunds and previously bulldozed mined areas and deeply buried AP mines. They can also be fitted with a flail attachment and work in a similar way to the Armtrac 100 except with

5.15.2. Summary of Restrictions for Excavators:

a. Excavators are limited to the clearance of AP mines. b. Excavators are not to be used for the clearance of AT mines or UXO. c. Excavators cannot be driven over LTHA or HTHA unless previously cleared

unless they have been flailed by an excavator fitted with a flail attachment. d. Excavators must be operated from previously cleared or designated safe

areas unless the excavator is flailing an area using a flail attachment. e. A qualified and experienced operator who has been accredited and LMAC

licenced must operate the Excavator. f. Excavators are not to be deployed in areas where there is a threat of large

Booby Traps or Directional Fragmentation mines. They are not to be used for flailing tasks in areas suspected of containing AT mines.

5.16. Armoured Bulldozer

5.16.1. Armoured Bulldozers are only to be used as a preparation mechanical asset in the construction of access routes outside any designated LTHA or HTHA; it can also be used in the removal of debris and large rocks from the site after clearance.

5.16.2. Armoured Bulldozers may be used in the removal of earth spoils containing AP

mines only in conjunction with the Excavator whilst conducting sifting operations.

5.16.3. Summary of Restrictions for Armoured Bulldozers:

a. Armoured Bulldozers are not to be used for the clearance of AT mines or UXO.

b. Armoured Bulldozers cannot be driven over LTHA or HTHA unless previously cleared. However they may be driven into LTHA or HTHA when utilizing a




bucket to remove and stockpile soil for sifting or crushing operations. In this case the machine will remove the soil to the required clearance depth before driving into the LTHA or HTHA.

c. A qualified and experienced operator who has been accredited and LMAC

licenced must operate the Armoured Bulldozer.

d. Armoured Bulldozers are not to be deployed in areas where there is a threat of large Booby Traps or Directional Fragmentation mines.

5.17. Mechanical Sifting

5.17.1. Mechanical sifting is a technique used in sifting contaminated earthen spoil and rubbish. The use of mechanical assets in this type of clearance greatly reduces the risk to manual deminers and MDD assets who may be required to clear areas where mines have been disturbed from their original position. Mines that have been moved by previous mechanical disturbance or by nature’s elements maybe more sensitized and therefore more dangerous to manual or MDD clearance assets.

5.17.2. The use of mechanical sifting methods is an acceptable means of clearance of

areas containing AP mines only. Mechanical sifting is not to take place on areas that contain AT mines or UXO.

5.17.3. All mechanical sifting whether it is by mechanical attachments or independent table

sifts are to undergo an in-country test and evaluation prior to use. If successful they will be accredited and licenced by the LMAC.

5.17.4. Whenever conducting mechanical sifting operations the following factors must be

considered:

a. An assessment of the extent of the area to be sifted is to be conducted and procedures implemented specific to each site. The exact requirements of any sifting operation are to be stated in a written clearance plan approved by the LMAC.

b. When incorporating manual or MDD assets into the sifting process these

assets must be fully conversant with all safety procedures associated with that machine.

c. Mechanical assets conducting sifting operations are not to travel over un-

cleared land that has not been excavated to the required depth. d. If an AT mine or UXO threat exists then mechanical sifting is not to be used.

Actions on detonation during sifting operations




5.17.5. If a detonation occurs during any sifting operation then the machine is to stop

immediately and the machine or sifting table is to be inspected. If the machine or table is damaged then sifting operations will stop until the damage is repaired.

5.17.6. If the machine or sifting table is not damaged then the supervisor may continue

operations.

5.17.7. All such detonations are to be recorded and the LMAC notified at the end of the working day.

Manual clearance of sifted material

5.17.8. As well as normal mine clearance safety procedures the following rules apply when manually clearing sifted processed material:

a. Only trained deminers and personnel are to be employed when dealing with

mines located during mechanical sifting.

b. Sifted material should be spread out in a previously cleared area in layers no deeper than 20 cm and checked by deminers either using detectors or by raking.

c. Personnel dealing with mines located during sifting operations are to wear full

PPE. The handling of all located items is to be kept to a minimum, due to the possible increased sensitivity of the mines or parts of mines and fuzes.

d. Where ever possible mines are to be moved by remote means to a

demolitions pit to reduce the risk to manual deminers. e. Full ballistic protective shields maybe employed by deminers observing sifting

operations so long as these shields are approved and certified by the LMAC. If ballistic protective shields are used then safety distances maybe reduced as stated at Table 1.1. To this chapter.

MDD Clearance of sifted material

5.17.9. As well as normal MDD clearance safety procedures the following rules apply when clearing sifted processed material by MDD:

a. MDD assets used for searching sifted material are to be trained and

accredited on operational MDD Test.3. Clearance behind mechanical asset (flailed ground).

b. MDD clearance of sifted material is to be no sooner than 7 days after the

sifted material has been laid out. c. Sifted material to be cleared by MDD is to be no deeper than 20 cm in one

layer and then to a maximum of two (2) layers (40 cm).




d. All MDD indications are to be investigated by manual deminer prior to the next

sifted layer being applied. e. When using MDD all sifted spoil is to be laid out over previously MDD cleared

areas only.

5.18. Mechanical Crushers

5.18.1. Mechanical crushers have been successfully used for the clearance of contaminated soil from suspected AP mined areas.

5.18.2. The following rules apply for mechanical crushers:

a. Any mechanical crusher must have detailed written approved SOP’s prior to operations.

b. Any mechanical crushers used in Lebanon must be capable of crushing

contaminated material down to a finished size of 40 mm. This being smaller than the smallest known AP mine in country (US M14 AP mine).

c. All crushers are to have sufficient armoured protection to withstand blast and

fragmentation from AP blast mines. d. UXO over 60 mm in diameter are not to be processed through any crusher

systems in Lebanon. e. Metallic encased AT mines are not to be processed through any crusher

system. f. All crusher process material is to be checked and cleared by a second asset

to ensure full clearance. This can be done by manual or MDD. g. Only trained deminers and personnel are to be employed when dealing with

mines or explosive items located during mechanical crushing operations. h. Personnel dealing with mines or explosive items located during crushing

operations are to wear full PPE. The handling of all located items is to be kept to a minimum, due to the possible increased sensitivity of the mines or parts of mines and fuzes located during the mechanical process.

i. Where ever-possible mines or parts of fuzes and mine are to be moved by

remote means to a demolitions pit to reduce the risk to manual deminers.

j. Full ballistic protective shields maybe employed by deminers observing crushing operations so long as these shields are approved and certified by the LMAC. If ballistic protective shields are used then safety distances maybe reduced as stated at Table 1.1 to this chapter.




5.19. MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER

5.19.1. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER is a versatile remotely operated

mechanical asset and can be utilized in a number of scenarios. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER is accredited and licenced to clear to a depth of 20 cm due to soil, rock and vegetation conditions in Lebanon. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can be employment as follows:


1. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can be used in the reduction

of Low Threat Hazardous Area’s (LTHA) outside the minefield fence. If any detonations occur during the flailing the vehicle is to be extracted and a 10 m x 10 m box is to be manually cleared to 20 cm centered over the seat of detonation.

2. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can also be used in the

construction of access lanes up to the minefield fence or up to the edge of the HTHA if the area is without a fence, in the event of clearing an access lane to the UTM of a Booby Trap the flailing must cease approximately 35 m from the UTM where the Low Threat Hazardous Area becomes High Threat.

3. Under no circumstances is the MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER to

be used as a primary clearance asset in a known recorded minefield area, over mine rows or in any part of the Minefield Area (MFA) as defined in this NMAS. However the MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can be used within the HTHA in the vegetation cutting mode as detailed below.

b. Vegetation Cutting

1. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can be used to cut

vegetation and prepare the ground for manual or MDD assets inside High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) only after the manual clearance of the MFA has been completed first.

2. When conducting vegetation cutting the MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY

TILLER is to have all the flail hammers removed from its chains and to have no more than 9-chain links on each flail chain. This is to ensure that it is used purely for vegetation cutting only and not flailing.

3. In all the above scenarios, if the machine has disturbed the soil, MDD assets

may not be used as a second means of clearance until at least a minimum of two (2) days after the mechanical operation have been completed, provided that it has rained at least one time during these days. In periods with no rain, this wait time must be increased to a minimum of seven (7) days or longer. The LMAC MDD QA Officer will define the amount of wait time prior to allowing MDD clearance in these areas on a site-by-site basis.




4. Mechanical vegetation cutting is only permitted within the HTHA by machines

once an in-country test and evaluation has been conducted with approval of the LMAC. Those mechanical assets that conduct such evaluations; will then be accredited and licenced to operate by the LMAC.

c. Area Confirmation 1. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER can be used as the

confirmation clearance asset for areas manually cleared, as it is accredited to flail/tiller to a depth of 20cm.

5.19.2. Summary of Restrictions for the MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER:

a. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER cannot be used as a primary clearance tool without follow-up clearance by manual or MDD assets, unless approved by the LMAC as defined above.

b. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER cannot be used in known

minefields where there is a threat of “cocked-striker mechanism that incorporates a spring assisted striker retained by a recessed firing pin or collar such as the Israeli No4 APM or the GYATA 64 APM.

c. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER cannot be used to clear

directly up to the UTM of a Booby Trap. d. A qualified and experienced operator who has been accredited and LMAC

licenced must operate the MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER. e. The MINI MINEWOLF - FLAIL/ROTARY TILLER is not to be deployed in

areas where there is a threat of large Booby Traps or directional Fragmentation mines.

5.20. Communications

5.20.1. All mechanical assets operating are to be fitted with appropriate communications means to allow immediate communications between the operator and the site supervisor in the event of an accident or intrusion into the machines operating danger area which will require the machine to stop working immediately.

5.20.2. Vehicle communications are to be such that the operator can hear any commands

over the machines operating noise.

5.20.3. All communications are to be tested at the Control Point before any machine moves into the danger area.




5.21. Mechanically Assisted Demining Operations Site Layout

5.21.1. When opening a new clearance site and the first asset to commence clearance

operations is mechanical the site layout will be as that of any other clearance site.

a. A Control Point will be cleared and set up in the same manner as that of any other clearance site.

b. All marking will be as per company SOP’s and NMAS. c. A designated EOD check area will be cleared and constructed 100 m from the

CP.

5.22. Overlaps between Assets

5.22.1. When using MDD assets for clearance after vegetation cutting outside the Mine Field Area (MFA) but still within the High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) the MDD asset is to ensure that there are no areas missed between the two previous clearance assets, a minimum 1 m overlap must be cleared into the MFA. See figure 1.1.

Figure: 1.1.




Minimum Safety Distances to be Observed when Operating Mechanical Assets

Mechanical Asset Activity Machine

Operator in Cabin or PPE

Site

Personnel in PPE

Site Personnel without PPE General Public

BOZENA 3 Flailing (in cabin) 25m 150m 250m 250m

Flailing (Out of cabin in PPE) 50m 150m 250m 250m

MINI MINEWOLF Flail/Rotary Tiller

Flailing/Tiller (Out of cabin in

PPE) 50m 150m 250m 250m

ARMTRAC 100 Flailing N/A 150m 250m 250mBulldozer Access Tracks N/A 25m 100m 100m

Clearing Wire N/A 25m 100m 100m

Clearing Debris/Earth N/A 25m 100m 100m

Spreading sifted soil N/A 25m 100m 100m

Excavator Clearing

Vegetation (Strimmer)

N/A 100m 250m 250m

Access Tracks N/A 25m 250m 250m Clearing Wire N/A 25m 250m 250m

Clearing Debris/Earth N/A 25m 250m 250m

Flailing N/A 150m 250m 250m

Excavator Bucket Sifter or Table

Sifter Sifting spoil with AP Blast Mines N/A

25m with no shield

5m with shield

250m 250m

Excavator Bucket Sifter or Table

Sifter Sifting spoil with AP Frag Mines N/A

50m with no shield

10m with shield

250m 250m

MINECAT 230 Flailing (in cabin) 25m 150m 250m 250m

Flailing (Out of cabin in PPE) 50m 150m 250m 250m

TABLE: 1.1.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 09.50 Mechanical Demining (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS 09.51 Demining Machine Operators Safety (under development) IMAS 09.52 Mechanical Area Reduction (under development) IMAS 09.53 QA/QC after mechanical clearance (under development)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 11 THE USE OF MINE DETECTION DOGS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 11 THE USE OF MINE DETECTION DOGS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Health and Capability Check Prior To Work ................................................................... 4 5.3. Limitations ...................................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Tasking ........................................................................................................................... 6 5.5. Planning .......................................................................................................................... 6 5.6. Clearance behind Mechanical Mine Clearance Machines .............................................. 7 5.7. Clearance behind Mechanical Vegetation Cutting Machines .......................................... 8 5.8. Vegetation Cutting By Hand Strimming or Hand Cutting ................................................ 8 5.9. MDD Operations in Previously Burnt Areas .................................................................... 8 5.10. MDD Clearance of Sifted Soil ...................................................................................... 8 5.11. Medical Factors ........................................................................................................... 9 5.12. Training ....................................................................................................................... 9 5.13. Clearance Drill ........................................................................................................... 10 5.14. Recording Information ............................................................................................... 13 5.15. Medical, Healthcare, Kennels and Feeding ............................................................... 14 5.16. Quality Assurance ..................................................................................................... 15





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all MDD assisted activities are well prepared, executed and carried out safely and to ensure that all clearance or survey information achieved are to the highest possible standard.

2. SCOPE

2.1. For the purposes of this chapter, operational procedures mean procedures to be applied as part of the demining operation. These include, but are not limited to: preparation, implementation, testing of dogs, maintenance of skills, search and marking principles/patterns, rewarding and rotation, assessment of meteorological and other factors and responsibilities of operational staff. This chapter provides standards and specifications for operational procedures to be adopted during mine dog detection.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Box A squared area that is developed for the purpose of being searched by mine

detection dogs during the licence test. A box normally measures 10m x 10m, but other sizes may be preferred.

3.1.2. Demining sub-unit An element of a demining organization, however named, which is

licenced to conduct one or more prescribed demining activities, such as technical surveys, manual clearance, EOD or the use of mine detection dog teams.

3.1.3. Environmental factors Factors relating to the environment and that influence the

transportation of scent from the mine, the detection of the target scent or the ability of people and dogs to work safety and effectively. Such factors can be wind, rain, temperature, humidity, altitude, sun and vegetation.

3.1.4. Mine Detection Dog (MDD) A dog trained and employed to detect mines, UXO and

other explosive devices.

3.1.5. Scent A distinctive odour.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agencies, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders who have Mine Detection Dogs (MDD) attached to them to ensure that all procedures are carried out in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. MDD can most effectively be used for mine and ERW verification and area reduction. MDD are suitable for establishing that there are no mines/ERW in an area during initial surveys, allowing suspected hazardous areas to be eliminated much faster than by manual demining. MDD can work quickly in areas with low mine and or ERW density and are thus well suited to the boundary detection role. Manual demining teams can then be deployed to deal with reduced areas known to contain mines/ERW.

5.1.2. The use of Mine Detection Dogs (MDD) is an effective aid to mine clearance,

especially for area reduction. Clearance of areas with a high metallic content and/or containing minimal metal mines may all benefit from the use of MDD, before manual mine/UXO clearance.

5.1.3. Experience has shown that a period of 2-3 weeks may be required to allow the dogs

to become acclimatized to the local weather conditions, vegetation, soil condition and surrounding environment. It is recommended that all MDD deployed into Lebanon will undergo this acclimatization period before being deployed operationally.

5.1.4. MDD should be regarded as a method of confirming the presence of mine

contamination rather than identifying the location of every individual mine. If dogs are used as a primary demining tool, each area is to be searched by a minimum of two different licenced dogs accredited individually, with no indications; in order to be considered cleared. All MDD deployed to Lebanon will be subject to evaluation and accreditation before commencing operational tasks.

5.2. Health and Capability Check Prior To Work

5.2.1. A dog's capabilities may vary on a weekly or even daily basis. A dog may search well one day, and be completely unable to search the next day. The ability of a dog to search well depends on its health and well being. It is therefore necessary for a demining agency to assess its dogs on a daily basis, before the dogs are allowed to start searching for live mines and/or UXO. The assessment shall typically consist of a check on health and well being, coupled with a small detection test to give the dog handler and the project management confidence in the dog’s search capability. The daily test also acts as a “warm-up” for the dog. It prepares the dog for work and tunes it in to the target substance. This daily assessment is an internal quality assurance




routine, but it goes beyond this. When the tests show that a dog is ill or incapable of searching, there are certain principles to be followed in terms of record keeping and action.

5.3. Limitations

5.3.1. Dogs are not suitable for working in areas heavily contaminated by explosives or enclosed spaces, unless they are specifically trained for such conditions.

5.3.2. Both dogs and handlers are at risk from tripwire-activated mines, especially in thick vegetation. MDD’s should not be used in areas where tripwires are expected.

5.3.3. Dogs are not effective without proper management and verification on a continuous basis. This is to include daily evaluation of dogs and continuation training when dogs are identified as below the standard. Handlers are to be supervised by task site supervisors on a continuous basis during work.

5.3.4. Mine dogs should not be used if the wind speed is greater than 7 m/s at ground level.

5.3.5. Mine dogs should not be used to search with a following wind. The target substance may not be recognised until the dog has passed the actual location of the object. Dogs should ideally be used to search with a side wind but can also be used when there is a head wind. Strong wind speed may reduce the indication accuracy of a dog. A general principle is that increased wind speed requires an increased area to be investigated manually after a dog has indicated.

5.3.6. Hot and wet soil provides optimal vapour detection conditions. If the temperature in the soil is near freezing point the scent will diminish, impeding detection. Dogs shall therefore not be used for vapour detection when the soil temperature is below or near freezing point.

5.3.7. When the soil temperature is at its lowest and the air temperature exceeds the soil

temperature, dew may appear on the soil surface. If the soils are very dry prior to this condensation phase, the dew can displace the target substances from the dry soil enhancing vapour detection. If the soils are already wet prior to dew formation, the dew will not enhance vapour detection. Dogs should therefore not be used for vapour detection when the air temperature is colder than 7º Celsius.

5.3.8. Rain acts to wash target substances from the surface to deeper portions of the soil. A heavy rain over extended time will remove more of the target substance from the soil surface. Dogs should therefore not be used for vapour detection when it is raining or until the soil has dried up after a heavy rain.




5.4. Tasking

5.4.1. Dogs will not be tasked in high-density minefields except for QA operations following

the clearance of the mined area.

Dogs may be tasked for the following operations: a. Verification, survey or area reduction of suspected mined areas. b. Clearance of low-density mined areas. c. Clearance of suspected mined railroads. d. Clearance of suspected mined roads. e. Clearance in areas where handheld mine detectors are unable to operate. f. Clearance of an evacuation lane from the nearest safe place to a casualty in

case of a mine accident. Normally only selected dogs and handlers will carry out this activity, after specific training.

5.5. Planning

5.5.1. Before a new demining task can be undertaken it is necessary to plan where to establish safe lanes, access lanes and the location of the boxes and/or search lanes. The following elements should be considered when planning MDD operations:

a. Assessment of the threat prior to the search. If the dog is only accredited to

undertake regular search for mines and UXO, it shall not be used in a flailed area or if the presence of tripwires is suspected.

b. Assessment of the type of mines believed to be present in the area. If some of

the mine types contain different explosives or substances to those, which the dog is trained to detect, the dog shall be tested against these new types prior to the mine/UXO detection.

c. Demolitions of mines/UXO in the area where the MDD will be working can

disturb the dog because of scattered explosives and pieces of destroyed mines/UXO. The demolition can contaminate big areas and make it unfeasible to use MDD. Dogs shall not be used in areas with visible contamination of explosives, UXO, and remains of detonated mines and UXO.

d. The number of dogs available for the task. The layout of a box or area, taking

into account the required safety distance between each dog/handler, the safety distance between the MDD team and the deminers, the wind direction (or the changes in the wind direction), humidity of the soil, vegetation and requirements for the supervision and general management of the operation.




e. That certain spots within an area may be assessed as potentially impossible

to clear immediately after rainfall due to puddles and muddy ground. In such circumstances it is recommended that the MDD team work in drier areas until the wet areas have dried up.

f. Safe lanes are prepared to provide access for the dog and handler to a box or

an area. They also provide safe start lines for the dogs and handlers. The safe lanes should ideally be two meters wide. However, a minimum width requirement is 1 meter. The safe lanes can be cleared manually or with dogs.

g. The whole search area shall be visible to the dog handler. If the vegetation is

such that the dog handler is not able to observe the dog at all times during the search, the box/area shall be divided into several smaller boxes or lanes.

h. When an area has been searched twice and considered free from mines/UXO,

the corner marking and any boundary tape may be removed. The exact locations of each area where specific dog/handler teams cleared shall be recorded on the supervisor’s daily worksheet and on the dog handler’s daily worksheet.

i. All areas searched and declared mine free by at least two different accredited

MDD, are to be considered cleared.

5.6. Clearance behind Mechanical Mine Clearance Machines

5.6.1. MDD can be used as a part of a “systems approach” where the dog undertakes secondary search or quality control in areas already cleared by mine clearance machines. Such machines can be flails, tillers, sifters, rollers, soil millers etc. Whilst there are no differences of principle between using dogs for regular area clearance and using them for verification behind machines, the following rules shall apply when MDD are used behind machines:

a. If the machine has disturbed the soil, the MDD Teams shall not be used to

clear behind the machine until at least 2 days after the mechanical mine clearance has taken place, provided that it has rained at least one time during these days. In periods with no rain, the soak time must be increased to a minimum of 7 days or longer. Rainfall will wash away most of the undesired contamination of the surroundings caused by the machinery. This will make the search with the MDD more accurate and reliable. The LMAC-QA-MDD Officer will define the amount of wait time prior to allowing MDD clearance in these areas on a site-by-site basis.

b. If the machine has been used to clear an area with a relatively high density of

mines, MDD should not be used since lumps of explosives and bits of mines casing are likely to be spread around the area. This may confuse the MDD and make the search less reliable.




5.7. Clearance behind Mechanical Vegetation Cutting Machines

5.7.1. Dogs have problems working effectively and safely in densely vegetated areas. Many

demining Organizations have therefore established the practice of cutting the vegetation mechanically prior to the search. Target substances in soil water may be taken in by plant root systems and expelled by the plant leaves. When the water is finally released from the plant, the target substances may be several meters from the mine, so the accuracy of the indication may therefore be greatly reduced. Vegetation cutting may disturb the scent picture above mines and increase the scent plume. On extremely dry days the scent, which is released from the soil, may be significantly reduced. Flowers, vegetation and bushes, however, will continue to release humidity and thus emit the target scent. The result might be that although the dogs are incapable of picking up the target scent from the soil, they can pick up the same scent from sniffing/searching the air round plants.

Note: Same requirements as stated in 5.6.1.a. is to apply after vegetation cutting machines process an area

5.8. Vegetation Cutting By Hand Strimming or Hand Cutting

5.8.1. In areas with thick or dense vegetation where it is not possible to use mechanical assets due to the threat (e.g. AT mine threat) manual vegetation cutting can be used.

5.8.2. The vegetation shall be cut by hand or with petrol Strimmer without disturbing the

ground surface. The width of cut shall only be as far as the deminer can reach into the suspect area in a safe manner. All loose vegetation is to be removed away from the area before the MDD search commences.

5.8.3. From the safe area, the handler shall then command the MDD to commence the

search starting half meter from the suspect area and then continue into the suspect area and complete the prepared lane with a minimum of 25 cm overlap into the safe area.

5.9. MDD Operations in Previously Burnt Areas

5.9.1. MDD shall not be used to search in areas where the vegetation has recently been burned (after less than four days).

5.10. MDD Clearance of Sifted Soil

5.10.1. The following procedure is recommended:

a. Identify a clear area suitable to spread out the sifted soil. b. The spoil of soil should be excavated down to ground level plus a minimum of

50 cm during the sifting process.




c. The position/area of the former spoil of soil should be marked off and cleared

by MDD (after soak time 2-7 days) or other assets.

d. If the MDD indicates a minimum of two by two meters (4m²) must be cleared around the indication.

e. If MDD conduct a lot of indications (dog handler’s discretion) in an area, the

handler shall then move a minimum of 5 m sideways or to next area before continue clearance work. The handler marks out the non-cleared area that will be handed over to manual clearance assets.

f. MDD will not be used to clear the spread out sifted spoil, if evidence or

remnants of mines or UXO i.e. bits of explosives, fuses, plastic or metal casings are found during the sifting process, for this contamination will limit and confuse the MDD search capabilities.

g. If the spread out sifted soil does not contain evidence or remnants of mines or

UXO then the MDD may be used for conformation, provided that the spread out sifted soil is not more than 20 cm thick.

h. It should be annotated in the completion report if an area outside the

clearance area is used for spreading out the sifted soil. A completion report on the “spread out soil area” should be completed and given to IMSMA.

5.11. Medical Factors

5.11.1. The following medical factors are to be taken into consideration internally before deploying MDD:

a. The health of the dog must be certified. X-ray pictures of hips, elbows, and

back are to be attached to written comments from an authorized veterinarian. b. A qualified veterinarian must certify each dog to be in good health and fitness. c. The dog should be free of hip or elbow displacement problems. In specific

cases, this should be assessed together with a veterinarian. d. Copies of the above mentioned relevant documents should be provided to the

LMAC.

5.12. Training

5.12.1. Training minefields where dogs will practice must have been laid at different periods of time and the dogs should be evaluated on mines that have been buried for a significant period of time. The minimum time requirement is 3 months, however ideally the mine should have been at “rest” in the ground for longer periods of time.




5.12.2. The explosives or mines used for evaluating or training exercises should be buried at different depths, along with differing quantities and for differing periods of time.

5.12.3. In order to maintain maximum performance and safety during operations, the MDD and their handlers should receive refresher training and evaluation on a regular basis, at least every month. When dogs are deployed in the field, internal QA tests should be conducted on a regular basis.

5.12.4. The size of each training box may differ dependent on the operational search system used by the demining Organizations, however, the following rules shall apply when preparing a training site with training boxes:

a. The test field shall have one or several clearly recognizable benchmarks.

Distance and compass bearings shall be taken from at least one corner marker for each box to a benchmark.

b. Each box shall be recorded on a map with exact location references. c. All corners shall be marked with a recognition pole, which is driven into the

soil. At least one corner marker shall be accurately recorded on the box map. d. Recognition pieces shall be placed centrally under the training mine. Due to

that all training items are equipped with recognition pieces, additional recognition pieces should be buried at other additional locations inside the box to ensure that a dog not indicate on the metal.

e. The accurate location of all training items and recognition pieces shall be

recorded. f. The recognition piece should be made of cut reinforcement rods or similar

material and should not exceed 15 g. g. One copy of the box record shall be prepared and handed in to LMAC QA

Section.

5.13. Clearance Drill

5.13.1. Searching methods may vary dependent on how the dog is trained according to the SOP of each Organization. In general terms the following procedure should be followed:

a. There must be an overlap of at least 25 cm on each side of every lane

searched. b. Before a dog starts to search a suspected area, the dog handler should

always carry out a control exercise to confirm that the dogs are in good condition and capable of working.




c. A break of 10 to 15 minutes should be considered for every working hour. d. All marking must be unambiguous and be in accordance with the SOP.

e. When MDD’s conduct a search with one access/safe lane, e.g. road

clearance, whilst working with long leash system 10 meters ahead. Marking for the next 10 meters search shall be placed with at least one meter overlap back into already cleared area. See Figure: 1.3.

f. In order to confirm that the dog’s sense of smell is tuned to the local area

conditions, the dog should always start to search half a meter outside the target area.

g. When something suspicious is detected, the dog will normally indicate the

discovery by sitting/lying down close to the find, without moving around or onto the find. Barking and scratching is not acceptable.

h. When a dog has indicated a mine, an area of at least two x two meters square

around the indication point (4m²) should be cleared manually before the dog can be allowed to continue. The Handler in liaison with the Site Supervisor/Team leader will direct the deminer to the closest safe/cleared area from the indication to begin the search.

i. All MDD cleared area information is to be included in the MDD Daily Work

Report; (Annex R) details the MDD Daily Work Report that is to be used by all in-country MDD assets.

j. Overlaps between different clearance assets: When using mechanical assets for vegetation cutting outside the Mine Field Area (MFA) in preparation for MDD but still within the High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) a 1 m overlap must be used to ensure that there are no areas missed between the two clearance assets e.g. once the MFA has been manually cleared the machine is to overlap into the MFA by a minimum of 1m. This clearance methodology will also include MDD assets. (See figure 1.1. and 1.2.)




UNSAFE AREA

SAFE LANE

Green Area Searched by two Dogs

2 x 2 metre (at least) Box around indication

Dog indications

Indication Marker Pickets

Figure: 1.1.

Figure: 1.2.




Showing the overlap of mechanical/MDD clearance into manual clearance area

10 M

Figure: 1.3.

Showing the overlap when working with road clearance, or areas with one safe lane, forward and on the sides

5.14. Recording Information

5.14.1. The demining Organization shall ensure that a logbook is prepared for each dog, or group of dogs. The aim of the logbook is to provide the demining Organization and




monitoring teams with continuous written evaluation of the dog’s health condition and search ability.

5.14.2. It is important for the dog handlers, the trainers, the veterinary and the management

of an Organization to be able to follow the development of a dog on a daily basis. The logbook shall be stored for a minimum period of 12 months after the completion of demining tasks carried out by the MDD. The logbook shall be kept by the responsible manager and presented to QA teams upon request.

5.14.3. The operational daily work of each dog should also be recorded using (Annex R) of the NMAS; MDD Daily Work Report. This form must be filled out completely and on a daily basis while the dogs are operationally deployed. An assessment of the dog’s work shall also be written onto the form after the search has been completed.

5.14.4. The dog handler or team leader in consultation with the dog handler shall record the

information on the form. If the dog handler has not written the form himself, he should confirm then, sign the form after each entry to confirm its accuracy. Copy of (Annex R) MDD Daily Work Reports shall be attached in the completion report.

5.14.5. A schematic of the MDD cleared areas should be prepared by the clearance

Organization indicating accurately where the individual MDD teams searched e.g. if more than one MDD team worked in an area the schematic should indicate where the different teams searched. Furthermore the schematic must also indicate if dogs/handlers from separate teams searched the same area.

5.15. Medical, Healthcare, Kennels and Feeding

5.15.1. Whilst dogs are in kennels, only certified handlers/kennel assistants should feed, remove dogs, clear or enter the kennels. The dogs should be thoroughly examined and monitored on a daily basis.

5.15.2. The handlers are responsible for reporting any medical or health problems with their dogs to their Supervisor. The following points must be considered before a dog is allowed to start work or to continue to work after a rest period:

a. The dog must be fully fit and not suffering from any ailment that will affect its

performance. b. Dogs have a limited capability for working in hot climates and can seldom be

worked when the temperature exceeds 40 degrees Celsius. During hot or arduous conditions the dog handler may use his/her own discretion to stop the dog working.

c. Sufficient water available at the task site, this will be at least five liters per dog

per day. d. Each deployed MDD team must have a first aid kit for the dogs on hand.




e. The dog must be given frequent rests. The rest intervals may vary from dog to

dog. The climate will also influence rest intervals. If it is impossible to motivate the dog for work, it should not be used. In case of injury or illness, suitable transport must be available at the task site for evacuation of the dog to a more suitable health care centre.

5.16. Quality Assurance

5.16.1. The MDD team, within each mine/UXO clearance Organization should conduct the following internal QA checks:

a. Regular evaluation of the dogs in the field environment where the dogs are

working. b. Proper medical examination of the dogs before work. c. Proper supervision of the dogs/handlers during work. d. MDD and their handlers should receive refresher training every month and

internal evaluation at least every second month. e. An area should always be searched at least twice, preferably from two

different directions. 6. REFERENCES



IMAS 09.40 Guide for the Use of Mine Detecting Dogs (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS 09.41 Operational Procedures for MDDs (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS 09.42 Operational Testing of MDDs and Handlers (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) IMAS 09.43 Remote Explosive Scent Tracing (Ed. 2) IMAS 09.44 Guide to Occupational Health & General Dog Care (Ed.2 Amendment1)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. General ........................................................................................................................... 5 5.3. Communication Structure ............................................................................................... 5 5.4. Frequencies .................................................................................................................... 6 5.5. Callsign Allocation .......................................................................................................... 6





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that procedures for the use of communications equipment are standardized for all demining and clearance Organizations in Lebanon.

2. SCOPE

2.1. In order to co-ordinate mine action operations, all Organizations require reliable communications in support of mine action within Lebanon. While this chapter specifically refers to demining Organizations and demining operations, the provisions of the chapter also apply to Organizations carrying out other mine action operations, including Explosive Ordnance Disposal operations.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Base Station: In radio communications, a base station is a wireless communications station installed at a fixed location and used to communicate as part of either a push-to-talk two-way radio system, or; a wireless telephone system such as cellular CDMA or GSM.

3.1.2. Brevity: Conveying complex information with a few words over a radio.

3.1.3. Call Sign: In radio communications, a call sign (also known as a call sign, call name or call letters, or abbreviated as a call, or otherwise known as a handle) is a unique designation for a transmitting station, radio, or user.

3.1.4. Communication: Is the process of to impart information from a sender to a receiver

with the use of a medium. Communication requires that all parties have an area of communicative commonality.

3.1.5. Landline: A landline, main line or fixed-line is a telephone line which travels through a solid medium, either metal wire or optical fibre.

3.1.6. Radio Frequency: Radio frequency (RF) is a rate of oscillation within the range of about 3 Hz to 300 GHz. This range corresponds to frequency of alternating current electrical signals used to produce and detect radio waves. Since most of this range is beyond the vibration rate that most mechanical systems can respond to, RF usually refers to oscillations in electrical circuits.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the LMAC/RMAC to ensure that the communications net is operational prior to clearance operations commence. However, the QA, Technical Advisor, Paramedic and any other person issued with a radio or mobile telephone has a personal responsibility for equipment issued to them and must ensure that communications are maintained at all times during operations.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Effective communication systems are essential for the efficient and safe management of mine action operations. Without them, command and control of operations is difficult, routine coordination and liaison does not occur as it should, and most importantly, the critical coordination and support essential to an emergency plan is affected.

5.1.2. The LMAC is the authority responsible for safety and efficiency in mine action in

Lebanon. This responsibility includes establishing the minimum requirements for communications in support of mine action in Lebanon and ensuring compliance with these requirements.

5.1.3. The following procedures are recommended to establish a reliable communications

network.

a) Use of voice procedure, discipline, clarity and brevity by users during radio transmissions.

b) Use the call sign letters as assigned. c) Radio operators should be trained and prepared to adjust frequencies, radios

and antennae to attain the success of a radio link and achieve optimum radio communications for the time of the day or year.

d) Radio communications from task sites to base-stations should be confirmed at

least once every hour. e) All individual agency frequencies and call signs are to be included in the

agency’s SOP. f) All agencies should be aware of all other mine/UXO clearance agency

frequencies, channels, and call signs, as well as any emergency frequency / channels.

g) All agencies will be required to conduct a monthly CASEVAC Radio

Procedure Drill.




h) Site locations should have continuous communications with support elements

and higher formations.

i) All agencies are required to include a comprehensive communications plan including the identification of types of radios, frequencies, call signs, and which positions are manned with radios, in their SOP.

5.2. General

5.2.1. An effective communications network is essential for the safety of all clearance operations and necessary to ensure an effective and safe mine/UXO clearance operation.

5.2.2. Mine/UXO clearance activities must not be undertaken without suitable and effective communications between the personnel on site and the HQ and support elements.

5.2.3. There are several levels of communications necessary to ensure that mine and UXO clearance, management and support personnel are able to communicate as and when required. All levels are to be defined in the agency’s SOP.

5.2.4. The communication means are to be staffed during all operational activities and should cover the travel periods to, from, and in between the sites.

5.3. Communication Structure

5.3.1. Different levels of communications are required to co-ordinate and control operations.

a) Area Network: This network provides a VHF frequency and/or landline/mobile

telephone link that will enable all mine/UXO clearance Organizations to communicate with the Lebanese Mine Action Center, Mine and other clearance Organizations within the Area of Operations. The VHF base station and frequencies to the clearance Organizations HQ will be provided by the LMAC upon request for those clearance Organizations operating under their respective Area of Operations. This link will be monitored and controlled by LMAC as appropriate.

b) Site Network: This network provides a VHF and mobile telephone link on task-

sites between Site Supervisors, Team Leaders, clearance teams, medical assistants and other radio users at task-sites. VHF and telephone equipment and links to task sites is the responsibility of the clearance Organizations. The LMAC will not necessarily monitor this link.




5.4. Frequencies

5.4.1. LMAC/LAF will control allocation of VHF/UHF frequencies required by clearance

Organizations for HQ to task site communications.

5.4.2. Organizations requiring frequencies have to submit a request to the LMAC.

5.4.3. Mobile telephone communications is available at civilian agencies.

5.4.4. Telephone landline links are available upon request through the LMAC/LAF.

5.5. Callsign Allocation

5.5.1. Clearance Organizations will be issued call-signs by the LMAC for use on the LMAC to Company HQ network.

5.5.2. Clearance Organizations are to provide a written copy of internal call-signs, frequencies and telephone numbers to the LMAC monthly.

6. REFERENCES

None 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 13 TRANSPORT & STORAGE

OF EXPLOSIVES



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 13 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. General ........................................................................................................................... 4 5.3. Preparation of Explosives for Transport .......................................................................... 5 5.4. Vehicles for Transport of Explosives ............................................................................... 6 5.5. Procedures in Case of Traffic Accident ........................................................................... 6 5.6. Additional Safety Measures ............................................................................................ 7 5.7. Storage of Explosive Material ......................................................................................... 8 5.8. Sea Containers ............................................................................................................. 10 5.9. Protective Measures for Storing and Handling of Explosives ....................................... 11 5.10. Daily Storage ............................................................................................................. 12 5.11. Safety Distances, Explosive Storage ......................................................................... 12





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all explosives and associated items are stored, issued, transported and used in accordance with safety and reliability requirements.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This chapter covers the minimum requirements for the storage, transportation and handling of explosives as part of mine action in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Explosives: A substance or mixture of substances, which, under external influences,

is capable of rapidly releasing energy in the form of gases and heat.

3.1.2. Explosive materials: Components or ancillary items used by demining organizations, which contain some explosives, or behave in an explosive manner, such as detonators and primers.

3.1.3. Magazine: In the context of humanitarian demining, the term refers to any building,

structure or container approved for the storage of explosive materials.

3.1.4. Stockpile: In the context of mine action, the term refers to, a large accumulated stock of Explosive Ordnance.

3.1.5. Munition: A complete device charged with explosives, propellants, pyrotechnics,

initiating composition, or nuclear, biological or chemical material for use in military operations, including demolitions.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors, Team Leaders and Store Supervisors to ensure that adequate security, storage and accounting procedures are in place for all explosives and related stores and that only suitably trained and authorized persons are allowed to make use of any items, in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The term explosives - is used throughout this NMAS to include all items of an explosive nature, this includes detonators, blasting caps, detonating cord, safety-fuse and all types of igniters.

5.1.2. NMAS is intended to regulate methods of transporting explosives by road, storage of

explosives and preparation of explosives for road transport. This includes handling, loading, and unloading of explosives.

5.2. General

5.2.1. Organizations and individuals preparing explosives for transport are responsible for loading, unloading, and all aspects of transportation between storage locations. Persons directly handling explosives are obliged to take necessary precautions and use protective measures in accordance with these standards.

5.2.2. Drivers and other persons participating in the transport of explosives should be

qualified to handle explosives. The following criteria should apply to all persons involved in driving or directly handling explosives:

a. At least 21 years of age. b. In good health and capable of handling explosives. c. Must have been trained on explosives handling, storage, & transport.

5.2.3. Persons not qualified to handle explosives may carry, load and unload dangerous

material into vehicles or storage under supervision of a qualified person, provided they are verbally briefed on safety measures prior to handling explosives.

5.2.4. NMAS will apply to the transport and storage of explosives within Lebanon.




5.2.5. Vehicles used for transporting explosives are not to be used as overnight storage for explosives. Vehicles are not to be left loaded with explosives at any time unless they are under continuous security guard.

5.3. Preparation of Explosives for Transport

5.3.1. Packaging of explosives is to be in accordance with international standards and technical requirements.

5.3.2. Explosives will not be transported unless securely packed in appropriate boxes.

5.3.3. Boxes are to be closed and waterproof in order to prevent any loss or spilling of the

contents during transport. If the vehicle is not a covered vehicle, boxes are to be covered with a waterproof cover.

5.3.4. Detonators, blasting caps and the initiation means for explosives are not to be

transported in the same vehicle as explosives.

5.3.5. For daily use, and only where no other option exists, up to 50 kg of explosives may be carried in the same vehicle with up to 100 detonators or blasting caps. Detonators or blasting caps are to be securely packed in a separate box from the explosive. Boxes containing detonators or blasting caps are to be carried in a separate compartment of the vehicle from boxes containing explosives. Under no circumstances are detonators or blasting caps to be carried in the same box as explosives.

5.3.6. If packed in smaller quantities than originally packed, explosives are to be

transported in closed boxes.

5.3.7. Loading and unloading of explosives may be done only at locations determined for that purpose, outside of populated areas, away from radio communications.

5.3.8. Locations for loading and unloading explosives are to be provided with sufficient

appropriate fire extinguishers.

5.3.9. The following are prohibited at locations where explosives are stored, loaded, unloaded or used:

a. Matches, cigarette lighters, material or devices which can cause fire. b. Open flames or work with open flames, e.g. welding. c. Smoking.

d. Work with tools that may cause sparks. e. Running of vehicle engines.




5.3.10. Persons who are not involved in the loading and unloading of explosives are forbidden to approach.

5.3.11. Unloading of explosives is normally to be carried out during daylight hours. If loading

or unloading is carried out at night, the loading or unloading area is to be illuminated.

5.4. Vehicles for Transport of Explosives

5.4.1. Vehicles employed for transport of explosives are to be roadworthy, well maintained, and in good working order.

5.4.2. The driver and driver’s assistant are to be briefed about type of explosives to be

transported.

5.4.3. Although vehicles are normally to be correctly fitted, equipped, and marked according to the standards stated in this guideline, it is requested that mine/UXO clearance Organizations do not draw attention to themselves by marking the outside of their vehicles to indicate that they are carrying explosive.

5.4.4. Type and quantity of explosives and conditions of roads to be used are to be

considered when deciding type of vehicle to be used.

5.4.5. Towing of a vehicle loaded with explosives is forbidden. Exceptionally the vehicle may be towed to the closest suitable location for repairs or loading into a second vehicle. It is to be towed with a rigid link, and the speed is not to exceed 40 KPH.

5.4.6. Boxes, pallets and other packaging for transport of explosives are to be evenly

distributed over the whole area for load, and can be loaded up to the height of the sides of the truck. All individual packaging and boxes with explosives are to be loaded and fixed to prevent spillage from boxes and turning over or impact inside boxes.

5.4.7. Vehicles transporting explosives may have only one trailer or semi-trailer, any trailer

or semi-trailer is to be fitted with a braking system connected to the master brake. In case of disconnection of trailer from vehicle this system must automatically stop the trailer. If explosives-carrying vehicles are travelling together, distance between them is to be at least 200 m.

5.5. Procedures in Case of Traffic Accident

5.5.1. In case of any accident that does not allow for the transport to continue, the crew is to immediately inform their organization’s headquarters.




5.5.2. In case of an accident, duties of the driver and assistant are to.

a. Take necessary measures to prevent any danger to other vehicles or traffic. b. Place two warning triangles behind the vehicle, marking that it is stationary on

the road. This is to apply both night and day. c. In daytime the driver should send his assistant to a distance of 100 m to warn

other traffic. At night use lights to warn other vehicles using the same carriageway as the stopped vehicle, ensuring traffic slows down, stops or overtakes safely.

5.5.3. After proper marking of the vehicle, the crew should carry out the following:

a. Remove from the vehicle all documentation relating to transport of explosives. b. Extinguish any fires on or in the vehicle. c. Prevent spillage of explosives. d. Prevent the approach of bystanders and warn them of the danger. e. Inform the closest local police station or military unit, and suggest the

necessary action required.

5.5.4. If there is a danger of explosion or fire, local authorities and the closest LMAC unit should also be informed.

5.6. Additional Safety Measures

a. No passengers are to be carried in vehicles transporting explosives. b. Vehicle crews are normally to consist only of a driver and a driver’s assistant.

c. No material that may cause a fire may be carried in vehicles transporting

explosives. d. No repairs that might cause fire by sparking impact or violent contact may be

carried out. e. No smoking is allowed in the driver’s cabin or any other part of the vehicle.

5.6.1. From the moment the driver receives the explosives until the delivery is completed,

he is not to leave the vehicle unattended. He may leave the vehicle provided it is left with his assistant.




5.6.2. The driver will drive with care, and the speed should not exceed 80% of the highest speed determined for the road, and indicated by traffic signs on the route taken, but in no case should speed exceed 60 KPH.

5.6.3. If the explosives are stolen, the Organization or persons transporting the explosives

are to take measures to find them and to report to the person in charge of the transport and also inform the local authorities.

5.6.4. Vehicles transporting explosives should be fitted with a device to take away static

electricity from the vehicle to the ground.

5.6.5. Explosives will not be placed in the driver’s cabin or in the same space where passengers are carried.

5.6.6. Explosives and the means to initiate explosives may be transported together only

when the quantity of explosives does not exceed 50 kg, and 100 detonators or blasting caps. This will only be allowed provided that the detonators or blasting caps are in their originally packed boxes, and that the explosives are packed and loaded separately from detonators, blasting capsules or any initiating means.

5.7. Storage of Explosive Material

5.7.1. Demining or EOD operations will have three stages of storage for explosives. Explosives and accessories are to be stored correctly, safely and securely at each stage.

a. Permanent Storage Facility: is a separate building where explosives are

stored in the packaging prescribed for public traffic. Storage of quantities in access of 2724 kg should be limited to a permanent storage facility, which is to be regulated by the LMAC.

b. Temporary Storage Facility: is a storage building that meets the full

requirements for the storing of explosives, or a sea container used for storing explosives in smaller quantities. Maximum quantity of explosives stored in a temporary warehouse is not to exceed 2724 kg.

c. Daily storage: (On site storage of working explosives) is where daily quantities

are kept for safe storage, such as wooden boxes, or similar. The maximum quantity of explosives stored on site is not to exceed 25 kg.

5.7.2. Only qualified persons over 21 years of age may purchase or store explosives.

These persons are to be trained and qualified in loading, unloading, storage and characteristics of explosives they handle. They should also be familiar with the regulations for purchasing explosives.




5.7.3. The interiors of warehouses should have daylight. If electrical light is used the installation is to be in accordance with technical norms regulating handling of dangerous material including protective measures for lives, health, environment and material goods against explosion or fire. Generally warehouses should not be heated.

5.7.4. Warehouses are to have ventilation, installed in such a way that it cannot be closed,

blocked or allow water to penetrate, and also to prevent any inflammable material being thrown into it. Warehouses are to be furnished with anti-fire devices, and with a lightning conductor.

5.7.5. Warehouses are not to be accessible to other persons without authorization. Only

one set of keys is to be issued. These are to be issued to the supervisor in charge of storage and deliveries at the warehouse.

5.7.6. The warehouse is to have separate rooms or a substantial barrier for separating

explosives and detonators/blasting capsules.

5.7.7. Only explosives in original packaging may be stored. These may be stacked or placed on shelves if they are in wooden or metal boxes. If explosives are in cardboard boxes they are not to be stacked. All boxes are to be placed at least 100mm above the floor, e.g. on wooden pallets. When boxes are stacked the height will not exceed 1.5 m. The space between the top of the boxes and the ceiling will not be less than 600mm. Boxes are to be at least 100mm away from the upper shelf, and 500mm away from the walls of the room. When stacking boxes the width of the base is to be bigger than the height of stacked boxes.

5.7.8. Blasting capsules and electric detonators may be stacked only if packed in boxes

and on wooden shelves maximum two layers on a shelf. Total height of stacked boxes will not exceed 1.4 meters.

5.7.9. It is forbidden to nail or dismantle boxes in the warehouse where explosives are

stored. This should be done away from the warehouse, with tools that cannot produce sparks, explosion or fire.

5.7.10. Tools will not be kept in the same room with explosives or initiation means.

5.7.11. If portable lanterns or pocket torches of any description are required they will be

switched on before entering the store. The person holding the torch will not handle explosives or detonators or blasting capsules.

5.7.12. Organizations using explosives will keep records on purchasing, use and destroyed

and missing explosives. The records are to show the following:

a. Name and address of Organization from which the explosive was purchased. b. Date of purchase, showing type and quantity purchased.




c. Purpose of usage. d. Full information on type and quantity of any missing or destroyed explosives,

including dates and details on who it was handed over to or when it was destroyed, or it was missing.

5.7.13. Organizations using explosives are to supervise quantities used by personnel during

all operations and training. The explosives are to be issued with a receipt to the person who uses it. The receipt is to show date of issue, type, quantity, and planned time of usage of the explosives, and the signature of the recipient. After demolition the person who performed it is obliged, the same day, to give a report to the Organization or person issuing the explosives, with information about when it was used, date and time, type, quantity and purpose for which it was used. Both the owner and the user are responsible for the accuracy of this information.

5.7.14. Materials used for packaging explosives are to be destroyed, not discarded after use.

5.7.15. If the required quantity for storage is less than 2724 kg, it may be stored in a

temporary storage facility, inside containers specially manufactured for that purpose, which fulfill the prescribed conditions. Organizations using temporary warehouses are to maintain the building and a protection zone around it according to the prescribed technical norms. Organizations are also to provide physical protection of temporary warehouses.

5.8. Sea Containers

5.8.1. Sea containers may be used as a temporary storage facility for storage of explosives up to 2724 kg, 1000 detonators or blasting capsules and the required quantity of safety fuse and other means for firing. When sea containers are used as storage warehouses for explosives and accessories, they are to fulfill all the technical conditions required for storing explosives.

5.8.2. Storage containers are to be electrically earthed or grounded.

5.8.3. Explosives and detonators or blasting capsules are to be stored in manufacturer’s

original packages. Packages which require the use of tools to open them are to be opened a minimum of 15 m away from the sea container, using tools that do not create sparks.

5.8.4. Boxes and packages are to be carefully handled, not roughly pulled or thrown. They

are to be clearly date-marked, allowing use of those boxes that have the earliest production date.

5.8.5. Sea containers are to be kept in good condition, inside and out. Their structural

integrity and security is to be maintained at all times.




5.8.6. Access to containers is to be limited to the supervisor in charge of stocks in storage.

5.8.7. Records about incoming and outgoing explosives are to be kept inside the container, so that at any given times stock holdings can be easily checked.

5.8.8. The container is to be surrounded with fence at least 2 m high, at a minimum

distance of 10 m from the outside wall of the container. Where there are no permanent guards, periodical checking is to be provided.

5.8.9. Signboards to prohibit smoking and fire are to be displayed on clear spots in the

restricted zone. Warning is also to be displayed that only authorized persons may enter the area.

5.8.10. Sea containers used for storing explosives and accessories are to be furnished with

sufficient appropriate fire extinguishers.

5.8.11. Temporary storage facilities for storage of up to 2724 kg. of explosives and 1000 detonators or blasting capsules are to be built of fireproof material, capable of withstanding a fire for at least two hours, and to be sufficiently secure to resist burglary.

5.8.12. All rules for technical conditions and usage for containers are to be applied.

5.9. Protective Measures for Storing and Handling of Explosives

5.9.1. These measures apply to all warehouses where explosives are stored or packed. A technically-qualified person is to be in charge of managing the receipt, storage, guarding and issuing explosives in both permanent and temporary warehouses.

5.9.2. Only authorized persons are to enter the restricted zone. Those persons who receive

authorization from the person in charge are to be to escorted at all times whilst inside the restricted zone.

5.9.3. All smoking materials, including cigarettes, matches, lighters etc. and any object or

item that might cause fire are prohibited from the restricted zone. At the entrance to the restricted zone there is to be a warning sign. This sign is to state: No smoking or smoking materials allowed beyond this point.

5.9.4. A minimum 500mm space is to be allowed between the walls of any store and stored

material. A path at least 1.2 m wide is to run through the middle of the warehouse. Lines showing the borders of this path are to be oil painted on the floor of the storage area.

5.9.5. Clothing and shoes of all workers in a warehouse are to be in accordance with rules

on storage of explosives. Shoes are to be manufactured in such a manner as not to cause sparks.




5.9.6. The warehouse is not to be used to store packaging material or tools for opening boxes. It is also not to be used as a cloakroom or a canteen or dining room for warehouse workers. It is to be kept clean and tidy at all times and is to be swept and cleaned regularly.

5.9.7. When no work is taking place, the warehouse is to be locked, except when it is being

ventilated. The key is to be with the supervisor or his deputy. After working hours the key is to be left at a pre-determined secure place, decided by the warehouse manager.

5.9.8. Warehouses are to be constructed in such a way as to provide protection from static

electricity in all rooms.

5.9.9. If thunderstorms are predicted near the warehouse, all work is to stop and warehouse workers are to go to a safe place.

5.9.10. In the event that the warehouse requires repair, all explosives and explosive

accessories are to be removed before repairs are started.

5.10. Daily Storage

5.10.1. For daily usage explosives may be stored in wooden boxes or other appropriate containers.

5.10.2. Boxes may contain up to 25 kg of explosives or an appropriate quantity of initiating

means to fire the given quantity of explosives.

5.10.3. Boxes that contain explosives are not to contain detonators, blasting capsules or any means of initiation. Detonators and blasting capsules are to be stored and carried in a separate box from explosives.

5.11. Safety Distances, Explosive Storage

5.11.1. At clearance sites explosives are to be stored in a secure and marked area at least 50 m away from all other areas. For permanent storage facilities the safety distances for the storage of explosives as detailed on the LMAC Explosive Limit Licence are to be adhered to.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.50 S&OH Storage, transportation and handling of explosives (Ed 2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 14 BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 14 BATTLE AREA CLEARANCE


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 7 5.2. Site Preparation and Setting Out .................................................................................... 8 5.3. Marking ........................................................................................................................... 8 5.4. Cluster Munitions Clearance Methodology ..................................................................... 9 5.5. Non Standard Situations ............................................................................................... 10 5.6. Cluster Munitions with Drag Ribbons ............................................................................ 10 5.7. Cluster Munition Clearance Depth ................................................................................ 11 5.8. General Categories and Procedures for BAC Operations ............................................ 11 5.9. Surface Clearance (Phase 1)........................................................................................ 12 5.10. Conduct of Surface Clearance .................................................................................. 12 5.11. Sub-Surface Clearance (Phase 2) ............................................................................. 13 5.12. Conduct of Sub-Surface Clearance ........................................................................... 13 5.13. Investigation of an Instrument Signal ........................................................................ 14 5.14. Technique for the Investigation of an Instrument Signal by Excavation .................... 16 5.15. Full Excavation .......................................................................................................... 18 5.16. Technique for Full Excavation ................................................................................... 19 5.17. Action on Locating Metal during Excavation .............................................................. 20 5.18. Action on Locating Sub-munition during Excavation ................................................. 20 5.19. Manual Vegetation Removal Using Hand Tools ........................................................ 21 5.20. Mechanical Hand Held Strimmer ............................................................................... 22 5.21. Clearance of Obstacles ............................................................................................. 23 5.22. Burning Of Vegetation in Un-cleared Areas ............................................................... 24 5.23. Pulling Procedure ...................................................................................................... 25 5.24. Mine Find ................................................................................................................... 27 5.25. Organization and Responsibilities ............................................................................. 28 5.26. Command and Control .............................................................................................. 29 5.27. Conclusion of BAC Operations .................................................................................. 31 5.28. Individual Items for Destruction ................................................................................. 31 5.29. Render Safe Procedure (RSP) .................................................................................. 32 5.30. Safety Requirements ................................................................................................. 32 5.31. Daily Work Routine .................................................................................................... 33




5.32. Recording and Reporting ........................................................................................... 33 5.33. Specific Procedures................................................................................................... 34 5.34. Internal Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC) ........................................ 34





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that Battle Area Clearance is carried out with the maximum safety and control. Battle Area Clearance (BAC) is a planned systematic search, detection, identification, field evaluation and final disposal of unexploded ordnance (UXO) contained in an area where a battle has taken place or the presence of UXO has contaminated the area.

2. SCOPE

2.1. Battle Area Clearance operations involve the location and disposal of ERW over specific areas; which may include battlefields, defensive positions and sites where air delivered munitions have been fired or dropped. Depending on the required land use, BAC may involve surface or sub surface clearance.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Sub-munition: Any munition that, to perform its task, separates from a parent

munition. Mines or munitions that form part of a CBU, artillery shell or missile payload. An item of ordnance carried in, or ejected by, a dispenser. For the purpose of this Chapter, the term sub-munition shall be interchangeable with ‘cluster munition’ or ‘cluster bomblet’ and shall not include mines.

3.1.2. Surface: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term surface is used to describe the

clearance of UXO or other specified items situated at ground level. Items protruding from the ground / partially buried shall be considered as above ground level (surface).

3.1.3. Sub-Surface: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term sub-surface is used to

describe the clearance of UXO or other specified items situated below ground level to a depth agreed by the LMAC.

3.1.4. Intrusive Action: A requirement to move vegetation, rubble, soil or any other object

that could be concealing a cluster munition or UXO which should be located.

3.1.5. Non-intrusive Action: No requirement to move vegetation, rubble, soil or any other object that could be concealing a cluster munition or UXO which should be located.

3.1.6. Instrument: For the purpose of this Chapter an Instrument is a hand-held metal

detector or locator.

3.1.7. Fade Out: Fade out is a term generally used in BAC operations and in particular, the clearance of cluster bomblets (sub-munitions), to describe an agreed distance




cleared to confirm that no further pertinent UXO evidence exists. During the clearance of cluster bomblets fade out shall be achieved when the cluster strike footprint has been identified and cleared to the required depth. Fade out shall be conducted using the same procedures (i.e. surface or sub-surface) under which the evidence was found unless otherwise agreed by the LMAC. In Lebanon the minimum Fade out distance is normally a minimum of 50 meters from any pertinent evidence. Generally, if evidence is located during fade out an assessment shall be conducted by the LMAC Operations Section as to whether the fade out distance should be amended. Any amendments to the fade out distance must be approved by the LMAC and should be detailed in the relevant Site Clearance Plan. The term ‘UXO evidence’ refers to relevant explosive ordnance (e.g. sub-munitions) being cleared although, it may include other evidence such as strike marks, entry holes and craters. This shall be confirmed by the LMAC Operations Section.

Note: Fade Out is not Achieved Situations where Fade out is not achieved, due to topography or unusable land, metal pickets with BAC/Mine triangles attached shall be placed at a maximum of 10 meter intervals along the edge of the boundary between the cleared and unclear area. This will be accurately recorded and clearly evident in the completion report, the cleared and un-cleared area shall be accurately recorded and also annotated on the task map.




3.1.8. Qualified: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term Qualified is used to describe a

person who has received operational Accreditation from the LMAC, authorizing them to perform specific BAC activities in accordance to their accredited position.

3.1.9. Site Supervisor: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term Site Supervisor shall be

used to describe the following person:

a. A suitably qualified person who is responsible for a BAC Site. b. The senior person at the operational Site who is qualified to manage the

BAC operations being conducted. c. A designated qualified person who is responsible for up to three (3) demining

units or teams at the Site providing that adequate supervision is in place for all units / teams.

Note: Terminology may vary between Organizations and therefore, Site Supervisor may be replaced with other terms such as ‘Team Leader’. The demining Organization SOP shall detail pertinent Organization structures and responsibilities. See 5.25. Organization and Responsibilities and Command and Control 5.26.

3.1.10. Deminer (Searcher): A person, including a public servant, qualified and employed to

undertake demining activities or work on a demining worksite.

Note: For the purpose of this Chapter, the term Deminer is used to describe a person responsible for conducting Demining operations as directed by the relevant Demining Organization. The word ‘Deminer’ is interchangeable with ‘Searcher’ and unless otherwise stated in the Demining Organization SOP’s, shall be used to describe the same person. The Deminer shall always be supervised when conducting Demining clearance operations and his primary responsibilities shall involve searching in accordance to the Demining Organization SOP’s and NMAS.

3.1.11. Clearance depth: The minimum depth when conducting sub-surface BAC involving

the clearance of sub-munitions is 20 cm. When conducting the detector/locator test, the depth shall be measured from the surface of the ground to the top of the sub-munition / test piece. The test piece shall be positioned in the ground to confirm that the detector/locator is capable of locating it in any orientation at 20cm. Any reduction in the clearance depth must be authorized by the LMAC. The depth shall be increased when required, e.g. where evidence exists to suggest that sub-munitions are at a greater depth than 20 cm.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all Battle Area Clearance activities are carried out in accordance with National Mine Action Standards to minimize the risk to clearance personnel, the public and surroundings.




5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Battle Area Clearance Tasks shall involve the planning, systematic search and clearance of a given area that has either unexploded sub-munitions or other UXO contamination. It involves the removal and/or destruction of all UXO and their component parts which would otherwise pose a significant threat to the local population. All BAC Clearance Operations progress from the identification of a UXO contaminated area through a detailed reconnaissance to the reporting and registration of its completion following the actual clearance of the contaminated area. For the purpose of this NMAS Chapter the terms UXO and sub-munitions apply to Explosive Remnants of War (ERW) which may be located in Lebanon except landmines.

5.1.2. BAC Operations may also involve the clearance of Abandoned Explosive Ordnance

(AXO) which has been scattered due to an undesired detonation within a Bunker or Ammunitions Stockpile resulting in an extensive hazardous area.

5.1.3. Any BAC Organization shall include the preparation of appropriate procedures for

neutralization and disarming of UXO, the use of well trained and qualified deminers and EOD specialists and the use of safe and effective equipment, and supplies. The development of a safe and effective BAC capability within Lebanon shall require the establishment of levels of expertise to cope with a range of operational requirements.

5.1.4. All areas within Lebanon that are known to contain a mine/UXO hazard are marked

and recorded as a Dangerous Area (DA) on IMSMA. A number of these DA shall contain a mine hazard and the procedure for clearance of these areas is detailed at Chapter Four. However, many DA shall not contain mines and the threat shall be unexploded cluster munitions, unexploded Land Service Ammunition (LSA) or unexploded air delivered weapons. This chapter shall outline the clearance procedure for all UXO, however in particular the clearance of cluster munitions.

5.1.5. Cluster munitions are delivered by a wide variety of launch or delivery systems, such

as missiles, rockets, projectiles, mortars or aircraft delivered dispensers. Once the dispenser has been fired, launched or dropped, opening is normally determined by a time delay or proximity fuze. The sub munitions are normally dispensed in one of three ways; base ejection, nose ejection or case rupture. Since sub-munitions disperse after ejection, the density of the impact footprint is dependent on the speed and altitude at which the dispenser, projectile or rocket opens. (See Figure: 1.8. – Example of Cluster Strike Footprint).




5.1.6. The cluster munitions currently found in Lebanon are designed to detonate on impact. The failure rate of these cluster munitions cannot be accurately determined until such time as the necessary strike data is provided. Not with standing this, failure rates are dependent on a number of factors such as:

a. Design.

b. Length and condition of storage.

c. Drop height and velocity.

d. Vegetation.

e. Ground conditions at the impact area.

5.1.7. Threat to the Local Community: Cluster munitions and UXO pose a direct threat to

communities and internally displaced people, hamper humanitarian relief, hinder the already difficult task of reconstruction of houses and essential infrastructure, and impede movement of peacekeeping troops.

5.1.8. The method of search or clearance of cluster munitions shall depend on the threat to

human lives; this shall initially be in built up areas, along roads, around houses and gardens, schools and public buildings. The immediate priority is to save lives and minimize the likelihood of injuries due to the presence of cluster munitions. An equally high priority is to save livelihoods such as clearance of plantations, as well as olive and fruit orchards, this shall facilitate economic productivity and minimize the risk to local people attempting to remove cluster munitions themselves.

5.1.9. The procedures given in this chapter provide the foundation and framework from which each clearance Organization is to base detailed clearance procedures. These procedures are to be concisely stated in the respective SOP’s with clear explanations and if necessary with diagrams and sketches.

5.2. Site Preparation and Setting Out

5.2.1. See Chapter 2: Site Preparation and Setting Out.

5.3. Marking

5.3.1. Marking shall be in accordance with Chapter 3: Mine Clearance and BAC Marking System unless, otherwise detailed in this Chapter.




5.3.2. Suitable approved temporary marking shall be used during clearance operations to

ensure that the designated hazardous area is methodically searched. The marking system shall be easily identifiable, unambiguous and shall clearly differentiate between areas cleared and un-cleared. The marking system for the clearance lanes should be such that it is easily and quickly moved as the search progresses.

5.3.3. The size of the search areas / boxes is the responsibility of each clearance

Organization, however the size should allow for an effective systematic search without causing unnecessary delays with time spent erecting marking.

5.4. Cluster Munitions Clearance Methodology

5.4.1. Once a cluster munition strike area has been identified it is entered into IMSMA and recorded as a target in the form of a Dangerous Area Report. All targets shall be prioritized based on the threat to human life and livelihood, and shall be cleared accordingly.

5.4.2. The methodology for the clearance of cluster munition strike areas is normally to

employ a two phase approach whereas all bomblets are cleared on the surface and sub-surface until fade out has been achieved. The process of rapidly removing the immediate and obvious cluster munition threat which poses the greatest risk to human lives is known as surface clearance (Phase 1). Surface clearance is conducted with or without the assistance of instruments (detectors / locators) and this may involve intrusive actions. The primary aim is to systematically search, locate and clear all surface cluster bomblets with an emphasis on the immediate vicinity of urban areas and places of the highest threat to the population.

5.4.3. During surface clearance the Site Supervisor is responsible to ensure that strict

control is maintained and the area is thoroughly investigated. Those items that are to be destroyed in-situ are to be clearly marked and the local population warned of the threat. If required protective works are to be employed in order to minimize damage. Those items safe to do so can be neutralized and moved to an approved CDS. In addition to the removal of the immediate threat the Site Supervisor is to determine as accurately as possible the centre of the cluster strike and record the location using the UTM coordinate system. This information shall be used for the planning of the next phase of clearance which shall be a systematic sub-surface clearance using instruments (Phase 2).

5.4.4. It should not be assumed the same team or indeed the same clearance Organization

shall revisit the Site and conduct the Phase 2 sub-surface clearance. It is therefore vitally important that all information gathered during the Phase 1 clearance is complete, accurate and recorded clearly in order to minimize confusion and the potential to leave areas within a cluster munition Site un-cleared.




5.4.5. The purpose of Phase 2 clearance is to systematically search, locate and clear the

cluster strike area (sub-surface) using instruments. All cluster strike areas shall be cleared using sub-surface clearance to 20cm depth prior to completion and handover of the task. Areas where it is obvious that a sub-munition could not be located sub-surface, for example asphalt roads, concrete, compacted stone/gravel tracks and rock surfaces shall only require surface clearance. Any required reduction or increase in the clearance depth shall be documented on the clearance plan. The reason any areas are not cleared using sub-surface clearance shall be documented on the clearance plan.

5.5. Non Standard Situations

5.5.1. Where necessary, demining Organizations are to develop drills and procedures for safely dealing with non standards situations that may occur on BAC tasks. Such situations may include:

a) BAC through wire obstacles. b) BAC close to buildings, wire fences and other metal structures. c) BAC through areas covered with large boulders.

d) Old military trench or bunker systems. e) Abandoned/damaged vehicles. f) Entangled wire. g) Water courses, ponds or wells. h) Derelict or collapsed buildings. i) Heaped vegetation. j) Insect constructions. Termite mounds and anthills. k) Graveyards. Note: Where demining Organizations carrying out BAC encounter non standard situations that they are unable to safely deal with, they are to report the matter to the LMAC Immediately.

5.6. Cluster Munitions with Drag Ribbons

5.6.1. Those munitions with a drag ribbon such as the M42, M46, M77, MZD2 and M85 are prone to catching on trees, bushes and fences. It is therefore essential that all searchers are aware of the potential danger of hanging munitions and take appropriate precautions.




5.6.2. Banana trees because of their shape and large leaves shall require additional consideration to ensure no cluster munitions are left undiscovered on the tops.

5.6.3. Clearance of cluster munitions hanging from trees or fences shall be challenging and

should be dealt with on a case-by-case basis. Those that are considered safe to do so can be moved. However those considered unsafe to move shall require special attention and in these situations the LMAC is to be informed.

5.6.4. Clearance Organizations are required to have specific procedures to deal with cluster

munitions caught in vegetation, fences and other challenging situations.

5.6.5. When conducting clearance operations involving munitions with drag ribbons and firing pins in the windy conditions, wind speed should be considered. There is a risk that such items could be dislodged by the wind, causing them to detonate.

5.7. Cluster Munition Clearance Depth

5.7.1. The default depth for cluster munition clearance in Lebanon is 20 cm. However there is scope for this to be adjusted and a Site-specific clearance depth may be authorized by the LMAC. If there is a deviation from the 20 cm clearance depth then the reason for the change in depth shall be explained and then formally recorded in the clearance plan for each Site.

5.7.2. The default depth for cluster munitions shall remain at 20 cm until such time sufficient

evidence has been gathered prior or during the course of clearance to suggest this depth is inappropriate, and the depth shall then be adjusted accordingly. Any reduction in the clearance depth must be authorized by the LMAC.

5.8. General Categories and Procedures for BAC Operations

5.8.1. Surface Clearance is the most effective method of rapidly locating, removing and/or destroying the immediate threat of cluster munitions from a contaminated area. The terrain, density of vegetation or habitation shall determine the maximum number of searchers and safe spacing of individuals within the search unit. A dependable method of systematic surface clearance is to be employed to ensure all areas are investigated thoroughly and no items on the surface are left undiscovered.

5.8.2. The two general categories of clearance are Surface Clearance (Phase1) and Sub-

surface Clearance (phase 2) each category may be separated into general search procedures.




5.9. Surface Clearance (Phase 1)

5.9.1. Visual search is conducted without the aid of instruments generally in areas where

there is minimal / no vegetation or obstacles to impede the Deminers ability to visually search the ground for surface UXO. Examples of where the visual search may be effective are barren land or hard standing areas such as buildings, routes and airfields. The visual search may involve intrusive actions.

5.9.2. Instrument Aided Visual Search may be a requirement to use an instrument to aid

the visual search for surface UXO. The use of the instrument shall be dependent type of UXO, the density of vegetation and the nature of the ground which may impede the searcher from conducting a safe and effective visual search. The Instrument Aided Visual Search may involve intrusive actions.

5.10. Conduct of Surface Clearance

5.10.1. Clearance is conducted by trained BAC personnel normally walking in an extended line simultaneously or separately while conducting a visual only or instrument aided search of the un-cleared area / box or lane.

5.10.2. Personnel conducting the search shall walk at a suitable speed to ensure that it is

safe / effective and, unless it is necessary to speak (e.g., instructions from the supervisor or on location of a UXO), it should be conducted in complete silence. The Site Supervisor should be situated to the rear of the working personnel for command and control purposes.

5.10.3. The Site Supervisor shall be informed of any UXO located during the clearance

process and all UXO shall be appropriately marked prior to continuing. Clearance shall be systematic and conducted in a safe and effective manner to ensure that the designated hazardous area is cleared of pertinent surface ordnance.

5.10.4. Surface clearance may involve intrusive actions and therefore, the Site Supervisor

shall ensure that appropriate safety measures are imposed (e.g. PPE) according to the situation.

5.10.5. During the clearance of cluster strike areas, the initial focus should be on identifying

the centre of the strike as accurately as possible and recording it with a GPS using the UTM coordinate system. It shall be understood that the UTM detailed on the DA Report or clearance plan is not necessarily the centre of the cluster strike and therefore, an accurate recorded UTM of the centre of strike shall assist the Site Supervisor when conducting any subsequent (Phase 2) clearance operations, which should involved clearance of the entire strike area to fade out.




5.11. Sub-Surface Clearance (Phase 2)

5.11.1. Sub-surface clearance (Phase 2) is normally subsequent to the surface clearance (Phase 1), however there maybe situations whereby clearance shall be a combination of surface and sub-surface clearance. Nonetheless those instruments employed must be able to reliably locate cluster munitions to the minimum required search depth. The type of instrument used shall depend on the clearance requirements, i.e. large-loop detectors are very effective in large open fields but limited in areas with high vegetation or obstacles, where as a detector with a small head or probe type design should be more effective.

5.11.2. The sub-surface clearance procedure shall be clearly explained in the Demining

Organization SOP. When conducting the instrument search using a hand held detector/locator which involves sweeping the search head (or equivalent) over the ground (across the clearance lane), the search head shall be moved over the same area of ground at least twice during the detector search procedure prior to it being considered as effectively searched. When using detectors which involve a different method of search, e.g. Large Loop detector, it may not be practical to search the same ground twice. Therefore, additional monitoring of the procedure and QC should be conducted.

5.11.3. An overlap of the un-cleared area shall be incorporated into the instrument search

procedure. The sub-surface search may involve intrusive actions.

5.12. Conduct of Sub-Surface Clearance

5.12.1. The method used to conduct sub-surface clearance shall be dependent upon certain factors such as the location of the Site, i.e., built up areas, plantations, open fields and the type of instruments used. A safe and effective method shall be employed ensuring that the designated hazardous area is systematically sub-surface cleared of all pertinent ordnance.

5.12.2. Instruments shall be accurately adjusted and tested for maximum performance in

order to locate the pertinent ordnance at the required depth.

5.12.3. All pertinent instrument readings shall be marked and investigated through excavation if confirmed to be sub-surface.

5.12.4. Consideration shall be given to ensure that the search method employed does not

allow detectors to interfere with one another. The Site Supervisor is responsible for devising a method that allows the maximum number of detectors to be employed whilst allowing for adequate separation in order to prevent interference.




5.12.5. Clearance lanes shall be systematically searched across their entire width and a

sufficient overlap (safety margin) to the sides.

Note: Paragraphs 5.13. to 5.23. (Inclusive) detail recommendations and requirements for the safe and effective clearance of sub-munitions during BAC operations however, where possible, they should also be followed when clearing other types of UXO.

5.13. Investigation of an Instrument Signal

5.13.1. The following are the general recommendations and requirements when investigating (probing / excavating) the ground for an instrument signal:

a. When investigating areas which contain cluster munitions, the prodder should

be excluded from the process due to the sensitive nature of the ordnance. b. When investigating a signal the person conducting the procedure shall face

towards the immediate area to be investigated.

c. The person conducting the investigation procedure shall be wearing full PPE (visor and body armour).

d. No other personnel shall be within 25 meters from a person conducting the

investigation process. The only exception to this shall be personnel required to conduct supervision, quality assurance or authorized visitors (by the LMAC) however, they shall wear full PPE.

e. During the investigation process, personnel within a 100 meters radius of the

person conducting the procedure shall wear full PPE.

f. These safety distance and PPE requirements may only be reduced on authorization from the LMAC or when sufficient natural or man-made protection from the effects of an explosion is afforded. This should be reflected in the Clearance Plan.

g. The precise location of the signal shall be clearly marked prior to commencing

the investigation process. h. A visual inspection of the area to be investigated shall be conducted prior to

commencing the investigation process. i. Any loose metal on the surface should be removed, if it is safe to do so, and

the area rechecked using the detector/locator.




j. The investigation shall commence from a minimum of 10 cm back from the

nearest point of the signal. k. An approved hand tool shall be used to identify the cause of the signal which

should be conducted by excavation only. The metal detector should be used to assist during the process.

l. The signal shall be investigated from a clear area in a safe/methodical

process towards the signal. m. Excavation on top of the signal should be avoided as the action may require

the deminer to position himself/herself over the signal and it is possible that excessive pressure may be exerted during the excavation process.

n. The ground shall be investigated to the minimum search depth (e.g. 20 cm)

starting at a minimum distance of 10 cm from the nearest point of the signal. o. In certain circumstances (e.g. hard ground), the excavation may be conducted

in stages (e.g. at a depth of 5 cm or 10 cm at a time) or another approved method. In such situations, the detector should be used to assist to ensure that the precise location of the signal is known and to avoid any excavation on top of the signal.

p. In hard ground, resulting from extremely dry conditions, water may be used to

soften the ground prior to commencing the excavation process. This shall be applied with caution and in moderation to avoid unnecessary disturbance of the ground.

q. On seeing what he/she believes to be a sub-munition or suspicious object, the

Deminer shall stop the investigation process, mark the item with a standard hazard marker at a minimum of 10 cm before the object, and inform the pertinent supervisory staff.

r. The deminer shall expose the absolute minimum of the object to assist in

recognition.

s. The cause of the signal shall be confirmed by supervisory staff and the relevant action taken, prior to removing the signal marker.

t. Once the item has been dealt with the ground shall be re-checked prior to

being declared as cleared.




5.14. Technique for the Investigation of an Instrument Signal by Excavation

5.14.1. The following detail recommendations and requirements for the investigation of an instrument signal by excavation:

a. The deminer shall measure a minimum of 10 cm back from the nearest point

of the signal. b. From this point, the deminer should then excavate as a minimum, a 20 cm

deep trench with a vertical flat face. The trench should be at least as wide as the signal and shall be wide enough to ensure a safe investigation procedure.

c. The deminer shall then excavate forward using the trowel or another approved

tool. d. The trench shall be carefully excavated towards the signal by using the

approved tool in a safe and methodical manner. This should be conducted from the bottom of the trench to the top. Any excessive pressure and abrupt movements with the tool shall be avoided.

e. The excavation process shall continue until the signal has been cleared or, a

sub-munition or suspicious object is identified.

f. Any non-dangerous metal found should be removed to the fragmentation container, and the area re-checked with the detector. When no signal remains the deminer may continue ahead.

g. Alternatively, the excavation may be conducted in stages (e.g. at a depth of 5

cm or 10 cm at a time) or by using another approved method.




STAGE 1 - Sub-Surface Investigation

10cm

10cm

STAGE 2 - Excavate down, across & forward

10cm

Figure 1.2. Example of Investigating a Signal by Excavation (in stages)




STAGE 3 - Minimum excavation necessary to expose target.

20cm

10cm

STAGE 4

20cm

Figure 1.3. Investigating a Signal – 20 cm Deep Trench Excavated (in stages)

5.15. Full Excavation

5.15.1. In certain areas the instrument (detector/locator) may be ineffective and therefore, the procedure should be replaced with a full excavation procedure to ensure that all sub-munitions are located to the required depth. The following are examples of when Full Excavation may be required:

a. There is too much metal contamination in the soil, making it impossible to

distinguish signals. b. The hazardous area contains mineralized or magnetic soil and ground

compensating instruments are not available or unable to prevent interference. c. The maximum depth that sub-munitions are anticipated to be found is beyond

the range of the current in-service instruments. d. Electrical interference (e.g. from power lines). e. The instrument method is unsuitable. f. There is a requirement to investigate or remove obstacles, e.g. trenches,

bunkers, mounds, rocks, fences.




5.16. Technique for Full Excavation

5.16.1. The following detail recommendations and requirements for the investigation of a detector signal by excavation:

a. When excavating, the person conducting the procedure shall face towards the

immediate area to be excavated. b. The minimum depth excavated shall be 20 cm and, the full width of the 1

meter wide lane and a minimum of 10 cm to each side of the lane (overlap) shall be investigated to this depth. The width of lane may vary depending on the clearance procedure being conducted but shall not be less than 1 meter in width, for safety reasons, unless authorized by the LMAC.

c. The deminer shall create a trench a minimum width of 1.2 meters with a

vertical flat face, a minimum of 10 cm back from the nearest detector signal or at least from the clear area, to a minimum depth of 20 cm. The width of lane may vary depending on the clearance procedure being conducted.

d. The trench shall be carefully excavated forwards by using the trowel (or other

approved tool) tool in a safe / methodical process and should be conducted from the bottom of the trench to the top. Any excessive pressure and abrupt movements with the tool shall be avoided.

e. As the instrument is not being used to identify any signals; there may be no

prior indicator that a cluster bomb is present and therefore, the Deminer must be cautious.

f. The instrument should be used to regularly check the soil contamination level

and confirm whether the full excavation process can be replaced with the detector/locator search procedure.

g. As an alternative to Full Excavation; mark the boundary of the high metallic

area / obstacle for clearance using another procedure, e.g., Mechanical. h. The size of the area, type of terrain and available assets may determine the

most effective method of clearance.




Figure: 1.4. Full Excavation

5.17. Action on Locating Metal during Excavation

5.17.1. A single item of metal to be cleared shall comprise at least an equivalent amount of metal as the sub-munitions to be cleared. The type of sub-munitions to be cleared should be detailed in the Clearance Plan.

5.17.2. The metal shall be carefully removed from the ground and placed in the metal

collection area.

5.17.3. The area where the metal was removed from shall be checked visually and with the instrument for additional signals, prior to moving forward.

5.17.4. It is unacceptable for organizations to leave behind fragmentation or metal objects

within the specified clearance depth as detailed in the clearance plan equal to or greater in mass than the metal content of the smallest type of sub-munition.

5.18. Action on Locating Sub-munition during Excavation

a. The deminer shall stop, place a standard hazard marker a minimum of 10 cm before the sub-munition and notify the supervisory person.

b. The lane may be cordoned and clearance activities started in a new lane or if

sufficiently marked, the sub-munition may be bypassed. c. The Site Supervisor is responsible for ensuring all actions relating to the

removal or destruction of sub-munitions in situ are carried out correctly and by a qualified EOD operator.




d. Where possible all sub-munitions shall be destroyed in situ. If this is not possible, or proves to be impractical, sub-munitions may be manually neutralized/ disarmed and moved to a secure location.

e. All sub-munitions shall be pulled prior to neutralizing/disarming if it is

suspected that they are positioned as a booby trap. f. The planned destruction of located sub-munitions shall be carried out during

or after each working day unless approval from the LMAC has been granted, e.g. in circumstances where there is a specific safety hazard or lack/limited amount of explosive materials. Only qualified EOD personnel shall conduct demolitions or render safe procedures.

5.19. Manual Vegetation Removal Using Hand Tools

5.19.1. When there is a requirement to cut vegetation to aid the clearance process and ensure the safe movement of personnel then the following shall be adhered to:

a. When clearing vegetation the person conducting the procedure shall face towards the immediate area to be cleared.

b. To avoid overstretching into the un-cleared area during the cutting procedure,

vegetation shall be cut up to a maximum distance of 50 cm forward from the front of the clearance lane (e.g. base stick) and across the complete width of the lane, incorporating the overlap to the sides up to a maximum distance of 50 cm.

c. The clearance of vegetation is to be done in a safe, controlled method,

avoiding any disturbance of vegetation outside the immediate area to be cut.

d. The deminer shall ensure that he/she looks into the vegetation for any signs of UXO or suspicious objects prior to cutting the vegetation.

e. If any UXO or suspicious objects are seen then, this shall be brought to the

attention of the supervisory staff who shall take the appropriate action.

f. The detector or locator may be used to check the vegetation prior to it being cut and any signals shall be carefully investigated. The use of the detector shall be clearly explained in the Organization SOP.

g. If necessary, one hand shall be used to hold the tree, branch, or clump of

vegetation, while the other uses the cutting tool. h. The vegetation shall be cut systematically from the top downwards in a safe

and controlled manner at a maximum of 50 cm segments at a time.

i. The vegetation shall not be pulled prior to it being cut.




j. The tools should not make contact with the ground during the cutting process.

k. Vegetation shall be cut as close to the ground as necessary and a sufficient amount of vegetation removed to ensure an effective visual search and if required, an instrument search of the ground prior to walking forward.

l. Large / heavy vegetation should not be allowed to fall into un-cleared areas. m. Large / heavy vegetation should be placed in a cleared area, ensuring that it

does not become an obstacle. n. The vegetation cutting process shall be regularly supervised.

5.20. Mechanical Hand Held Strimmer

5.20.1. A mechanical hand held strimmer may be used for the removal of vegetation during BAC operations in cleared and un-cleared areas. When deploying the strimmer in un-cleared areas the following shall be adhered to:

a. The strimmer operator shall be qualified to use the strimmer in BAC

operations. b. The strimmer shall be operated by 1 deminer wearing full PPE (body armour

and visor). c. The minimum safety distance for operating the strimmer in un-cleared areas is

25 m from other personnel wearing full PPE and 100 m from other personnel who are without PPE.

d. These distances may be reduced in circumstances where adequate protection

is afforded, e.g. walls, hills, buildings etc. e. The 25 meters safety distance may be entered by pertinent personnel wearing

full PPE when there is a requirement for closer supervision or for Quality Assurance inspections.

f. Prior to commencing the cutting procedure, the operator shall look into the

vegetation to confirm that there are no obvious hazards, e.g. explosive ordnance, suspicious items or obstacles. Any hazards identified shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Site Supervisor who shall take appropriate action.

g. The vegetation shall be cut systematically from the top downwards in a safe

and controlled manner at a maximum of 50 cm segments at a time.




h. The vegetation shall be cut to a minimum distance of 20 cm above the

surface. This distance may be reduced to 5 cm in circumstances where the ground is confirmed as surface cleared.

i. The maximum distance that vegetation shall be cut forward at a time shall be

the dictated by the design of the machine, the safety of the operator and the effectiveness of the machine. The operator shall ensure that he/she is in a stable position and is complete control of the strimmer while operating it.

j. A visual inspection shall be conducted of the area cut to confirm that there

are no hazards such as explosive ordnance, suspicious items or obstacles, prior to the operator moving forward.

k. The operator shall be under regular supervision when operating the strimmer.

l. The strimmer shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and the appropriate PPE shall be worn. Guards that are fitted to the strimmer shall be in place whilst the strimmer is being used.

Note: A written request for a reduction to the safety requirements must be made to the LMAC by the Organization detailing the pertinent Sites where the strimmer shall be deployed.

Examples for deployment of the strimmer:

a. Removing vegetation in cleared areas to facilitate the marking of designated

safe areas and control lanes. b. Removing vegetation in un-cleared areas to facilitate surface or sub-surface

BAC operations.

5.21. Clearance of Obstacles

5.21.1. In areas with obstacles that contain a threat of UXO, a procedure for clearing obstacles should be used. The following are considered as potentials obstacles:

a. Former trenches in defensive positions. b. Any ditches in UXO areas. c. Fortified wire entanglements.

d. Abandoned vehicles.

5.21.2. During the clearance of battlefields or cluster strikes, obstacles shall be identified and

distinctive clearance drills should be adopted, e.g., sapping, pulling, EOD. Obstacles should ideally be cleared 360 degrees around or along its axis on both sides. Those obstacles that cannot be cleared immediately shall be marked and if necessary




fenced for future clearance operations. No clearance should be conducted closer than 50 cm to these obstacles. The Site Supervisor shall give consideration to the approach and clearance method used for each type of obstacle encountered.

5.22. Burning Of Vegetation in Un-cleared Areas

5.22.1. Burning of un-cleared areas may be conducted in order to remove vegetation to facilitate BAC operations. Prior to commencing burning, the Organization concerned shall notify local authorities and gain authorization from LMAC. Caution shall be exercised by the Organization and the burning shall be controlled in order to prevent the undesired burning of other areas and cause an unacceptable risk to the local population. The results from burning must be considered, such as, the altered state and instability of UXO. The burn shall be conducted by a suitably qualified person, e.g. Site Supervisor or EOD Officer and the burning procedure, including the method of initiation shall be detailed in the Organization SOP.

Note: Any demining Organization conducting burning of un-cleared areas shall ensure that the following precautions are adhered to prior to conducting burning.

a. Gain authorization for burning from the LMAC. Burning should be included in

the Clearance Plan. b. If possible, notify local authorities including the local emergency fire services. c. Ensure that the landowner agrees to the burning which should include a

written statement d. If necessary, coordinate activities with other agencies. e. If necessary, construct a firebreak to prevent the fire from spreading

f. Ensure that adequate precautions are taken to extinguish any small fires in

cleared areas. e.g. fire extinguishers, sand, and water). g. Calculate the fragmentation hazard zone (safety distance) depending on the

threat (e.g., mines and UXO) and post sentries accordingly. Ensure no one is within or enters the fragmentation hazard zone whilst the burn occurs




5.22.2. During burning

a. Monitor the burning procedure from a safe distance. b. Record any detonations and other relevant occurrences.

5.22.3. Post burning

a. Inform the LMAC and relevant authorities on completion of burning. b. Ensure that the burning has ceased prior to leaving the Site. c. Allow a 48 hours soak time, from the last signs of smoke before conducting

demining operations in the burned area.

5.23. Pulling Procedure

a. When it is necessary to remotely pull a UXO the procedure shall be conducted by a qualified EOD operator. When pulling a non-explosive item the procedure may be conducted by a person who is not EOD qualified however, he/she shall be trained to conduct the pulling procedure. A person who is not EOD qualified may remotely pull a mine/UXO if he/she is trained to do so and only under the supervision of an EOD Operator.

b. All personnel not directly involved in the pulling operation are to be withdrawn

to a safe area and sentries shall be posted to impose a cordon. c. A pulling cable (capable of providing adequate support for an effective pull)

shall be unrolled and laid along the clear ground between the pulling point and the location of the item.

d. A fulcrum (e.g. stacked sandbags) should be placed at a safe distance before

the item to afford some blast and fragmentation protection, act as a barrier, and provide a greater angle to dislodge the item from its position.

e. Before attaching the cable to the item, a check of the cable and the area of the

pull shall be conducted to ensure that there are no kinks, breaks or obstacles which may impede the pulling procedure.

f. EOD evacuation and safety distance calculations should be used to determine

how far the pulling point is located from the item to be pulled. This distance shall only be reduced to a minimum of 50 meters when:

There is adequate protection from blast and fragmentation in relation to

the item to be pulled and the threat from secondary devices.




The person conducting the pull is wearing full PPE (visor with/without

helmet and body armour) and is close the ground, ensuring that the PPE is affording the maximum protection possible. This shall only be conducted as a last resort and when there is no alternative protection from blast and fragmentation

g. Once all personnel have retired to the safe area, a hook/clip is attached or the

cable is tied to the item. h. The item is pulled in a slow, continuous movement, avoiding any sharp,

jerking action. A minimum wait-time of 2 minutes is to be allowed before approaching the item.

i. The type of item being pulled shall dictate requirements for extended wait

times. If signs of smoke are seen from the area where the item is located, a wait-time of at least 30 minutes shall be enforced, commencing from the last signs of smoke.

j. After the wait-time has elapsed, the sentries shall remain in position while the

pulled item is checked. k. The check should be a ‘one-man risk’ and shall only be conducted by a

person who is qualified to do so. l. Once the item is identified and made safe, the original position of the item is

then checked as per normal clearance procedures for any sign of UXO or booby-trap devices.

5.23.1. The following shall be considered when conducting the pulling drill:

a. The type of ordnance (e.g., mine, mortar, grenade, projectile, rocket). b. The effects of the ordnance (e.g., blast, fragmentation, incendiary). c. The condition of the ordnance (e.g. fuzed or unfuzed, fired or unfired). d. The explosive quantity of the ordnance. e. Booby traps / secondary devices. f. Proximity of personnel, animals, equipment and buildings.




Figure: 1.5. Pulling Procedure (Example)

5.24. Mine Find

5.24.1. In circumstances while conducting BAC operations a mine is located, the following shall be conducted:

a. Stop and mark the mine. b. The Site Supervisor shall be immediately informed.




c. The Site Supervisor shall ensure that all operations at the Site and any

adjacent Sites have ceased. d. If it is safe to do so, the Site Supervisor shall check the find and on

confirmation that it is a mine, he shall ensure that it is appropriately marked and not disturbed.

e. All personnel should collect their personal equipment and move to a

designated safe area. This is normally the Control Point. f. The Site Supervisor shall ensure that the Organization HQ and the LMAC are

immediately informed. g. BAC operations shall be suspended at the Site pending an investigation by

the LMAC. h. Depending on the circumstances in which the mine was found (e.g. the area is

only surface cleared), it may be necessary to clear a safe passage to its location. In these circumstances mine clearance procedures shall be conducted by pertinent accredited personnel. Prior authorization for clearance shall be requested from the LMAC unless, in the case of an emergency, e.g. a demining accident, it is not viable. In this case, the LMAC shall be informed as soon as possible.

i. In circumstances where it is necessary to conduct manual mine clearance

procedures, the Site Supervisor shall first make a pertinent threat assessment which shall included the type / depth of the mines and the capability of the available assets (e.g. detectors).

5.25. Organization and Responsibilities

5.25.1. The structure of a BAC team and job titles may vary between Demining Organizations and although, the quantity of qualified personnel may differ, there shall be a sufficient amount to conduct safe and effective BAC operations.

5.25.2. The minimum requirement to conduct BAC at one Site is for one person to supervise

the operations at the Working Area, with an additional person with similar ability within 5 minutes of the Working Area. Each person shall be qualified and Accredited in BAC procedures, be able to manage the Site and control the casualty evacuation process if required. In situations where there are two persons capable of supervising at a BAC Site, e.g., Team Leader and Deputy then, if required, one of them may conduct certain BAC procedures, e.g., surface / sub-surface search and investigation, providing that the other person is overseeing the operation. In these circumstances, there is no requirement for an additional supervisor within 5 minutes of the Working Area. Command and control shall be in accordance to 5.26.




5.25.3. Safety Requirements During BAC operations There shall be sufficient operational personnel at the Site in case of an accident. The minimum requirement to facilitate a safe and effective casualty evacuation (CASEVAC) is for one Supervisor and three additional personnel directly involved in the operations (i.e. deminers / searchers) to be situated within 5 minutes of the Working Area.

5.26. Command and Control

5.26.1. It is the responsibility of the Site Supervisor to ensure that there is sufficient command and control during clearance operations.

5.26.2. Command and control may become more problematic particularly in built up areas.

Therefore consideration should be given to the overall task and threat posed, with an appropriate response thought-out. Alternate search methods may need to be employed dependent on the area searched, i.e. open fields, plantations/orchards, or built up areas to ensure all pertinent UXO are reliably located.

5.26.3. The maximum number of personnel conducting clearance operations at the Site

simultaneously and the distance between personnel and units shall be dictated by certain factors including the clearance methodology, threat, the nature of the ground, climatic conditions and the ability of supervisory personnel.

5.26.4. The minimum requirement is that a single qualified person, e.g. Team Leader, may

supervise up to ten (10) personnel conducting BAC operations simultaneously and that he/she shall be positioned at the Working Area during clearance to enable effective monitoring. The maximum distance from the person supervising to working personnel shall be 150 meters. These personnel shall be considered as one unit or team and there shall be a minimum distance of 25 meters between each unit. Where possible, the person supervising should ensure that he/she is in a position to watch all people under his/her responsibility simultaneously however, as a minimum requirement he/she shall observe each person under his/her responsibility at least once during each working shift. The person supervising shall ensure that they are aware of the activities of all personnel under his/her responsibility and that they are working safe and effectively. The working shift shall be a maximum of 60 minutes duration in accordance to 5.31. Any amendments to these figures must be authorized by the LMAC.




N

Figure: 1.6. Command & Control (Example)




5.27. Conclusion of BAC Operations

5.27.1. Prior to the Mine Action Organization unit’s departure after suspending or completing

the Site, the Organization shall inform the LMAC Operations Section and the pertinent Operations Officer who shall conduct a subsequent onsite assessment to confirm that no other clearance is required. During this time any area within the Site that has not been cleared shall be reviewed. If an area is to remain un-cleared then it shall be determined whether the area shall be temporarily or permanently marked, for example, using fencing.

5.28. Individual Items for Destruction

5.28.1. All items considered safe to move may be destroyed at an approved CDS; those items unsafe to move are to be destroyed in-situ. For destruction in-situ adequate precautions are to be taken to prevent unnecessary damage to personnel, property and infrastructure. If required protective works shall be employed.

5.28.2. The LMAC as well as local residents and concerned parties are to be informed that a

demolition shall occur with as much notice as possible. Normal safety measures are to apply including the insertion of a cordon and sentries. Precautions are also to be taken to reduce the risk of fire as a result of demolitions. All concerned parties are to be informed once the demolition has been successfully completed.

5.28.3 When planning demolitions at a clearance Site the Demining Organization shall

request authorization for disposal from the LMAC at least 30 minutes in advance. In circumstances where this may not be possible, e.g. explosive ordnance is located immediately prior to the cessation of daily operations then, the Demining Organization shall inform the LMAC Operations Section of the situation. The LMAC may request that the items are destroyed the same day or authorize for them to remain at the Site overnight.

5.28.4. All located items of UXO remaining at the Site at the cessation of daily operations

shall be accurately marked, reported on the daily work sheet, the weekly progress report and destroyed or removed as soon as possible.

Note: No located UXO shall remain at the Site without approval from the LMAC.

5.28.5. A major factor that should always be considered during the disposal of sub-munitions

is the danger posed by the formation of the jet from the shaped charge. Shaped charge jets have the potential to fly over 1800 m in free air. Therefore every attempt should be made to degrade the performance of this jet. This is usually achieved by placing the donor charge in such a position that it also attacks the integrity of the cone liner. An alternative is to place a robust barrier in front of the sub-munition to degrade the charge.




5.28.6. Close liaison with the local community and any other Organizations working in the

immediate vicinity is to be maintained when conducting demolitions particularly in built up areas.

5.29. Render Safe Procedure (RSP)

5.29.1. If it is necessary to render safe cluster munitions or other items of UXO then, the Demining Organization shall establish pertinent RSP’s. If an Organization is conducting manual neutralization or disarmament of a cluster munition then this procedure is to be clearly explained in a step by step manner incorporating diagrams and/or photographs. The RSP shall only be conducted by suitably EOD qualified personnel who shall wear full PPE (visor and body armour) when conducting a cluster munition RSP. The RSP must be authorized by the LMAC.

5.30. Safety Requirements

The following are the minimum safety requirements for personnel involved in BAC Operations:

5.30.1. Personnel Conducting Non-Intrusive Actions during BAC Operations:

a. PPE: at the discretion of the Site Supervisor. b. Safety Distance between working Deminers: At the discretion of the Site

Supervisor. c. Safety Distance to personnel not involved / not directly involved or personnel

involved who are not wearing the same level of PPE = 100 meters. This may be reduced if personnel are afforded adequate protection in accordance to the Explosive Ordnance hazard, e.g. hard standing building or hill.

5.30.2. Personnel Conducting Intrusive Actions during BAC Operations:

a. PPE: Body Armour and visor. b. Safety Distance to personnel wearing body armour and visor = 25 meters. c. Safety Distance to personnel not involved / not directly involved or personnel

involved who are not wearing the same level of PPE = 100 meters. This may be reduced if personnel are afforded adequate protection in accordance to the Explosive Ordnance hazard, e.g. hard standing building or hill.

Note: The 25 meters safety distance during the excavation procedure may be entered by pertinent personnel wearing full PPE when there is a requirement for closer supervision or for Quality Assurance inspections.




5.31. Daily Work Routine

5.31.1. Prior to the start of the working day, the Site Supervisor or other supervisor staff shall

give a daily brief to the team which shall include the daily clearance plan and safety.

5.31.2. A person conducting BAC shall not work for longer than sixty (60) minutes before taking a break of at least ten (10) minutes. The working time may vary between Organizations and specific situations, e.g., climate (heat, cold, rain) and the terrain (vegetation, mountainous) however, the aforementioned times shall be adhered to. The working time is subject to the Site Supervisor’s judgment.

5.31.3. A normal working day for a person conducting BAC shall not to exceed 7 hours

actual clearance work a day. In excessive climatic conditions, the working hours may be reduced or the daily routine changed.

5.31.4. A safe and sensible approach shall be made by the demining Organization in order

to achieve the best possible clearance results without compromising the safety of demining personnel.

5.31.5. The daily working routine shall be recorded at the Site.

5.32. Recording and Reporting

5.32.1. The location of all discovered cluster munitions and confirmed strike marks are to be recorded for future reference, which shall ensure a more accurate and defined representation of the strike location and facilitate the subsequent Phase 2 clearance. An important consideration for Phase 2 clearance is that once all visible surface cluster munitions are removed during Phase 1, it then becomes very difficult to accurately determine the extent of the cluster strike unless the information is suitably recorded during this Phase 1 clearance.

5.32.2. The minimum requirement for reporting of the completion of Phase 1 clearance is to

return the issued Task Dossier with the additional information as follows:

a. IMSMA Suspension Report accurately filled in detailing the DA number, location, work conducted, explosives used, type and number of items destroyed including a Site sketch depicting the Reference Point, Bench Mark, and Turning Points of the area cleared, the area searched including the general location of the cluster munitions located.

b. All daily logs. c. Accurate UTM of the assessed center of cluster strike (to be annotated in the

Suspension Report). d. Visitor’s log.




e. Internal QC reports. f. Any other information that shall assist the Phase 2 clearance.

5.32.3. Each completed BAC Site shall be subjected to the same recording and reporting

procedures used for minefields. It is essential that the area cleared is marked and accurately recorded.

5.32.4. The minimum requirement for reporting of the completion of Phase 2 clearance is to

return the issued Task Dossier with the additional information as follows:

a. IMSMA Completion Report comprehensively filled out with all required information.

b. The report is to also include a Site sketch depicting the Reference Point, Bench Mark, and Turning Points of the area cleared, including the general locations of the cluster munitions located.

c. All daily logs detailing the DA number, location, work conducted, explosives

used, type and number of items destroyed. d. Visitor’s log. e. Internal QC reports.

Note: During BAC operations the location of cluster munitions shall be marked on the ground and recorded on the Site map and daily worksheet. In addition the type of ordnance, condition and depth located shall be recorded. See Chapter 26 Clearance Site Administration for additional information on recording and reporting.

5.33. Specific Procedures

5.33.1. In the absence of specific BAC procedures within this chapter, e.g. detector search, then reference should be made to Chapter 4: Manual Mine Clearance.

5.34. Internal Quality Assurance (QA) and Quality Control (QC)

5.34.1. This is conducted by the BAC team during operations and it may involve dedicated QA personnel whose primary role is to conduct on-site inspections. These Site visits should be coordinated with the Site Supervisor and shall involve the assessment of personnel, equipment and procedures to ensure safe and effective practices. QA forms shall be completed and the pertinent Site Supervisor informed of the results. The QA personnel may also conduct QC inspections of cleared areas.




5.34.2. Responsibility for QA and QC during BAC Operations: It is the responsibility of the

Site Supervisor to ensure that personnel under his/her command are diligent and conducting safe / effective procedures in accordance to the Organization SOP and NMAS. The Supervisor shall regularly observe the clearance operation, maintain discipline, give advice and correct any mistakes.

5.34.3. Level of QC (inspection of cleared ground): Site Supervisory personnel shall conduct

at least a 10% QC inspection of the cleared area each working day. In circumstances where this is not possible, such as a suspension of daily operations (e.g. deteriorating weather conditions) an explanation shall be recorded in the Site documentation. QC shall be conducted using the same procedures as used during clearance. The area where the QC is conducted should be marked on the ground each day as a visual reference (e.g. for any subsequent internal or external QC) and shall be accurately recorded in the Site documentation on the day that it was conducted.

50 M

Yellow arrows rope moving pattern

Blue arrows search moving pattern

Figure: 1.7. Example of a Battle Area Clearance Box Layout




N




Figure: 1.9. Footprint from M-85 Cluster Strike (Test) 6. REFERENCES



IMAS 09.10 Clearance requirements (Ed.2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 09.11 Battle Area Clearance IMAS 09.30 Technical Note –Clearance of Cluster Munitions Based on experience in Lebanon

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 15 TRAINING & QUALIFICATIONS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 15 TRAINING & QUALIFICATIONS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Qualifications and Experience ........................................................................................ 4 5.3. Training Courses ............................................................................................................ 5 5.4. Refresher Training .......................................................................................................... 7

6. REFERENCES ...................................................................................................................... 7 7. ATTACHMENT ...................................................................................................................... 7




1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to explain the minimum standards for training to be achieved by company personnel and the qualifications required for all Mine Action clearance operations carried out in Lebanon.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This NMAS defines the requirements for the training of demining and medical personnel involved in mine action activities in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Certificate: Is an official document affirming that someone has passed a test or reached a specific standard of knowledge or competency.

3.1.2. Experience: As a general concept comprises knowledge of or skill in or observation of something or some event gained through involvement in or exposure to that thing or event.

3.1.3. Qualification: Professional certification, trade certification, or professional designation, often called simply certification or qualification, is a designation earned by a person to assure that he/she is qualified to perform a job or task.

3.1.4. Syllabus: Is an outline and summary of topics to be covered in a course. A syllabus usually contains specific information about the course, such as information on how, where and when to contact the instructor and teaching assistants; an outline of what will be covered in the course; a schedule of test dates and the due dates for assignments; the grading policy for the course; specific classroom rules; etc.

3.1.5. Technical Standard: Is an established norm or requirement. It is usually a formal document that establishes technical criteria, methods, processes and practices.

3.1.6. Training: Refers to the acquisition of knowledge, skills, and competencies as a result of the teaching of vocational or practical skills and knowledge that relate to specific useful competencies.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the LMAC to maintain and monitor the standards of training and qualifications of each individual employed in Mine Action activities in Lebanon. However, it is the responsibility of the individual clearance program managers to maintain the highest level of competence to enable him/her to carry out their duties.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction 5.1.1. A high standard of training is essential to maintain good management, sound

operational procedures and safety. The LAF does have a national mine/UXO clearance training facility. All mine/UXO clearance and other Organizations related to mine and UXO clearance are responsible to achieve the minimum training standards as outlined in this chapter prior to conducting any actual mine/UXO clearance operations.

5.1.2. All agencies participating in mine/UXO clearance operations in Lebanon are to have

SOP’s approved by the LMAC. Their policy will incorporate all details of this document and address any additional details. The SOP’s will specifically contain information relating to types and schedules of training, responsibilities and resources in the training, and methods of quality assurance designed to evaluate the suitability and effectiveness of the training.

5.1.3. Frequent refresher training and updating will be provided with all above-mentioned

details annotated in the clearance Organizations SOP.

5.2. Qualifications and Experience 5.2.1. International staff or agency employed in mine/UXO clearance operations in Lebanon

must have senior staff members with qualifications and significant experience in mine/UXO clearance operations. They are to be able to train national staff in their area.

5.2.2. It is essential that these specialists are able to conduct the training and support

functions to the standards detailed in NMAS. International staff must be able to satisfy the LMAC that they hold qualifications and experience adequate for their respective position.

5.2.3. All personnel completing the training conducted should be able to perform at the level

as required by the International Mine Action Standards for mine/UXO Clearance Operations.

5.2.4. This is pertinent to all agencies conducting mine/UXO clearance related activities,

including mine clearance, demolitions, EOD, and medical tasks in a mine/UXO clearance environment.




5.2.5. Due to the numerous types and levels of demining related courses and qualifications

conducted internationally all personnel to be accredited within Lebanon will be assessed by the LMAC as being suitability qualified and experienced to conduct the activity that he/she is being accredited for. All personnel must provide a detailed Curriculum Vitae (CV) detailing humanitarian demining experience and appropriate qualifications to the LMAC prior to deployment to Lebanon. Once the LMAC has viewed the CV, approval will be given if the nominated person is suitably qualified to conduct mine clearance operations in Lebanon. Personnel should not deploy to Lebanon without first gaining approval.

5.3. Training Courses 5.3.1. The majority of courses necessary for mine/UXO clearance at the various practical

and management levels are well known and the curriculum is generally similar for most agencies, depending on the approach to mine/UXO clearance of the particular agency. These requirements will be based on the UN Humanitarian Standards for Mine Clearance Operations. The course syllabus may be modified to include specialized training specific to that agency. All personnel should be given certificates of achievement or qualification on successfully completing the course or after a suitable probationary period.

5.3.2. Survey Training Courses: The Surveying Training must include basic and advanced

mine/UXO clearance, map reading and land navigation, surveying techniques. Manual operation of surveying equipment will be taught even if automatic / computerized surveying equipment is used and taught. EOD courses are recommended but not required for Surveyors.

5.3.3. Team Leader Training: All future instructors and designated Team Leaders and

Supervisors will receive instruction in Basic Leadership, Instruction techniques, and Supervisor roles and responsibilities. All personnel in a Team Leader or Supervisor role will attend a Basic mine/UXO clearance Course and a Basic First Aid Course.

5.3.4. Mine/UXO Clearance Training: There are several types of mine/UXO clearance

courses, including Basic, Advanced and Supervisor. The Basic mine/UXO clearance Course must be the minimum required for all personnel involved in mine/UXO clearance activities.

1. The Basic Mine/UXO Clearance Course: A basic course will involve sub-topics including: Mine Orientation and Identification, Using Mine Detectors, Probing and Trip Wire Detection, Vegetation Clearing, House clearance procedure, Battle Area Clearance (BAC), Mine Marking and basic First Aid.

2. The Advanced Mine/UXO Clearance Course: An advanced course will

reinforce all of the Basic Mine/UXO clearance sub-topics and include Render-Safe Procedures and Basic Demolitions.




3. The Supervisor Mine/UXO Clearance Course: A supervisor’s course will

reinforce all Basic and Advanced Mine/UXO clearance topics and include Minefield Supervisory Techniques.

5.3.5. Explosive Ordnance Disposal Training Courses: There are three recommended

course levels for EOD, as well as a refresher course.

1. The EOD Basic Course: The basic course syllabus should concentrate on basic demolition procedures for the destruction of those mines and munitions, which can be disposed of easily and safely.

2. The EOD Advanced Course: The second level should develop EOD expertise

and skill based on the need to train team leaders and supervisors to undertake this activity without external assistance and to be able to tackle larger and more complex disposal tasks.

3. The EOD Specialist Course: The third level is the EOD specialist course.

These should only be taught at a Specialist facility such as an International EOD establishment sponsored by the UN. This training would be beneficial in order to conduct bulk demolitions and extreme EOD tasks.

4. The EOD Refresher Course: Refresher courses should be arranged to train

EOD operators on specialized demolition methods and to teach new techniques based on new material or equipment.

5.3.6. Medical Training Courses: Trained medical support is required on site should a medical emergency occur. Medical personnel should be registered with the local health authority. Two levels of training will be used under the following terms, qualifications and training standards:

1. Basic First Aid Training: Basic First Aid Training is a requirement for all

field personnel. Mine/UXO clearance operators, surveyors, drivers, and any management staff involved in the field operations are all required to attend Basic First Aid Training provided by the Mine/UXO clearance Organization. This course is recommended for all staff. A first aid course consists of at least 20 hours of medical training. Regular (at a minimum - biannual) refresher courses should be included in the agency’s mission schedule (as submitted in their SOP) as well as forming a part of their routine activities. As a minimum, the course will provide basic life and limb saving procedures including Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR), Management of Bleeding, Splitting Fractures, Immediate Patient Assessment, and Patient Transport Techniques.




2. Paramedic Training: After attending the Basic First Aid Training Course,

personnel designated to be the First Line Medical Technician (one per site) will be required to attend Paramedical Training. Topics taught will include Advanced Life and Limb Saving Skills, Triage, and Long Term Patient Management. Paramedics are also trained to provide trauma treatment, to run a clinic, provide basic medical attention and provide medical advice on sanitation, hygiene and the prevention of diseases. Paramedics will undergo training Mine/UXO clearance teams so they have a full understanding of the work and be able to fulfill their roles effectively should an accident occur.

5.4. Refresher Training

5.4.1. Refresher training aims to develop personnel to acquire new horizons, technologies, or viewpoints by introducing new skill sets, updating and/or maintaining high levels of professionalism. It is learning for the growth of individuals, building team confidence and creating better results, and organization efficiency. This type of training can be used on a regular basis to guide leaders after periods of absence from operations or when there are signs that competent levels have dropped. These signs may be identified through routine monitoring and inspection or as a result of an incident.

Note: If stand down periods exceed more than two weeks, mandatory refresher training will be conducted.

6. REFERENCES



IMAS 06.10 Management of Training (Ed.1 Amendment 1) 7. ATTACHMENT

None

CHAPTER 16 INVESTIGATION OF MINE/UXO ACCIDENTS &

SERIOUS INCIDENTS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 16 INVESTIGATIION OF MINE/UXO ACCIDENTS & SERIOUS INCIDENTS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Initial Reporting of Incidents and Accidents .................................................................... 4 5.3. The format for the initial casualty report is attached at (Appendix A) to this chapter. ..... 5 5.4. Locating AXO, Weapons, Human Remains .................................................................... 5 5.5. Follow up Reporting of Incidents and Accidents ............................................................. 5 5.6. Incident and Accident Investigations ............................................................................... 6 5.7. Incident/Accident Investigation Report Findings ............................................................. 9 5.8. Post-Demining Incident/Accident Procedures ............................................................... 10 5.9. Suspension or Termination of Operational Accreditation Post Incident/Accident ......... 10





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that the response to any emergency is appropriate, effective and timely.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All Mine Action operations. 3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Mine Accident: A Mine Accident is defined as “An undesired event, which results in

harm away from a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard”. Normally accidents involving civilians are classified as this.

3.1.2. Demining Mine Accident: A Demining Mine Accident is defined as “An undesired

event, which results in harm at a demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard”.

3.1.3. Mine Incident: A Mine Incident is defined as “An event that gives rise to an accident,

or has the potential to lead to an accident away from a demining workplace”. The following events are classed as a mine incident and will be investigated in the same way as a mine accident, as detailed below:

a. Death or injury to non-mine/UXO clearance Organization personnel caused by

mine/UXO clearance activity, from either a planned or unplanned explosion or demolition.

b. Damage to public or private property caused during mine/UXO clearance

operations. c. All unplanned explosions on or near, current mine/UXO clearance sites. d. The location of a mine/UXO in a previously cleared and documented area. e. The theft or loss of explosives. f. All other events that have the potential to cause death, injury or damage.

3.1.4. Demining Mine Incident: A Demining Mine Incident is defined as “An event that gives

rise to an accident, or has the potential to lead to an accident at the demining workplace”




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that Clearance Operations remain comprehensive, appropriate and in accordance with National Mine Action Standards, and that all staff are familiar with their involvement in any Clearance Operations, that all records and reports are completed correctly.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Some Components of Mine Action will have inherent dangers and there is the potential for accidents to occur. It is the responsibility of mine action managers at all levels to ensure that this potential is reduced to the lowest realistic level. This is done by the good management and supervision of demining operations.

5.1.2. Despite this, demining accidents still occur. When they happen, the speedy

evacuation and treatment of the casualties is the first priority. The second is to determine how and why the accident occurred in order to minimize the chance of a similar accident occurring in future. It is a management responsibility to ensure a thorough investigation into the accident is conducted as soon as practicable. This management responsibility also applies to incidents that may have led to accidents.

5.1.3. The thorough investigation of accidents and incidents, and the promulgation of the

findings of these investigations, provide information that contributes to improvement to the quality of demining and reduces the likelihood of future demining accidents.

5.2. Initial Reporting of Incidents and Accidents

5.2.1. All mine/UXO incidents / accidents are to be reported to the LMAC. An initial “Casualty” report is to be made via VHF radio or telephone as soon as is feasible, but within 30 minutes of the accident occurring. The details required are as follows:

a. Time of accident.

b. Location of Accident. (Eight (8) fig grid (UTM and Task/MF Number).

c. Type of Accident. (Brief description of what happened)

d. Number of Casualties.

e. Surname, Callsign and nationality of injured.

f. Type of Injuries.

g. Receiving Hospital.




h. Time of Evacuation.

i. Other assistance required.

j. Contact person and phone number within Organization.

5.3. The format for the initial casualty report is attached at (Appendix A) to this chapter.

5.4. Locating AXO, Weapons, Human Remains

5.4.1. Although the locating of Abandoned Explosive Ordnance (AXO), weapons, military equipment or human remains is not an incident in terms of Mine Action, these items are very sensitive in the context of Lebanon. Therefore in order to avoid unnecessary problems with concerned National Authorities, whenever AXO, weapons, military equipment or human remains are located on a clearance site these are to be reported without delay to the LMAC. These items are to remain untouched on site pending an investigation from the relevant authorities.

5.4.2. In the event the clearance team has to leave the site at the end of a day’s operation

and the relevant authority has yet to visit the site this is to be communicated to the LMAC representative and further direction in regard to the located items will be given.

5.4.3. This does not include mines or UXO located on site as part of normal clearance

operations. These are to be dealt with as part of established standard procedures.

5.5. Follow up Reporting of Incidents and Accidents

5.5.1. Upon receipt of this initial casualty report LMAC Operations will continue to monitor the situation and to provide support where required. As soon as the casualty is successfully transferred to a hospital and is in suitable medical care, a more detailed verbal report is to be made. This is generally to be made via telephone and is to include the following:

5.5.2. Confirmation of the details paragraph 5.2.1.a to j, above.

5.5.3. Confirmation that all other related mine/UXO clearance sites are shut down and that

the scene of the accident is secure as possible, pending the arrival of the Board of Inquiry Investigation Team.

5.5.4. Arrangement and confirmation of a date/time/place to RV with the BOI Team to

commence the Board of Inquiry investigation. This is to be as soon as practically possible after the incident or accident; but is to be no later than the following day.




5.5.5. The following activity is to take place as soon as is realistically possible by both the

Clearance Organization Investigation Team and the LMAC BOI Team:

a. Photographs of the scene of the accident if safe to do so. If not, the necessary action to make it safe is to take place. Sketches and relevant measurements shall also be included.

b. Written statements from all witnesses to the incident or accident, including the

casualty (taken once casualty is considered capable).

c. Completion of the IMSMA Incident/Accident and Casualty Reports form for submission to the BOI Team Leader.

d. Written report from the clearance Organization containing the following:

1. Events leading up to the accident.

2. Description of the accident.

3. Probable cause of the accident.

4. Immediate action taken following the accident.

5. Medical treatment and CASEVAC procedure.

6. Hand written and signed individual statements from all witnesses.

(These maybe translated and typed but must be signed by the witness)

7. Conclusions.

8. Intended follow-up action and recommendations.

e. This written report is to be made available to the LMAC BOI Team Leader and will form part of the official Board of Inquiry investigation report. It is to be available in all cases no later than 5 days following the accident. If an extension to this time is required due to extenuating circumstances then the BOI Team Leader is to be advised as soon as possible.

5.6. Incident and Accident Investigations

5.6.1. Upon notification of a mine/UXO incident / accident, the LMAC Director will immediately convene an official Board of Inquiry to investigate the circumstances and cause of the accident and to identify and distribute any lessons learnt to avoid a repeat occurrence. This may be delegated to an RMAC Program manager depending on the geographical location of the incident/accident. The Board of Inquiry will normally be chaired by the LMAC QA Officer and will include the following personnel:




a. LAF QA Officer.

b. Representative from the mine/UXO clearance Organization involved.

And may include the following personnel:

a. MDD QA Officer (if MDD involved).

b. Such outside specialists that may be deemed necessary by the LMAC Director or BOI.

5.6.2. The Lebanese Judiciary Authorities reserve the right to investigate all mine/UXO

accidents and serious incidents that occur within Lebanese Territory, especially those that result in casualties.

5.6.3. All incident and accident investigations are to be carried out by the Clearance

Organization and Local Authority Board of Inquiry (BOI) Team from designated safe areas or well defined cleared safe lanes. No personnel are to enter into areas that have not been cleared and marked according to NMAS or Organization SOP’s.

5.6.4. Any incidents or accidents on areas of land that have been formally handed over to

the land Owner or local representative are to have access lanes cleared to the site from a designated safe area before the investigation team approaches the specific site or seat of detonation.

5.6.5. The aim of the Board of Inquiry investigation is to establish the facts and to make

deductions from them. To ascertain the cause of the accident and to make recommendations that may be implemented upon the instructions of the LMAC to prevent any similar re-occurrence.

5.6.6. The Board of Inquiry investigation report will be presented to the LMAC Operations,

Chief of RMAC and LMAC Director for their comments within a 10 days time period from the time of the accident. This time period may be extended if necessary with authorization by the Chief of RMAC/LMAC Director. It will be signed, bound and produced as four copies for distribution as follows:

a. 1 x copy for the LMAC.

b. 1 x copy for the LMAC QA Section.

c. 1 x copy for the clearance Organization, in country, Programme Manager.

d. 1 x copy for the clearance Organization headquarters out of country.




5.6.7. As a minimum, the Board of Inquiry investigation report is to contain the following information:

a. Introduction. b. Sequence Documentation and Procedures of Tasking. c. Geography and Weather.

d. Site Layout and Marking. e. Management, Supervision and Discipline on site. f. Quality Assurance and Quality Control. g. Communications and Reporting. h. Medical, including injuries sustained. i. Personnel, Team Number and Witness Statements. j. Equipment and Tools. k. Details of the Mine/UXO involved. l. Evidence of re-mining. m. Dress and Personal Protective Equipment. n. Use of Dogs. o. Use of Machines. p. Particulars of Deminers Insurance. q. Detailed account of the activities on the day of the accident. r. Summary. s. Conclusion. t. Clear recommendations to prevent reoccurrence. u. In addition to the above information the Final Report should contain the

following Appendices as a minimum. Additional Appendices can be added as required by the BOI. See Appendix Below.




1. Appendix A: Initial Casualty Report. 2. Appendix B: All relevant visual evidence. 3. Appendix C: Schedule of resultant damage. 4. Appendix D: All relevant documentation including statements. 5. Appendix E: All Medical Reports.

5.7. Incident/Accident Investigation Report Findings

5.7.1. Once the Board of Inquiry investigation report is prepared and signed the Programme Manager of the Clearance Organization is to be given the opportunity to read and discuss its contents. This is to be conducted in a formal environment with the following personnel in attendance:

a. LMAC Director or RMAC Programme Manager. b. LMAC Operations Officer. c. LMAC QA Officer (author of the report). d. MDD / medical specialists if applicable. e. Clearance Organization Programme Manager. f. Other personnel as identified by the Clearance Organization Programme

Manager e.g. Operations Manager or QA Officer.

5.7.2. Should the clearance Organization Programme Manager wish to have any additional comments included in the report he is to submit them in writing and they shall be inserted into the report prior to distribution.

5.7.3. The Programme Manager of the clearance Organization is to ensure that all

recommendations are implemented without delay. The LMAC QA Officer is to ensure that a summary of such lessons learnt is distributed to all clearance Organizations as soon as possible and that a consolidated and updated version is distributed every 3 months.




5.8. Post-Demining Incident/Accident Procedures

5.8.1. Clearance Organizations are to stand down the clearance asset immediately pending

a demining incident/accident and conduct refresher training to rectify the immediate known cause of the incident/accident. Retraining is to be for a minimum of one working day after the incident/accident.

This period maybe increased at the discretion of the LMAC Operations Section depending on the severity and nature of the incident/accident.

5.8.2. Any such retraining conducted will require an on-site Special Monitoring Quality

Assurance visit by the LMAC QA Section to validate implementation of techniques or procedures to prevent or fix the primary cause of the incident or accident.

5.8.3. Once retraining is completed then Special Monitoring will continue of the clearance

asset involved in the incident / accident until such time as dictated by the LMAC.

5.9. Suspension or Termination of Operational Accreditation Post Incident/Accident

5.9.1. Depending on the findings of the incident/accident investigation and subsequent

recommendations it is possible that the LMAC deems a suspension or termination of the clearance Organizations operational accreditation for the clearance asset directly involved in the incident or accident necessary.

5.9.2. The LMAC following the incident/accident if gross negligence is evident prior to the

completion of the BOI Final Incident/Accident Report can apply suspension of operational accreditation immediately.

5.9.3. Suspension or termination can involve the following:

a. Individual: If individual person/s is found to be negligent then his/her

operational accreditation maybe suspended or terminated. Suspension will be for a specified timeframe to be set by the LMAC. If the individual fails to rectify the problems leading to his/her suspension in the required time frame then their operational accreditation maybe terminated.

b. Clearance Asset: Individual clearance assets may be suspended or have their

operational accreditation terminated by the LMAC depending on the findings of the BOI. Suspension will be for a specified timeframe to be set by the LMAC. If the clearance asset fails to rectify the problems leading to its suspension in the required time frame then their operational accreditation may be terminated.

c. Organization: The Clearance Organization may be suspended or have their

operational accreditation terminated by the LMAC if gross negligence is ascertained as a result of the BOI investigation.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.60 Reporting and investigation of Demining Incidents (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 17 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR

MINE ACTION (IMSMA)



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 17 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR MINE ACTION (IMSMA)


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3 5.2. IMSMA Data Entry Workflow .......................................................................................... 4 5.3. Forms and Reports ......................................................................................................... 4 5.4. Definition of Forms and Reports ..................................................................................... 5





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that IMSMA involves the collection, recording, reporting, collation, analysis, use, dissemination and maintenance of information. It covers all phases and components of mine action throughout the life of a programme.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This National Mine Action Standard establishes principles and provides guidance for the effective management of information in demining operations in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. The Information Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA): This is the United

Nation's preferred information system for the management of critical data in UN-supported field programmes and at the UN headquarters in New York. IMSMA consists, essentially, of two modules: the Field Module (FM) and Global Module (GM). The FM provides for data collection, information analysis and project management. It is used by the staff of the LMAC at national and regional level, and by the implementers of mine action projects - such as demining organizations. The GM refines and collates data from IMSMA FMs (and other field-based information systems) and provides the LMAC and others with accurate, aggregated information for the strategic management of mine action.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all data collection, recording, reporting, collation, analysis, is implemented in accordance with this chapter.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction The LMAC as the primary information management tool will use the Information

Management System for Mine Action (IMSMA). It is essential that clear and concise information, projected tasks, past performance assist in improving the efficiency of the programme.




5.2. IMSMA Data Entry Workflow

5.2.1. Before entry into IMSMA, the report must be physically received by the LMAC

Information Section, and should be reviewed to ensure that it is complete and suitable for entry into the IMSMA FM. The Information Section will implement a report control process whereby the report is logged into the system.

5.2.2. In all cases it is necessary to confirm that the report has not previously been entered

into the database. For some types of reports, it is also necessary to determine if other reports in the information system are related to this report. For example, Clearance reports should be related to their corresponding cleared minefields. This cross checking is of critical importance to the consistency of the database, and must be performed by a skilled operator who understands both the mine action process and the IMSMA FM environment.

5.2.3. The next step is the actual data entry. For reports received in the IMSMA format, this

is a fairly straight forward process. To assist in locating the correct field on the IMSMA FM forms for data entry, the numbers found on the MS Word reports correspond to the numbers found in the IMSMA FM tool tips.

5.2.4. If a format other than the IMSMA format is used in the field, the data collected must

be transposed into the IMSMA report fields. It is extremely important that this is done in a consistent manner.

5.2.5. It is a good practice for the data collection supervisor to maintain a data entry guide

for each report format, describing how information will be entered for each field. Consistent data entry is the key to maintaining a high quality database.

5.2.6. The final step is quality review of the data entry step. The LMAC Information Officer

should confirm that the data entered into the IMSMA FM forms conforms to the information recorded on the report from the field, and that data entry is consistent with the internal LMAC procedures.

5.2.7. The IMSMA GIS can be used at this point to confirm graphically, that fields such as

geographic coordinates and nearest town were entered correctly. Saving the form and then updating the GIS view can confirm the accuracy of the coordinate data entered into the form.

5.3. Forms and Reports

5.3.1. The following forms and IMSMA reports form the basis of ensuring that the correct data is received for database input:

a. Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate (ANNEX A). b. IMSMA Survey Reports. Level 1 and Level 2 (ANNEX B). c. IMSMA Suspension and Completion Reports (ANNEX C).




d. IMSMA Dangerous Area Report (ANNEX D). e. IMSMA Mine Accident Report (ANNEX E). f. IMSMA Mine Incident Report (ANNEX E). g. IMSMA Demining Accident Report (ANNEX E). h. IMSMA Demining Incident Report (ANNEX E). i. IMSMA Data Request Form (ANNEX F). j. Weekly Summary Report (ANNEX G1). k. Monthly Summary Report (ANNEX G2). l. IMSMA Casualty and Victim Reports (ANNEX K). m. IMSMA Community Liaison Dangerous Area Report (ANNEX P).

n. IMSMA Town Data Report (ANNEX V). o. IMSMA MRE Activity Report (ANNEX W).

5.4. Definition of Forms and Reports

Following is an explanation on the individual forms and reports used by LMAC.

5.4.1. Handover and Formal Declaration Certificate: This form is used as the formal handover and certificate for all cleared areas within Lebanon; it is a declaration from the Mine Action clearance organizations and the LAF that the area has been cleared to the required standard. The LMAC Director will then sign acknowledging that he accepts responsibility as the national authority of the cleared area on behalf of the Lebanese people.

5.4.2. IMSMA Survey Report – Level 1 (Impact Survey): The Level 1 Survey report fully

supports the information content of an Impact Survey conducted following the IMAS. The objective of an Impact Survey is to collect information on the general location of mined areas. Information is collected about the areas affected by mines or UXO and the socio-economic impact on the people living in the immediate surroundings.

5.4.3. IMSMA Survey Report – Level 2 (Technical Survey): The objective of a Level 2

Survey is to determine the perimeter of a mined area that has been identified by an Impact Survey or recorded as a Dangerous Area. The marked perimeter of the minefield forms the area for future mine clearance operations. In the IMSMA FM the Level 2 Survey form contains general information about the survey task and groups together minefield records collected during the task. The technical content of the Survey is recorded using the Minefield form. The Level 2 Survey form stores cross




references to Impact Survey mined areas. Level 2 Surveys are not referenced by other reports.

5.4.4. IMSMA Suspension or Completion Reports (IMSMA Clearance Report) The Suspension or Completion Report also called the IMSMA Clearance report is used to record all parameters of cleared or un-cleared areas on a mine clearance site.

A Suspension report will be submitted if the clearance site is not completed

and is suspended for some operational or other reason. Any clearance work conducted prior to the suspension of operations is to be accurately recorded into IMSMA to allow future mine clearance to continue when circumstances permit.

A Completion report is submitted for every cleared area, this report records

accurately all cleared area parameters and clearance conducted on site. Each completion form should be linked to its corresponding minefield. Only one minefield can be linked to a corresponding completion.

5.4.5. IMSMA Dangerous Area Report: Dangerous Area reports are included in the IMSMA

FM to allow for the storage of information that does not conform to the standard categories of Mine Action Survey as defined in the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS). The DA form is used to record hazardous areas that cannot be classified as minefields. These could range from former Israeli/SLA positions, Booby Traps, Cluster strikes areas to various UXO contaminated areas. Recently Pre and Post clearance assessment sections were added to this form to track and analyze land usage change of the cleared areas following the ongoing clearance activities.

5.4.6. IMSMA Minefield Report: The Minefield report is usually related to a Technical

Survey. The Minefield form stores cross references to a Technical Survey. Minefield forms are used to record data on known minefields with accurate information on the corresponding benchmark, perimeter points, field data, and suspected devices. Recently Pre and Post clearance assessment sections were added to this form to track and analyze land usage change of the cleared areas following the ongoing clearance activities.

5.4.7. IMSMA Mine Accident Report: The Mine Accident Report is used to record

information on mine/UXO accidents involving civilians in a known or unknown minefield or dangerous area. The Mine Accident Report format conforms to World Health Organization specifications. The IMSMA Victim Incident report is used to record information on the victim(s) who suffered injury as a result of such an accident.

5.4.8. IMSMA Mine Incident Report: The Mine Incident report is used to record information

on an incident that occurs away from the demining workplace involving a mine or UXO hazard.




5.4.9. IMSMA Demining Accident Report The Demining Accident report is intended for

demining operation related accidents. It is used to record information on accidents encountering individuals (usually deminers) while performing clearance or survey operations in a known minefield or dangerous area.

5.4.10. The IMSMA Casualty Accident report is used to record information on the victim(s) who suffered injury as a result of such an accident.

5.4.11. IMSMA Demining Incident Report: The Demining Incident report is intended for

demining operation related incidents not involving injury.

5.4.12. IMSMA Casualty Reports Casualty reports are used as detailed in paragraphs 5.4.7. and 5.4.9. above.

5.4.13. IMSMA Community Liaison Dangerous Area Report: This report is a simplified

version of the IMSMA Dangerous Area report and was modified specifically to be used by the LMAC Community Liaison Team members.

5.4.14. IMSMA Town Data Report: The town data report is essential for collecting socio-

economic, demographic, and reference information that forms the core of the IMSMA pre requisite information for the data entry of the various forms. Town data is essential for priority setting and impact scoring in the Impact survey module and form the core of the whole data entry process and should take place at the earliest stage of this process.

All the IMSMA data with location requirements for storage, retrieval and display on the GIS should be referenced to a corresponding nearest town.

5.4.15. IMSMA MRE Activity Report: The Mine Risk Education Activity report, formerly

referred to as Mine Awareness or Mine Avoidance Education, is a tool for managing and coordinating MRE activities. It may be used for reporting, tracking, and prioritizing MRE activities, and will mostly be used by specialized MRE teams. Together with victim data collected prior to and following MRE activities, it is possible to measure the success of MRE. The MRE form is new in V3.0. Previously, information about MRE was collected within both the Impact Survey report and the Minefield report.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 05.10 Information Management Chapter still under development. 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 18 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT


NATIONALMINE ACTION STANDARDS ISS: 1 REV: 1 Page: 1 of 9

SUBJECT: CHAPTER 18 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. General Constraints for Watercourses and Groundwater ............................................... 4 5.3. Vegetation Clearance ..................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Temporary Support Facilities .......................................................................................... 5 5.5. Transport of Materials and Supplies ............................................................................... 7 5.6. Operation and Servicing of Vehicles and Equipment ...................................................... 7 5.7. Toxic or Hazardous Materials ......................................................................................... 8 5.8. Protection of Livestock and Wildlife ................................................................................ 8 5.9. Cultural Resources ......................................................................................................... 9 5.10. Environmental Awareness of Mine/UXO Clearance Personnel ................................... 9





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to provide awareness of the impact that demining activity has on the local environment.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This chapter details the minimum requirements for environmental management during Mine Action clearance operations in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Definition of Environment: Environment means any organic and inorganic feature,

existing naturally or created by mankind and surroundings such as people, animals, plants and others, and the positive and negative interactions and impacts between them, either restrictive or favourable for human and natural life.”“Environment includes soil, water, forests, plants, animals, bacteria, mountains, rocks, minerals, air, which constitute the ecosystem; archaeological artifacts, historical heritage, urban and rural settlements, buildings, vibrations, radiation, colours and odours that created by humans are important elements of the environment.

3.1.2. Environmental factors: Factors relating to the environment and that influence the

transportation of scent from the mine, the detection of the target scent or the ability of people and dogs to work safety and effectively. (I.e. Wind, rain, temperature, humidity, altitude, sun and vegetation). (Definition for Mine Detection Dog use only).

3.1.3. Hazardous area: Contaminated area.

3.1.4. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): A worldwide federation of

national bodies from over 130 countries. Its work results in international agreements, which are published as ISO standards and guides. ISO is a NGO and the standards it develops are voluntary, although some (mainly those concerned with health, safety and environmental aspects) have been adopted by many countries as part of their regulatory framework. ISO deals with the full spectrum of human activities and many of the tasks and processes, which contribute to mine action, have a relevant standard. A list of ISO standards and guides is given in the ISO Catalogue.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. As a minimum land used for Mine Action clearance operations, including the surrounding environment, should be left for the local communities in a similar condition to what it was before clearance operations commenced. In order to ensure this occurs there are certain procedures for environmental management that must be complied with by Mine Action clearance Organizations operating in Lebanon.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The following chapter is for environmental management and applies to the clearance of land mines/UXO. The locating of mines/UXO may be preceded by the clearance of vegetation by hand or burning. Locating is normally carried out with metal detectors and/or dogs. Where the terrain is suitable, mechanical clearance techniques may be used to destroy mines, or to verify the absence of mines. Some mines can be safely removed from the ground by hand, manually neutralized and the explosives removed and detonated later. The mine casings are then bagged with other mine debris, removed, and burned. All these activities are closely governed by the approved SOP’s, which rightfully emphasize total safety for the clearance personnel above all else.

5.1.2. High personnel safety is the prime concern, but with some care and attention

mine/UXO clearance activities can also be carried out in ways that do not unduly cause environmental pollution or degradation, especially with respect to:

a. Surface and groundwater quality. b. Identified sensitive areas. c. Fish, wildlife and their habitat. d. Vegetation (including riparian plant communities). e. Soil conservation and erosion control, and f. Archaeological, heritage, and cultural resources.

5.2. General Constraints for Watercourses and Groundwater

5.2.1. In general, all mine/UXO clearance activities, including the establishment and operation of temporary facilities (field camps) will be undertaken in a manner that avoids or minimizes erosion and the discharge of silt into any watercourse (river, stream, lake, pond etc). No obstruction or debris will be placed in any watercourse during operations. Should any material be inadvertently placed within the normal high water wetted perimeter of a watercourse, it should be removed immediately.




5.2.2. All activities within the wetted perimeter of any watercourse will be kept to an

absolute minimum. Where such activities are unavoidable, they will be carried out as quickly as possible and, if known, outside environmentally sensitive periods (fish migration and spawning periods).

5.2.3. All organic matter, refuse, ash, petroleum products and other hazardous materials

will be placed and/or disposed of in a manner not to pollute any watercourse or groundwater. The placement and disposal of all such products and materials will only be done in an environmentally acceptable manner.

5.2.4. Any organic, inorganic, or waste material that is inadvertently dumped in or adjacent

to watercourses or other environmentally sensitive areas will be removed and disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner.

5.3. Vegetation Clearance

5.3.1. When areas must be burned to remove vegetation before mine/UXO clearance activities, burn plans will be discussed with and approved by the land owners/users and local authorities.

5.3.2. The burn area is to be surrounded by safe ground (established safe lanes, roads)

from which fire monitoring, fire control and, if necessary fire suppression can be safely undertaken. Where the fire perimeter is vegetated, the vegetation should be wetted down before the burn is actually started. Wherever possible, the direction of burn should be towards the most secure and substantial firebreak. Wind and moisture conditions should be taken into account to ensure that no burn is started, which may get out of control. No burn will be permitted to continue overnight; that is, burns will be only started and completed within the same day.

5.3.3. Wherever possible all burning will be started by igniting dry vegetation. If necessary,

diesel fuel or other fire accelerants may be sprayed or dripped onto vegetation. However, this should only be enough to get the fire ignited.

5.3.4. No burn will be started unless there is sufficient personnel and equipment on-site to

monitor, control, and, if necessary, suppress the burn from all parts of its perimeter. Fire safe areas and escape routes should be established. There will be sufficient fire control equipment on-site (shovels, pack water pumps, foam fire extinguishers, stand-by water tank(s) and hose(s)) to ensure that personnel are able to immediately suppress any unplanned burning.

5.3.5. All personnel involved in the burn should be thoroughly briefed on the burn plan,

including safety procedures and burn monitoring, control, and suppression plans.

5.4. Temporary Support Facilities

5.4.1. In general, temporary facilities should be located to ensure the safe: provision of drinking water, disposal of human excreta, wastewater and garbage; control of




insects and rodents; conduct of food handling and preparation; and drainage of the site. The facilities should also be located in consultation with local community leaders to ensure that they do not affect local economic activities and social and cultural values.

5.4.2. The preservation of trees, shrubs, ground cover, fish, and wildlife will be considered

in site selection and construction of temporary support facilities. Existing access roads and sites previously used for similar purposes will be preferred.

5.4.3. Sites should be stable, well drained and, if necessary, have sufficient soil depth to

permit the digging of latrines, wastewater soak-away pits, and garbage pits. All local health and pollution control practices, laws, ordinances and regulations will be adhered to.

5.4.4. Water supplies, will be arranged as to avoid disrupting local supplies to nearby land

users/owners and communities.

5.4.5. Solid waste, containers should be large enough to accommodate all waste generated between collection periods. The containers should be constructed to contain spilled liquids and prevent access by insects and animals, especially rodents. There should be enough containers to permit the separation of combustible and other waste.

5.4.6. Waste, should be transported away for recycling or disposal at approved dumping

sites on a regular basis. The necessary precautions should be taken to prevent any loss of waste materials during transport on public highways and roads. Any materials or litter deposited along access routes will be cleaned up.

5.4.7. If waste is to be disposed of on-site, combustible solid wastes should be burned on a

regular basis in a container or pit, and then the residue disposed of in a pit. Residual ashes should be covered with soil after each burning/deposition. Burial pits for other solid waste should be located well away from watercourses and the bottom of the pit will be at least 2 m above the water table.

5.4.8. Toxic or hazardous wastes, will not be buried on-site, but collected and removed to

an approved disposal area. This is to include any razor wire / barbed wire removed from clearance sites.

5.4.9. Human waste will not be discharged into watercourses or on the soil surface.

5.4.10. Where possible, temporary toilets should be used that are equipped with (1) holding

tanks that can be pumped to sewage tanker trucks for disposal at an approved site, or (2) septic tanks and safe drainage.

5.4.11. Where latrines, must be used, there will be at least one for every 20 persons. They

will be located at least 6 m from any accommodation or food preparation area, at least 15 m from watercourses, wells or other drinking-water sources. Shallow trench latrines should be constructed be 30 cm x 75 cm x 1.5 m deep. All latrines should be limed on a regular basis.




5.4.12. Excess water, from washing, bathing, and kitchen areas should be drained to soak-away pits. It will not be permitted to enter watercourses or latrines.

5.4.13. Soak-away pits, will of sufficient number and size to readily accommodate the

volumes of wastewater generated. Each pit will be at least 75 cm x 75 cm x 1 m deep, and at least 50 cm above the water table. They will be covered with hessian, secured around the edges to catch solid materials, and lined with gravel and rocks. They should be treated regularly with disinfectant.

5.4.14. Upon completion of mine/UXO clearance activities, all temporary support facilities

and camp infrastructure, including buildings, equipment, lumber, refuse, surplus materials, fencing and other such items should be completely removed. Latrines, wastewater soak-away pits, and garbage disposal pits will be filled and covered with soil, and the surface stabilized to prevent erosion and allow natural re-vegetation. As far, as is practicable, all disturbed areas should be restored to their original condition.

5.5. Transport of Materials and Supplies

5.5.1. Suitable equipment and containers will be used to safely transport petroleum products, toxic and hazardous materials both on and off road. The necessary precautions should be taken to prevent the loss of these materials during transport on public highways, roads and access roads.

5.6. Operation and Servicing of Vehicles and Equipment

5.6.1. Fuel Storage and Handling

a. Establishing and operating temporary fuel storage facilities in the field should be avoided.

b. Where temporary fuel storage in the field is unavoidable, the storage facilities

should not be located within 30 m of a watercourse, within a watercourse flood plain, or where there is a potential for any spilled fuel to enter a watercourse or groundwater.

c. All storage tanks containers and related equipment should be regularly

maintained to ensure the safe storage and dispensing of fuel. Defective hoses valves and containment structures should be promptly repaired.

d. Vehicle and equipment fuelling should be undertaken on a hard surface or

over drip pans to ensure that any spilled fuel is contained.

5.6.2. Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance and Repair

a. Wherever possible, vehicle and equipment maintenance and repair should be conducted at permanent facilities set up and operated for those purposes, and




not at temporary field sites.

b. The maintenance, repair, and washing of vehicles and equipment within the

wetted perimeter of watercourses are prohibited. c. If vehicles or equipment must be serviced or repaired in the field, the

generated refuse (air and oil filters, hydraulic fluids, petroleum products, used batteries) should be collected and disposed of in an environmentally acceptable location and manner. The dumping of oil or other hazardous materials on the ground or in any watercourse is prohibited. Drained oil or other hazardous materials should be contained using a drip pan or other suitable device, retained and disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner.

5.6.3. Equipment Operation in Environmentally Sensitive Areas

a. Equipment will be operated only within the designated mine/UXO clearance

site, access roads, and field camp. Equipment operators will not be allowed to damage or destroy vegetation, stream banks, or vegetation outside of this area.

b. When equipment or vehicles are working in or near any watercourse,

hydraulic, fuel and lubricating systems should be in good repair. Vehicles or equipment with fuel or fluid leaks will not enter the wetted perimeter of any watercourse.

5.7. Toxic or Hazardous Materials

5.7.1. All toxic or hazardous materials, including fuels, should be transported, stored, and used in accordance with procedures that minimize the likelihood of spills or leaks.

5.7.2. Contingency plans for the clean-up of toxic or hazardous spills, including fuels,

should be prepared prior to any commencement of mine/UXO clearance activities, together with a list of required spill clean-up supplies necessary. Any used spills clean up and abatement materials should be promptly replaced to maintain a sufficient inventory throughout the field operations.

5.7.3. Should a spill occur, the necessary steps to contain and clean up the spill should be

taken immediately. Any soil or vegetation contaminated by spills will be bagged and removed to an approved waste disposal site, and replaced by comparable substitutes.

5.8. Protection of Livestock and Wildlife

5.8.1. Harassment of livestock or wildlife in and adjacent to mine/UXO clearance sites is prohibited. Local rules, regulations, and practices regarding hunting, fishing, and the discharge of fire arms will be adhered to.




5.9. Cultural Resources

5.9.1. Any item of archaeological, heritage, historical, cultural, or scientific interest located

during mine/UXO clearance activities will remain the property of the host government. In the event of such a find, mine/UXO clearance operations will cease, and the appropriate authorities are notified. Operations will not resume until an appropriate directive has been received from those authorities.

5.10. Environmental Awareness of Mine/UXO Clearance Personnel

5.10.1. All mine/UXO clearance personnel must be made familiar with the contents of this NMAS Chapter.

6. REFERENCES

6.1. Normative references are important documents to which reference is made in this standard and which form part of the provisions of this standard.

IMAS 10.70 Safety & Occupational Health – Protection of the Environment (Ed.1 Amendment 1)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 19 COMMUNITY LIAISON



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 19 COMMUNITY LIAISON


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Assessment and Planning .............................................................................................. 4 5.3. Expected Activities and Outcomes ................................................................................. 4 5.4. Data Collection and Reporting ........................................................................................ 5 5.5. Monitoring and Evaluation .............................................................................................. 7 5.6. Accreditation, Licencing and Quality Assurance ............................................................. 7 5.7. Personal Safety .............................................................................................................. 8 5.8. Coordination with Other Mine Risk Education ................................................................ 8 5.9. Additional Note ............................................................................................................... 9





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that communities fully understand the work undertaken by mine action agencies and following clearance activities feel confident that the land released to them is safe.

1.2. The purpose is also to assist in reducing the threat posed on the community by

recording all additional information gathered from community members and reporting it promptly to the Operations Section of the LMAC on the appropriate form.

2. SCOPE

2.1. Community liaison refers to the system and processes used to exchange information between National Authorities, Mine Action Organizations and Communities on the presence of mines, UXO and AXO and of their potential risk. It also allows communities to be fully involved in the demining process and, on completion of clearance, to be confident that the land released for their use is safe.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Mine Risk Education (MRE): A process that promotes the adoption of safer

behaviour by at-risk groups, and which provides the links between affected communities, other mine action components and other sectors. Mine risk education is an essential component of Mine Action.

3.1.2. Handover: The process by which the beneficiary (usually the national mine action

authority) accepts responsibility for the cleared area. The term 'alienation' is sometimes used to describe a change of ownership of the land, which accompanies the handover of a cleared area.

3.1.3. Handover certificate: Documentation used to record the handover of cleared land.

3.1.4. Public information: Information, which is released or published for the primary

purpose of keeping the public fully informed, thereby gaining their understanding and support.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Lebanese Mine Action Centre (LMAC), with delegated authority through the national authority to carry out, Mine Risk Education to local communities in accordance with International Mine Action Standards (IMAS).

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Community Liaison is a component of Mine Risk Education (MRE). Community Liaison is essential when mine marking survey or clearance is taking place to ensure the community is informed of all stages of the processes and how they impact on their lives.

5.1.2. Community Liaison is the link between the tasked mine action capacity and the

communities affected by the threat, and an essential element in an integrated approach to mine action.

5.1.3. Community Liaison interventions shall take into consideration, at all stages of

planning, implementation, monitoring and evaluation, the relevant standards as laid down in the International Mine Action Standards (IMAS) for Mine Risk Education.

5.2. Assessment and Planning

5.2.1. Assessment and planning stages shall take into consideration relevant information available from national databases, surveys or other mine action resources.

5.2.2. Indicators should be defined to measure changes or results produced by the project.

5.2.3. Monitoring and evaluation processes shall be designed during the planning stages.

5.3. Expected Activities and Outcomes

5.3.1. Persons working as Community Liaison Assistants shall inform communities before survey, marking and clearance activities are commenced, to ensure they understand the process of the activities and are receptive to them taking place.

5.3.2. To educate community members generally of the demarcation that will be visible in

the task area, and the need to avoid the task site area and its proximity to ensure their safety.

5.3.3. Conduction of a pre clearance review of the mined area; providing a ‘before’ picture

of the lands former use and contribution to socio-economic development including the number of beneficiaries from its use. This will provide a base data against which ‘post clearance’ land use will be compared.

5.3.4. To gather any relevant additional information or feedback regarding the tasked threat




received from community members, and ensure it is communicated to the LMAC and the mine action agency promptly, to facilitate operational planning.

5.3.5. To achieve completion of the task with minimum disruption to both the mine action

agency and the community members.

5.3.6. To ensure that the community, on completion of clearance tasks, is confident that the land released is safe. The completion of the task should include walking with the landowner or authorized representative over the cleared areas and the boundaries of the safe area. Any remaining suspect or suspended areas; both marked and unmarked shall be clearly communicated to the community.

5.3.7. To gather any additional information from community members on dangerous or

suspect areas and UXO sightings, document them on the relevant form, and pass them promptly to the LMAC for their further action.

5.3.8. To ensure through the conduct of a post-clearance review landowners and the

community in general remain confident that land previously released to them is safe. This post clearance review should be completed to confirm that the cleared land is being used, and provide a means to compare its use to the prior conflict use, and to identify any needs hindering further development.

5.3.9. Implementation of CL shall be guided by principles established during the

assessment and planning stages, but shall be responsive to the changing needs of the communities, mine action agencies and other stakeholders.

5.3.10. CL implementation shall be responsive to feedback from the monitoring and

evaluation phases.

5.4. Data Collection and Reporting

5.4.1. A Community Liaison Aide-Memoire (Annex L) shall be used by the CLA to assist in the process of communication and data collection with community members and the mine action agencies. The Memoire is a ‘memory jogger’ to assist the CL Assistant in ensuring data gathered for all tasks is consistent and comprehensive. All information gathered in respect of the points on the Aide Memoire should be incorporated onto the relevant forms as described below.

5.4.2. A Pre-Clearance Community Contact Record (Annex M1) shall be completed in

respect of each mine action task detailing the communication held with community members, and any information received prior to the deployment of the capacity to the site. This form should include details of the landowner/s or his or her authorized representative and their contact telephone numbers.




5.4.3. This form shall be given to the Task Site Supervisor for his/her information and then

placed on the Task Dossier for review by Quality Assurance Officers visiting the site during the course of the task.

5.4.4. A During Clearance Community Contact Record (Annex M2) shall be commenced

when work at the task site starts. This form shall record the visits to the community throughout the duration of the task. Relevant information collected during this time should be communicated verbally to the Site Supervisor promptly. Once the clearance work is finished a copy of this form shall be given to the Task Site Supervisor to place on the Task Dossier for review by Quality Assurance Officers when they visit the site to conduct QA.

5.4.5. A Post Clearance Community Contact Record (Annex M3) shall be completed once the task has been finished as required by the LMAC. This should record that the community has been advised of the task completion and that a handover of the land will take place in the near future. Once completed both the During Clearance and the Post Clearance Track Sheets should be placed onto the Task Dossier for final sighting by the tasked agency and the Quality Assurance team. This should happen before the formal completion takes place to enable them to confirm there is no outstanding issue with the community in regard to the task or its area.

5.4.6. The relevant sections of the Minefield Report (Annex D1) shall be completed relating

to the Pre and Post Clearance Review of each of the mined areas. The Pre Clearance Review should be done before mine clearance is commenced at the task site, and the Post Clearance Review should be done some months following the land being released back to the landowner or land users.

5.4.7. A Community Liaison Final Clearance Certificate (Annex O) shall be filled in for

completed mine action tasks. This certificate, once signed off by the landowner or the authorized representative and other signatories, should be placed on the Task Dossier to serve as acknowledgement that the landowner or the authorized representative has been informed of the mine action that has taken place in the area, viewed the cleared area and its boundaries, and/or has been advised of any remaining suspect areas, or any suspended areas.

5.4.8. A Community Liaison Dangerous Area Report (Annex P) shall be completed when

reliable information is received from the community regarding other suspect or dangerous areas within their proximity. The completed form should be passed to the LMAC for further action, and input to the IMSMA database.

5.4.9. A UXO Tasking Request (Annex Q) shall be completed when information is received

from the community regarding Unexploded Ordnance. This completed report should be passed immediately to the LMAC for verification and follow up, and input to the IMSMA database.




5.4.10. A flow of Community Liaison procedures and Dangerous Area/UXO Sighting reports are to be found in (Annex N).

5.5. Monitoring and Evaluation

5.5.1. Monitoring plans of Community Liaison projects shall be established in the planning stages.

5.5.2. Internal monitoring shall be an ongoing process throughout the duration of the

project.

5.5.3. The monitoring process shall be timely in both its undertaking and feedback.

5.5.4. An internal evaluation should be conducted, and ideally an external evaluation for all CL projects.

5.5.5. Evaluation shall make use of the indicators identified at the planning stage of the

project to measure the achievements of the project.

5.5.6. Evaluations shall be conducted in accordance with international standards and using sound procedures and methodologies to ensure validity, reliability and objectivity of results.

5.6. Accreditation, Licencing and Quality Assurance

5.6.1. Accreditation is the procedure by which an Organization or persons wishing to conduct CL is formally recognised as competent and able to plan and manage CL activities safely, effectively and efficiently. The LMAC shall accredit all Organizations or persons intending to work in CL before commencing implementation.

5.6.2. Licencing is the procedure by which an Organization or persons carrying out CL is

formally recognised as competent and able to carry out CL activities. The granting of a licence assumes that the licensed capacity will not change beyond the scope or intention of the original licence. The LMAC will be the licence issuing body for all accredited Organizations wishing to work in Lebanon.

5.6.3. The applicant or licensee(s) shall be competent to apply the general provisions of

IMAS and the specific provisions of the national mine action authority, including financial and insurance requirements.

5.6.4. Accreditation will only be granted to an Organization or persons carrying out CL so

long as they conform to IMAS (currently in draft form for MRE), and national standards and regulations.




5.6.5. The accreditation process will require submission of the following information:

a. Lesson plans for courses completed in Community Liaison skills and training. b. The CV’s of the persons employed to undertake Community Liaison detailing

their skills and suitability for the work. c. The CV’s of the trainers facilitating the training. d. The monitoring and evaluation plans for the Community Liaison interventions. e. The details of the programme objectives, resources (both physical and

personnel), geographical coverage and duration of the project.

5.6.6. On successful review of the above a licence will be issued in respect of those persons or the Organization, if it is dedicated to this field of work, and their planned project.

5.6.7. Additional projects will require re-submission of the information above for

accreditation and issue of another licence.

5.6.8. The process of Quality Control (QC) and Quality Assurance (QA) in relation to mine action is covered in Chapter 9. It shall extend to incorporate CL to the extent that both QC and QA processes will include ensuring all issues and information received from the communities in relation to the tasked area has been considered and addressed appropriately before completion date.

5.7. Personal Safety

5.7.1. Community Liaison Assistants (CLAs) shall attend a Landmine and UXO Safety Brief before deploying to work in mine affected areas.

5.7.2. CLAs shall make themselves familiar with the demarcation system used by the mine

action agencies, and when visiting task sites obey the Site Supervisor at all times in regard to movement in the area.

5.7.3. CLAs shall not put themselves at risk, and should not feel any obligation to enter

areas if they do not feel safe, in responding to requests or information from communities. It is sufficient to take a GPS reading from a known safe area and report it to the LMAC for them to follow up.

5.8. Coordination with Other Mine Risk Education

5.8.1. In many theatres Community Liaison is undertaken by the same persons that carry out ongoing mine risk education (MRE) with communities on the threat posed by the presence of mines and unexploded ordnance. Hence liaison can be a part of a MRE




intervention, and its role is pertinent in areas where survey, marking and clearance is taking place.

5.8.2. Specifically how MRE will be facilitated will depend on the target groups identified

within affected communities. Identification of target groups and their needs should be in response to a process of information gathering carried out with communities living in proximity to a mine and/or UXO threat.

5.8.3. In the case where Community Liaison is undertaken separately from mine risk

education any needs identified by a CLA, for example the observation of risky behaviour or a need for education following an incident, should be passed to the LMAC so that appropriate action may be incorporated into the national mine risk education programme.

5.9. Additional Note

5.9.1. This NMAS Chapter does not cover any other aspect of Mine Risk Education apart from Community Liaison. For further guidance on Mine Risk Education refer to references below.

6. REFERENCES

6.1. Normative references are important documents to which reference is made in this standard and which form part of the provisions of this standard. IMAS 05.10 Information management; under development IMAS 07.31 Accreditation of mine risk education Organizations and operations (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 07.41 Monitoring of mine risk education programmes and projects (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 08.10 General mine action assessment. (Ed. 2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 08.20 Land release (Ed.1 Amendment 1) IMAS 08.50 Data collection and needs assessment for mine risk education (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 12.10 Planning for mine risk education programmes and projects. (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 12.20 Implementation of mine risk education programmes and projects (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2 & 3) IMAS 14.20 Evaluation of mine risk education programmes and projects (Ed.1 Amendments 1,2 & 3)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 20 SAFETY & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH –

DEMINING WORKSITE SAFETY



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 20 SAFETY & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH DEMINING WORKSITE SAFETY


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. General Requirements – Organizations and Employees ................................................ 5 5.3. Discipline and Fitness for work ....................................................................................... 6 5.4. General Requirements - Demining Worksites ................................................................. 6 5.5. Marking of hazardous areas ........................................................................................... 7 5.6. Control of Entry into Fragmentation and Evacuation Safety Areas ................................. 7 5.7. Control areas .................................................................................................................. 8 5.8. Vehicle parking area ....................................................................................................... 8 5.9. Visitor reporting and briefing area ................................................................................... 8 5.10. Safety lanes ................................................................................................................. 8 5.11. Medical ........................................................................................................................ 9 5.12. Rest areas ................................................................................................................... 9 5.13. Explosive storage area (s) ........................................................................................... 9 5.14. Demining incidents / accidents .................................................................................... 9 5.15. Responsibilities and Obligations ................................................................................ 10 5.16. Demining Organization .............................................................................................. 10 5.17. Deminers ................................................................................................................... 10





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidance for the development and implementation of S&OH management systems for use in mine action in Lebanon. Mine Action agencies are required to address the issue in detail in their SOP and should consult IMAS 10.10 for any additional guidance.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This National Mine Action Standard provides specifications and guidance for the development and implementation of safety and occupational health (S&OH) systems for use in mine action in Lebanon. It should be read in conjunction with the relevant IMAS 10.20, 10.30, 10.40 and 10.50.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Insurance: An arrangement for compensation in the event of damage to or loss of

(property, life or a person). Insurance should include appropriate medical, death and disability coverage for all personnel as well as third party liability coverage.

3.1.2. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): A worldwide federation of

national bodies from over 130 countries. Its work results in international agreements, which are published as ISO standards and guides. ISO is a NGO and the standards it develops are voluntary, although some (mainly those concerned with health, safety and environmental aspects) have been adopted by many countries as part of their regulatory framework. ISO deals with the full spectrum of human activities and many of the tasks and processes, which contribute to mine action, have a relevant standard. A list of ISO standards and guides is given in the ISO Catalogue.

3.1.3. Tolerable Risk: For the purpose of this NMAS, the tolerable risk is an accepted level

of risk to personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles, after considering the Explosive Ordnance (EO) hazards associated to the risk. The tolerable risk shall be determined after a pertinent risk evaluation / assessment has been conducted. In order to determine the tolerable risk to personnel involved in Mine Action operations it may be necessary to separate personnel into categories according to their specific roles.

For the purpose of this NMAS, the following categories shall be used when determining the tolerable risk to personnel during Mine Action clearance operations:

a. Directly Involved: Personnel who conduct clearance and hazardous area

marking operations: e.g. Site Supervisor, Deminer/Searcher, MDD Handler and Machine Operator. For the purpose of this NMAS, clearance is the action




of reducing or eliminating the Explosive Ordnance (EO) hazards from a specified area, e.g. mine clearance, BAC and EOD. It is generally accepted that there is an accepted degree of risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) to personnel Directly Involved due to the nature of the work and their responsibilities.

b. Indirectly Involved: Personnel who support clearance and hazardous area

marking operations: e.g. Medic and Driver. It is generally accepted that the risk from Explosive Ordnance (EO) is minimal to personnel Indirectly Involved.

c. Not Involved: Personnel who do not conduct or the support clearance and

hazardous marking operations: e.g. Non-Mine Action Organization personnel. 4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Survey Team Leaders to ensure that the S&OH is carried out, in accordance with National Mine Action Standard.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The need to reduce risk and to provide a safe working environment is fundamental principles of mine action management. Risk reduction involves a combination of safe working practices and operating procedures, effective supervision and control, appropriate education and training, equipment of inherently safe design, and the provision of effective personal protective equipment and clothing.

5.1.2. Given the wide range of operational settings and mine action activities, it is not

possible to provide a precise and complete set of specifications or provisions that apply to all mine action worksites. Thus, mine action Organizations should develop and maintain management procedures and processes that will enable safety and occupational health (S&OH) risks in the worksite to be identified, evaluated and reduced in a systematic and timely manner.

5.1.3. This chapter provides specifications and guidance on the development and

implementation of policy and documented procedures and practices which aim to establish and maintain a safe demining worksite.

5.1.4. The provision of a safe working environment includes the design and layout of a

demining worksite by fencing and marking hazardous areas, controlling the movement of deminers, visitors and the local population, enforcing safety distances, and providing effective medical cover and casualty evacuation procedures. This requires national mine action authorities and demining Organizations to establish policies and develop and maintain procedures for worksite safety.




5.2. General Requirements – Organizations and Employees

5.2.1. Organizations should:

a. Provide and maintain safe work places, machinery and equipment, and adopt safe work practices and procedures with a view to eliminating hazards or reducing them as much as practicable.

b. Provide adequate supervision and training (development and refresher training

where appropriate).

c. Provide, at no cost to the employee, adequate PPE and protective clothing.

d. Provide, at no cost to the employee, adequate health care and emergency medical support in case of accidents.

e. In accordance with national practice, appoint delegates and committees to

represent the employee's views on S&OH matters. In this regard, provide such delegates and committees with access to appropriate information and advice.

f. Set out in writing a safety policy and arrangements, where appropriate in SOPs,

and bring this information to the notice of every employee in a language or medium the employee readily understands.

g. Verify the implementation of applicable standards on S&OH and undertake

systematic safety and health audits from time to time.

h. Prepare and maintain safety records as are considered necessary by the LMAC or Lebanese authorities, including records of notifiable occupational accidents and incidents; and ensure that adequate insurance cover exists for all employees against death, disablement and injury. This is in addition to the mandatory insurance cover required for operational personnel required by the national authority.

i. Demining Organizations (in their capacity as employers) should develop,

implement and maintain S&OH management systems and plans in accordance with national standards and guidelines. In the absence of appropriate national S&OH standards and guidelines, develop suitable systems and plans.

j. Issue, maintain and update their own regulations, codes of practice, SOPs and

other suitable provisions on S&OH. 5.2.2. Employees should:

a. Take all reasonable care for their own safety and that of other persons who may be affected by their acts or omissions at work.

b. Comply with instructions given for their own conduct and safety.




c. Use safety devices and PPE consistently and correctly, and do not render

them inoperative.

d. Report to their immediate superior any situation which they have reason to believe could present a hazard and which they cannot themselves correct.

5.3. Discipline and Fitness for work

5.3.1. Organizations shall develop their own internal guidelines and procedures for

employee discipline and fitness for work. Organizations shall be responsible for enforcing their guidelines and taking the appropriate disciplinary action, when required.

5.3.2. A mandatory requirement is that employees who are unfit for work due to illness or

injury (mental and/or physical) or impairment due to alcohol or drugs shall not be permitted to work at a demining worksite or any operational work in the field. The Organizations are responsible for ensuring these requirements are met. Disciplinary action may be taken against the Organization by the national authority if these requirements are not met. Organizations shall be responsible to ensure that employees do not work under the following circumstances:

a. Employees that are taking prescribed or non-prescribed medicines that affect

their mental or physical performance.

b. Employees that are under the influence of alcohol. Organizations may use a breath alcometer or other device or test for establishing that an employee is under the influence of alcohol. Only a zero level of alcohol intoxication is permitted.

c. Employees that are suspected of being under the influence of recreational

drugs. This may be established by suitable testing for drugs at a medical facility.

5.4. General Requirements - Demining Worksites

5.4.1. The demining worksite shall be designed to:

a. Provide a clearly visible separation of hazardous areas including fragmentation and evacuation safety areas, cleared areas, un-cleared areas and unknown areas of and around the worksite.

b. Control the movement of deminers and visitors (including members of the

public) at the worksite.

c. Limit the number of deminers and visitors allowed into the fragmentation and evacuation safety areas.

d. During the controlled destruction of mines and UXO, take all reasonable




precautions to exclude deminers, visitors and members of the local population from the fragmentation and evacuation safety areas, or provide suitable protection inside buildings, bunkers or mobile structures.

e. Include measures to prevent structural and environmental damage.

5.5. Marking of hazardous areas

5.5.1. Safe and hazardous areas within the worksite shall be separated by providing clear

and consistent marking.

5.6. Control of Entry into Fragmentation and Evacuation Safety Areas

5.6.1. Demining often proves to be an attractive event for the local population, especially

children. Procedures shall be developed for controlling the entry of unauthorized persons into mined areas, onto the demining worksite and into fragmentation and evacuation safety area. This should be achieved by:

a. Informing the local population, demining workers and demining worksite

visitors of the extent of the worksite, and the fragmentation and evacuation safety areas.

b. Physically controlling entry into the hazard areas during the mine or UXO

hazard destruction processes by warning signs and positioning sentries. c. Planning and execution of demining operations should minimize disruption to

the local population, which may need to move through fragmentation and evacuation safety areas if they are to subsist or survive. It is unrealistic to expect that the public can be prevented from entering associated fragmentation and evacuation safety areas of whole demining worksites for the duration of the clearance task. On the other hand it is important to reduce to tolerable levels the risk of harm to the public.

The following may provide guidance on the development of a reasonable and workable compromise.

1. The extent of the fragmentation area should be equivalent to the fragmentation

hazard of the likely mine/UXO contamination in the worksite. 2. The public, having been given appropriate warnings should be allowed to pass

on marked routes through the fragmentation area, EXCEPT when demolitions are taking place. When a demolition is taking place the demining Organization shall establish a cordon with sentries on routes at the entry points of the fragmentation and evacuation safety area to prevent entry into the area. It may also be necessary to restrict entry when particular munitions with a large fragmentation radius, such as bounding mines, are being cleared.




3. An inner safety distance should also be identified. For example, a radius

equivalent to the blast area from the likely mine/UXO contamination, demining lane separation, or RF detonator hazard (whichever is greater). The minimum radius of such a distance should be 25 m. The public should not be allowed to enter this safety zone at any time when demining is being undertaken on the worksite.

4. Where the location of the worksite means that this inner safety distance cuts a

frequently used road or path, an alternative solution should be considered. If the worksite is small enough, the demining unit should phase operations in such a way to minimize disruption to the public. If the worksite is large, the demining Organization should seek the assistance of the local administration, police or other appropriate emergency services or the military to identify mark and possibly supervise the creation of a suitable diversion route. If no such diversion route is feasible, the demining unit should consider using protective works.

5.7. Control areas

5.7.1. Effective control of the worksite will be achieved by establishing and clearly marking a number of areas for safety and administration. Such areas shall be outside the relevant safety distances from all contaminated areas, clearance activity and explosive storage.

5.8. Vehicle parking area

5.8.1. The vehicle parking area shall be a used area or cleared area large enough to provide safe parking for demining unit and visitor’s vehicles. The boundary of the parking area shall be clearly marked and sign posted. The parking area sign posting shall indicate directions to the demining worksite and visitor reporting area. Where appropriate these directions should include a map that indicates any mine or UXO hazards in close proximity to the parking area or along the route from the vehicle parking area to the visitor reporting area of the demining worksite.

5.9. Visitor reporting and briefing area

5.9.1. The visitor reporting area and briefing area shall be a clearly marked and identifiable area that is outside the fragmentation and evacuation safety area of the demining worksite.

5.10. Safety lanes

5.10.1. The demining Organization shall establish cleared safety lanes to provide access to and around the demining worksite. Cleared safety lanes shall be wide enough to provide safe access for personnel and equipment to the worksite. Safety lanes




cleared for CASEVAC shall be wide enough for the safe execution of documented CASEVAC procedures. Safety lanes should be not less than 2.0 m wide.

5.11. Medical

5.11.1. Each demining worksite shall include a Medical Post, organized and equipped as recommended in NMAS Chapter 7. The Medical Post shall:

a. Be identifiable and clearly marked. b. Be equipped with appropriate first aid / medical supplies and equipment. c. Be attended by suitably qualified and experienced medical staff. d. Provide easy access to the clearance area of the worksite and easy access

for ambulances.

5.12. Rest areas

5.12.1. The worksite shall include clearly identifiable and marked rest areas for deminers. Rest areas shall be located outside the fragmentation and evacuation safety area and should be equipped to provide staff with protection from adverse or extreme weather conditions.

5.13. Explosive storage area (s)

5.13.1. Explosives or mine and/or UXO hazardous material may be stored on a demining worksite. Explosives used in the demining process should be stored in a container approved for the type and quantity of explosive being stored, which will be located outside the fragmentation and evacuation safety area of the demining worksite.

5.14. Demining incidents / accidents

5.14.1. Procedures for the response to a demining incident and/or accident shall be established and formally documented as SOPs. The SOPs should include:

a. The Organization and capabilities needed to respond to a demining incident,

including the procedures, training, equipment and material. b. Procedures for the investigation, analysis and corrective action to be taken

following a demining incident.




5.15. Responsibilities and Obligations

5.15.1. The Lebanon Mine Action Centre (LMAC) shall develop a policy and establish and maintain documented procedures for safety and occupational health on demining worksites.

The documented procedures should include:

a. Standards for safety markings to be used on demining vehicles. b. Standards for an emergency response and casualty evacuation procedures on

demining worksites. c. Procedures for the reporting and investigation of demining incidents and

accidents.

5.15.2. The Regional Mine Action Centre (RMAC) is responsible for planning, coordination and the quality assurance capability that ensures that mine and UXO clearance is conducted in the most effective, safe and time efficient manner, in accordance with NMAS developed from International Mine Action Standards for all operations in Lebanon.

5.16. Demining Organization

5.16.1. The demining Organization shall establish and maintain documented SOPs that comply with the provisions IMAS, the NMAS and other relevant standards or regulations.

5.17. Deminers

5.17.1. Demining workers shall:

a. Take reasonable of their individual care and safety and those of other persons on the worksite.

b. Comply with instructions given for their own conduct and safety, especially

those contained in SOPs. c. Comply with NMAS on conduct and safety on worksites. d. Report forth with to their superior any situation, which they have reason to

believe could present a worksite hazard, which they cannot themselves correct.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.10 S&OH General Principles (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 10.20 Demining Worksite Safety (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2,3, 4 & 5) IMAS 10.30 Personal Protection Equipment (Ed.2 Amendment 1) IMAS 10.40 S&OH Medical Support to Demining Operations (Ed.1 Amendment 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 10.50 Storage, Transportation and Handling of Explosive (Ed 2 Amendments 1,2, 3 & 4) IMAS 10.60 Reporting and Investigation of Demining Incidents (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2, 3 & 4) IMAS 10.70 Safety & Occupational Health – Protection of the Environment (Ed.1 Amendment 1)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 21 CENTRAL DEMOLITION SITES



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 21 CENTRAL DEMOLITION SITES


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.

1 Aug 01, 2010 All All Reformatted





5.1. Priorities and principles ................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Authority for disposal ...................................................................................................... 5 5.3. Methods of local disposal – general ................................................................................ 5 5.4. Locating of disposal sites ................................................................................................ 5 5.5. Hazards of detonation ..................................................................................................... 5 5.6. Properties of demolition grounds .................................................................................... 6 5.7. Hazards of burning ......................................................................................................... 6 5.8. Properties of Burning Grounds ....................................................................................... 7 5.9. Approval of Disposals Sites and Standing Orders .......................................................... 7 5.10. Explosive limits ............................................................................................................ 8 5.11. Accident procedures .................................................................................................... 8 5.12. Records and reports .................................................................................................... 9 5.13. Licencing Body ............................................................................................................ 9





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this Chapter is to explain the principles and procedures for the conduct of large-scale demolition and burning operations at Central Demolition Sites (CDS). It includes recommendations as to the layout of demolition grounds and the contents of Standing orders in order to ensure a safe system of work.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This chapter provides specifications and standards for the safe conduct of EOD operations as part of a mine action clearance programme in Lebanon. It applies to the disposal of conventional unexploded ordnance (UXO), other than mines.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Demolition: Destruction of structures, facilities or material by use of fire, water,

explosives, mechanical or other means.

3.1.2. Demolition ground: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by detonation.

3.1.3. Destruction: The processes of final conversion of ammunition and explosives into an

inert state that can no longer function as designed.

3.1.4. Disposal site: An area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by detonation and burning.

3.1.5. Explosive ordnance disposal (EOD): The detection, identification, evaluation, render

safe, recovery and disposal of UXO. EOD may be undertaken: To dispose of UXO discovered outside mined areas, (this may be a single UXO, or a larger number inside a specific area). To dispose of explosive ordnance which has become hazardous by damage or attempted destruction.

3.1.6. Unexploded ordnance (UXO): Explosive ordnance that has been primed, fuzed,

armed or otherwise prepared for use or used. It may have been fired, dropped, launched or projected yet remains unexploded either through malfunction or design or for any other reason.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all Demolition activities are implemented in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Priorities and principles

5.1.1. The destruction of ammunition and explosives is a potentially hazardous task. The risks are minimized if the correct procedures are followed. If they are not, the possibility of a serious accident becomes very high.

5.1.2. The priorities that shall always be observed are:

a. Safety - The safety of both personnel and property is paramount. If a method

is not safe it shall not be used. b. Security – Of both the items destroyed and the serviceable explosives used to

destroy them. c. Accounting - This links with security. Any loss shall be promptly identified,

investigated and reported. d. Speed of Work - This shall never be achieved at the expense of the first three

priorities.

5.1.3. There are many different detailed disposal procedures but certain principles apply to all disposal tasks:

a. Know the ammunition - Know in detail both the item being destroyed and the

explosives used to destroy it. Unless the design characteristics of both are known, it will not be possible to determine a safe and effective means of disposal.

b. Plan the task carefully - Do not leave the planning until arrival at the disposal

site. Work out the programme and procedures in detail well in advance. c. Create a safe working environment - Create and maintain a safe working

environment so that it is safe for the Demolition Party, other personnel, property, livestock, vehicles and equipment.

d. Give and obey directions precisely - The disposal site is no place for ambiguity

or misunderstanding. Directives must be clearly understood by all personnel. e. Observe all the safety precautions and use only the approved methods. - Do

not take shortcuts, they kill.




f. Clear the disposal area prior to departure - No disposal task is complete until

the demolition area has been cleared of all hazards and contamination. Implicit in this is also the clearance of all rubbish and litter.

5.2. Authority for disposal

5.2.1. The responsibility for authorizing major disposals at CDS is vested in the LMAC. No major disposal should take place without the prior approval of the LMAC.

5.3. Methods of local disposal – general

5.3.1. There are three methods of local destruction:

a. Detonation: This is used with HE filled natures. Small quantities of other natures - smoke, pyrotechnics, lachrymatory - can also be disposed of by inclusion in mixed stacks during large-scale demolitions. The quantities of such items included in a mixed stack have to be kept down to a small percentage of the overall stack.

b. Burning: This is generally used with propellant (bagged or loose), smoke,

pyrotechnic and lachrymatory stores but is suitable for certain plastic-bodied mines. It can also be used as an alternative to detonation for certain explosives, i.e. CE, TNT, NG based explosives and GP - but detonation is the cleaner method.

c. Incineration: Is a specialized form of burning authorized for certain small

mines with minimal explosive content.

5.4. Locating of disposal sites

5.4.1. A disposal site is in an area authorized for the destruction of ammunition and explosives by detonation and burning. These in turn are referred to as demolition grounds and burning grounds and may be co-located on a disposal site. The LMAC shall formally approve and licence disposal sites.

5.5. Hazards of detonation

5.5.1. The hazards created by detonation are:

a. Flash and heat: These effects are localized but still significant. Flash could injure the eyes, but the reddish flash produced by most detonations is unlikely to do so. Heat will start fires if combustible materials are present: dry grass, undergrowth, trees or peaty soil.




b. Blast and noise: Noise presents a greater problem. At close range it can

cause ear damage and at a greater range it will have a nuisance effect that will generate complaints from the general public.

c. Ground shock: The main effect will be on persons and equipment relatively

close to the detonation - although rock strata can sometimes transmit the effect for considerable distances. It is another potential source of public nuisance and complaint.

d. Fragments: These are the real killers. In practise the size of the “danger

area” is determined by the maximum range of fragments. All persons, property and equipment that is within this range and which is not adequately protected is in hazard.

e. Toxic smoke/fumes.

5.6. Properties of demolition grounds

5.6.1. To overcome the above hazards, demolition grounds require the following properties:

a. Isolation: This is the most important requirement. They must be as remote as possible from man and all his artifacts.

b. Deep soil: Free of rocks and stones with no peat, (this could burn

underground). c. No secondary fire hazards: Demolition grounds should not be located over

pipelines, over power cables or near fuel storage areas. d. No radio/radar transmitters: Major demolitions are normally initiated using

electric cable or radio control (RC) systems, and as such, are vulnerable to external electro-magnetic force (EMF) influence. Consequently, demolition grounds shall not be situated near radar installations, radio transmitters or near high-voltage power lines.

e. High ground: High ground reduces the effects of blast and ground shock and

is also relatively well drained. The latter property aids digging. However, high ground also tends to increase fragment range.

5.7. Hazards of burning

5.7.1. The hazards created by burning mines are:

a. Intense heat. b. Intense light.




c. Toxic fumes (occasionally).

5.7.2. But, there are no blast, ground shock or fragmentation hazards unless the demolition

burns to detonation.

5.8. Properties of Burning Grounds

5.8.1. To counter these hazards burning grounds require the following properties:

a. No secondary fire hazards. b. An adequate water supply. c. Sufficient isolation to prevent heat or fume casualties. d. Sandy soil with no peat.

5.8.2. An isolated, sandy, barren area is the most suitable site, but avoids sites near high

cliffs; these encourage rising hot air currents that can carry burning debris considerable distances.

5.9. Approval of Disposals Sites and Standing Orders

5.9.1. Formal approval, (commonly referred to as licencing), of the disposal site and its associated Standing Orders shall be given by the LMAC prior to the commencement of disposal activities on a site. Such approval shall be based on consideration of the following factors:

a. References to publications - All Standing Orders are in effect the local

interpretation of regulations issued by the higher authority. Standing Orders should not reproduce large slabs of information contained in other publications. Rather they should concentrate on detailing how these regulations are to be applied under local conditions.

b. Maps and grid references - Maps shall be sent to the LMAC with the draft

Standing Orders. These shall include a map of the area upon which the grid reference, name and area of the site are marked and a larger scale sketch map of the disposals site showing its layout.

c. Locations of sentries and Observation Posts - Sentries have to be so sited

that they control all access routes into the disposal site and are outside the danger area.

d. Marking of the site - Disposal sites shall be marked with notice boards sited so

that they are visible on all possible approaches. e. Location of the firing point - This shall be close enough to the demolition so




the OIC Disposals is able to hear partial explosions. The firing point will normally be located outside the danger area.

f. Communications - Good communications between all parties involved in the

disposal are essential to safety.

5.10. Explosive limits

5.10.1. These are determined by two main limiting factors:

a. Maximum fragmentation range - This determines the danger area and all persons and equipment must be either outside this area or within a suitably protected area. The perimeter of the disposal site shall contain the danger area. The size of the danger area will therefore limit the permissible net explosive quantity (NEQ) of the demolition. No demolition shall be permitted above the level where fragments may travel further than the perimeter.

b. Ground shock and noise effect. The local “tolerance” level of the public to the

effect of shock and noise on themselves and their property has to be determined and may impose lower limits than the fragment range.

5.11. Accident procedures

5.11.1. The mandatory requirements shall be:

a. The disposals party shall include at least one person trained and equipped to administer first aid.

b. This person shall stay readily available outside the danger area, or under

cover, to deal with casualties. c. There shall be an established casualty evacuation procedure and standby

medical cover has to be available.

5.11.2. Following an accident the following procedure shall be implemented:

a. Stop disposals, make safe prepared demolitions, carry out first aid and CASEVAC and call on back up medical aid.

b. Inform the LMAC. Note all details pertinent to the eventual enquiry. c. Render safe and repack all ammunition and explosives that have been

unpacked and prepared for disposals - segregate awaiting investigation.




5.12. Records and reports

5.12.1. A permanent Demolitions Diary shall be kept by the LMAC for each licenced CDS.

The Demolitions Diary shall be completed daily and also signed by the OIC Disposals on a daily basis. Organizations are also to maintain records of both the unserviceable and serviceable ammunition natures destroyed.

5.13. Licencing Body

5.13.1. The LMAC shall be the licencing body for all Central Demolition Sites. 6. REFERENCES



IMAS 09.30 Explosive Ordnance Disposal (Ed. 2 Amendment 1) 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 22 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 22 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. PPE Requirements ......................................................................................................... 5 5.3. Blast Protection ............................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Fragmentation Protection ............................................................................................... 6





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to provide information and standards pertaining to Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) within Mine Action activities in Lebanon.

2. SCOPE

2.1. The National Mine Action Standard provides specifications and guidance to national and international demining agencies on the minimum requirements of personal protective equipment (PPE), including protective clothing, for use in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION

3.1. The definitions in this NMAS are in compliance with IMAS 04.10 (Glossary of mine action terms definitions and abbreviations) and all terms that have been developed in Lebanon have been captured in the Glossary of Mine Action Terms, Definitions & Abbreviations.

3.1.1. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): All equipment and clothing designed to

provide protection, which is intended to be worn or held by an employee at work and which protects him/her against one or more risks to his/her safety or health.

3.1.2. Safety distance: For the purpose of this NMAS, the term ‘safety distance’ shall be

used when describing the agreed minimum distance which personnel, MDD, equipment, machines or vehicles shall be situated in order to avoid the effects of an explosion. The safety distance should be calculated by using a recognized EOD Fragmentation Hazard Zone (safety distance) formula. The primary considerations for confirming the safety distance shall be the hazard (e.g. Explosive Ordnance type and effects) and the protection afforded (e.g. armour, PPE, natural or man-made cover). Additional considerations such as the tolerable risk to certain personnel, MDD’s, equipment, machines or vehicles may influence the safety distance, however, the safety distance shall only be concluded after a pertinent assessment of the hazard and protection has been conducted and authorization has been granted by the LMAC.

3.1.3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): A worldwide federation of national bodies from over 130 countries. Its work results in international agreements, which are published as ISO standards and guides. ISO is a NGO and the standards it develops are voluntary, although some (mainly those concerned with health, safety and environmental aspects) have been adopted by many countries as part of their regulatory framework. ISO deals with the full spectrum of human activities and many of the tasks and processes, which contribute to mine action, have a relevant standard. A list of ISO standards and guides is given in the ISO Catalogue.

3.1.4. Protective measure: Means used to reduce risk [ISO Guide 51:1999(E)]




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. National Mine Action Authority and employers (governments, Non Government Organizations (NGO’s) and commercial entities) shall establish and maintain policy, standards and guidelines on the minimum requirements of PPE for use in national mine action programmes. This should provide training and supervision in the correct use and maintenance of Personal Protective Equipment.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The need to reduce risk and to provide a safe working environment are fundamental principles of mine action management (see IMAS 10.10). Risk reduction involves a combination of safe working practices and operating procedures, effective supervision and control, appropriate education and training, equipment of inherently safe design, and the provision of effective personal protective equipment (PPE) and clothing.

5.1.2. As a minimum, all employees involved in demining should be provided with

comfortable and service able clothing and footwear appropriate to the task and local conditions. PPE should be regarded as a 'last resort' to protect against the effects of mine and UXO hazards. It should be the final protective measure after all planning, training and procedural efforts to reduce risk have been taken. There are a number of reasons for this approach. First, PPE protects only the person wearing it, whereas measures controlling the risk at source can protect everyone at the demining workplace. Second, theoretical maximum levels of protection are seldom achieved with PPE in practice, and the actual level of protection is difficult to assess; effective protection is only achieved by suitable PPE, correctly fitted, and properly maintained and used. And third, PPE may restrict the wearer to some extent by limiting mobility or visibility, or by requiring additional weight to be carried.

5.1.3. The risk to deminers comes principally from anti personnel (AP) blast mines, AP

fragmentation mines, anti tank (AT) mines and unexploded ordnance (UXO). AP blast mines are the most abundant mines encountered in humanitarian demining and cause the greatest number of injuries. At close quarters, AP fragmentation mines and AT mines overmatches PPE currently available. Due to the area effect of such mines they also have the potential to cause 'secondary victims'. In general, when UXO munitions are encountered in humanitarian demining, they have already malfunctioned. They are usually high in metal content, on or near the surface, and constitute less of a hazard than mines. The varied nature of UXO means that the hazard is best dealt with procedurally rather than relying on PPE designed primarily for humanitarian demining.

5.1.4. This Chapter provides specifications and guidance to demining Organizations on the minimum requirements of personal protective equipment (PPE), including protective clothing, for use in mine action.




5.2. PPE Requirements

5.2.1. The levels of PPE provided for use in hazardous areas shall be based on a number

of factors including: the local risk(s), operational procedures and practices, and local environmental conditions.

5.2.2. Training shall be provided on the proper use, maintenance and storage of the PPE in

use within the demining Organization. Facilities should be provided for its proper storage and carriage. Equipment shall be examined on a regular basis to ensure that it is suitable for use.

5.3. Blast Protection

5.3.1. PPE should be capable of protecting against the blast effects of 240 gm of TNT at stand-off distances, for each item of PPE, appropriate to the activity performed in accordance with SOPs. Equipment provided to reduce the risk from such a hazard shall include, as a minimum:

a. Frontal protection, appropriate to the activity, capable of protecting against the

blast effects of 240 gm of TNT at 30 cm from the closest part of the body. b. Eye protection capable of retaining integrity against the blast effects of 240 gm

of TNT at 60 cm, providing full frontal coverage of face and throat as part of the specified frontal protection ensemble.

5.3.2. Although this standard lays down distances at which the PPE must be effective it

must be emphasized that this does NOT imply to deminers that they will be safe at such distances. Distance itself is an excellent attenuator of blast effects and the further away from an undesired explosive event the better.

5.3.3. The frontal protection ensemble provided to employees, whether required to kneel,

sit or squat shall be designed to cover the eyes, throat (frontal neck), chest, abdomen and genitals. Where SOPs permit employees to work in the kneeling or squatting position, the frontal protection ensemble should cover the front of the thighs.

5.3.4. Hand tools should be constructed in such a way that their separation or

fragmentation resulting from the detonation of an AP blast-mine incident is reduced to a minimum. They should be used with appropriate hand protection such as a hand-shield or gloves. Hand tools should be designed to be used at a low angle to the ground and should provide adequate stand-off from an anticipated point of detonation. Excavation tools and trowels constructed with inverted ‘V’ shoulders are not accredited for use in clearance activities in South Lebanon.




5.4. Fragmentation Protection

5.4.1. The effects of detonating fragmentation mines currently overmatch all but specialist

EOD ensembles, which emphasizes the initial need to minimize risk procedurally via appropriate SOPs. Protection should nevertheless be provided against non-designed fragmentation from other mines, (such as that from plastic-bodied blast mines), and to potential secondary victims where such a threat cannot be removed procedurally. PPE provided to reduce the risk from such a hazard should include, as a minimum:

a. Ballistic body armour with a STANAG 2920 v 50 rating (dry) of 450m/s for

1.102g fragments. b. A full face visor as described in clause 5.3.1.b above. However, if an analysis

of the threat indicates that a full face visor would provide inadequate protection across a full 3600 threat spectrum, then a helmet should be worn. The helmet should have a ballistic rating similar to the ballistic body armour selected by the demining organization.

c. Eye protection should be no less than that offered by 5 mm of untreated

polycarbonate. It should provide full frontal coverage of face and throat as part of the specified frontal protection ensemble. (If the body protection is fitted with an “overlap”, then the visor should be capable of fitting behind this “overlap” when in use).

6. REFERENCES



IMAS 10.10 S&OH Personnel Protective Equipment (Ed.1 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 10.30 S&OH PPE General Requirements (Ed.2 Amendment 1)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 23 CANCELLATION OF REPORTED DANGEROUS

AREAS / MINEFIELDS



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 23 CANCELLATION OF REPORTING DANGEROUS AREAS / MINEFIELDS


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Cancellation Criteria ....................................................................................................... 3 5.2. Cancellation Procedures ................................................................................................. 5 5.3. IMSMA Action ................................................................................................................. 5





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to establish the principles, and provide guidance on cancellation of reporting dangerous areas/minefields.

2. SCOPE

2.1. This chapter provides guidance on the cancellation procedures, and all the necessary documentation requirements.

3. DEFINITION


3.1. Cancelled area: An area previously recorded as a hazardous area, which

subsequently is considered, as a result of actions other than clearance, not to represent a risk from mines and UXO. This change in status will be the result of more accurate and reliable information, and will normally only be authorized by the national mine action authorities, in accordance with national policy. The documentation of all cancelled areas shall be retained together with a detailed explanation of the reasons for the change in status.

3.2. Hazardous area: An area not in productive use due to the perceived or actual presence of mines or ERW.

3.3. Suspected Hazardous Area (SHA): An area suspected of containing a contamination hazard.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all cancellation activities are implemented in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Cancellation Criteria

5.1.1. In certain circumstances a de-mining organization or LAF survey team can recommend to release a task by cancellation without any demining assets being deployed. Cancelling a SHA should take place when the site/area is considered safe for use by the local population. Sometimes a landowner may construct / develop/ cultivate on a previously reported contaminated area. If the local population is using




the site and there is no doubt that the area is safe then the task should be cancelled.

5.1.2. The cancellation criteria are designed to determine whether there is any reason to

believe that the reported SHA contains any hazards. If there is no reason to believe that there is a hazard in the area, it can be cancelled as having no known threat.

5.1.3. Criteria for SHA Cancellation: A de-mining organization or LAF Survey team may recommend the cancelling of an SHA when the following conditions apply and all available information about the Task has been collected, local people and authorities have been interviewed :

1. Has there been a comprehensive survey completed of the suspected area and its surroundings?

2. Was the landowner located and interviewed?

3. Does the landowner(s) agree with the assessment that the area is mine/UXO free?

4. Is the area being used on a regular basis?

5. Has the area been developed since the DA report was submitted?

6. No signs of fighting or military positions are located within 200m of the target UTM?

7. There have been no mine/UXO related incidents/accidents in the area?

8. No indications of mines or UXO located during the survey? Note: If “YES” is indicated for all serials then the area will meet the criteria to be “CANCELLED”. If “NO” is indicated for serials 4,5 & 6 then the area may meet cancellation criteria and the reasons must be indicated on the report, however the area may still be cancelled. If “NO” is indicated for serials 1,2,3,7 & 8 then the area will not be accepted for cancellation and further Technical survey will be conducted.

5.1.2. The de-mining organization or LAF survey team will complete the Cancellation Report as attached at (Annex T) to this chapter, both Arabic and English versions. This Cancellation report requesting cancellation of a suspected hazardous area is to include the following:

a. Name and signature of the de-mining organization representative or LAF-ER

survey/clearance team leader. b. Name and contact details of a minimum of two landowners or approved

representatives of the area in which the hazardous area refers too.




c. Name and signature of an approved LAF Representative (either the RMAC

planning officer or LMAC National Technical Survey (NTS) Executive officer). d. Recommendation of cancellation by the National Authority Representative

(LMAC Planning Officer). e. Approval of cancellation by the National Authority Operations Representative

(LMAC Chief of Operations) or the LMAC NTS Project manager. f. Sketch maps, any additional supporting documentation and photographs of

the area and the landmark/reference point.

5.2. Cancellation Procedures

5.2.1 RMAC Area of responsibility - Once the Cancellation Report has been completed by the Clearance Organization, landowner(s), and or designated Representative, the Clearance Organization is to book the RMAC Operations Planning Officer (LAF) to visit the site and to recommend and agree with the proposed cancellation.

5.2.1 LAF NTS – Once the Cancellation Report has been completed by the Survey team leader, landowner(s) and or designated representative, the report is submitted to the LAF Executive officer for review and first stage approval.

5.2.2. Once the Cancellation Report has been completed and signed by all relevant

personnel then it will be approved by the LMAC Chief of Operations. A flow chart showing the cancellation procedures is attached at (Annex T) to this Chapter.

5.3. IMSMA Action

5.3.1. All hazardous areas that have been cancelled will be retained in IMSMA records for

future reference in the event of further additional information being presented which may result in a review of the areas status.

6. REFERENCES



None 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 24 MINEFIELD CLEARANCE

METHODOLOGY



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 24 MINEFIELD CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Concept of Operations .................................................................................................... 4 5.3. Terminology .................................................................................................................... 5 5.4. Definitions of Terminology .............................................................................................. 5 5.5. High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) (Figure 1.1) .......................................................... 8 5.6. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA) (Figures 1.1. & 1.7.) ............................................ 12 5.7. Confirmation ................................................................................................................. 13 5.8. Confirmation Methodology ............................................................................................ 13 5.9. Verification .................................................................................................................... 14 5.10. Verification Methodology ........................................................................................... 14 5.11. Clearance Methodology for MFA ............................................................................... 15 5.12. Clearance Methodology for HTHA ............................................................................. 16 5.13. Clearance Methodology for LTHA ............................................................................. 17 5.14. Normal Sequence of Clearance for Known Minefields .............................................. 18 5.15. Clearance of Minefields Laid By Unknown Groups ................................................... 19 5.16. Summary ................................................................................................................... 20





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all Mine Action activities in Lebanon are carried out with the minimum exposure to risk, and to ensure that the following Clearance Methodology will enhance the safety and quality of all clearance operations.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All Field Operations involving the release of land from suspected mine or UXO contamination through clearance operations in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Clearance Plan: A Clearance Plan is required for each clearance Site which shall

include the purpose and clearance methodology, to facilitate an effective response to the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be prepared by the LMAC Operations Officer after conducting a Site visit which shall involve a ground appreciation and assessment of the mine/UXO threat. The Clearance Plan shall be agreed between the LMAC Operations Officer and relevant Mine Action Organization representative prior to the commencement of clearance operations at the Site. Any subsequent amendments to the Clearance Plan shall be approved by the LMAC Operations Officer.

3.1.2. High Threat Hazardous Area: A High Threat Hazardous Area is an area with a

confirmed or known presence of a mine or UXO threat. All areas contained within minefield fencing are deemed to be HTHA. The clearance depth for all HTHA in Lebanon is 20 cm.

3.1.3. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA): A Low Threat Hazardous Area are any areas

of land that are suspected of containing a mine or UXO threat. Normally reported dangerous areas requiring Technical Survey or Verification fall into this category. The minimum clearance depth for all LTHA in Lebanon is 10 cm.

3.1.4. Minefield Area Cleared (MFA): The Minefield Area is the area containing mines and

a specified area surrounding the mine rows within a military laid pattern minefield. It can also be a specified area around non-military laid pattern minefields. This area is subject to a minimum 10% confirmation clearance with a second demining asset.




4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders to ensure that all Mine Action clearance activities are implemented in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. The clearance methodology used is dependent upon the type of minefield or hazardous area that is being cleared. For all minefield clearance operations in Lebanon the following clearance methodology is to be used.

5.1.2. The clearance methodology described below has been developed to deal with

“military laid pattern” minefields, such as the majority of those laid in Lebanon. Where minefields or dangerous areas are encountered that fall outside this category then conventional mine clearance methods will be used such as technical survey followed by block clearance of specified areas, however the methodology described within this chapter can also be applied to non military laid minefields with site specific clearance plans being written to suit.

5.1.3. The clearance methodology was developed with the following factors in mind:

a. The majority of minefields are ‘military laid pattern minefields’. Mines are laid

in rows approximately 0.5 to 1.0 meters from each other with 1.2 to 2.4 meters between the rows.

b. Detailed sketch maps were available for the majority of the minefields. c. The majority of the minefields and dangerous areas were well known by the

local population. d. The majority of minefields were around former military positions or approach

routes leading to these positions and along the southern border, known as the ‘Blue Line’.

e. The majority of minefields were normally marked and fenced or had remnants

of fencing still visible.

5.2. Concept of Operations

5.2.1. The general Concept of Operations adopted in Lebanon to clear known recorded military laid pattern minefields is to use mechanical and MDD assets for area reduction and clearing access routes to the minefield perimeter (normally visible minefield fence); then manual clearance assets are used to clear into the minefield and locate the mine rows, once the mine rows, mine orientation and pattern are




confirmed, then manually clear the known mine rows. Once the mine rows and the area known as the Minefield Area (MFA) have been manually cleared then Confirmation clearance by a second asset of a minimum of 10% over the MFA (mine rows) will be conducted. Mechanical and MDD assets can then be used to clear the peripheral areas outside of the MFA, inside and outside the minefield fence.

5.2.2. This concept of operations is a general guide only and can be developed or altered

to suit the mine threat situation or site conditions.

5.3. Terminology

5.3.1. The clearance methodology defined in this chapter is based on a descending scale of threat starting from the known threat area containing mines and working outwards to areas containing no threat. Each area defined requires a selected type of clearance to achieve the requirements of this chapter. To clarify the areas defined in the clearance methodology the following terms and definitions were developed (See Figure: 1.1.).

a. Minefield Area Cleared (MFA). b. High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA). c. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA). d. Confirmation. e. Verification.

5.4. Definitions of Terminology

5.4.1. The MFA is the area containing the mine rows, between the mine rows and a set perimeter around the mine rows. This area is defined as an area that has been physically and systematically processed by a demining Organization to ensure the removal and/or destruction of all mine and UXO hazards to a minimum depth of 20cm.

5.4.2. The MFA shall be subject to all internal and external QA checks in accordance with

Company SOP’s and NMAS. The MFA is also considered part of the High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) and is subjected to a minimum 10% confirmation clearance using Mechanical, MDD or Manual assets in accordance with these NMAS and IMAS. If another manual clearance asset completes this confirmation clearance, it should not be the original manual clearance team.

5.4.3. The MFA of “military laid pattern minefields” is always cleared manually. The

minimum required clearance depth for the MFA in Lebanon is 20 cm from the natural ground.




5.4.4. The MFA includes the following:

a. The area of the known mine rows and between the mine rows, plus a distance

of three (3) meters extending outwards from the last located mine at each end of the mine rows or the mine row marker if it is located.

b. Outside of the mine rows a distance equal to a mine row width measured

outwards from the centre of the outermost mine row. This distance is equal to the greatest distance between any two of the mine rows in that minefield. See Figures 1.2. and 1.3. below.

Figure: 1.1. Areas Defined In Methodology




HTHA

This distance is equal to the widest distance between any

two mine rows within the minefield

A minimum of three (3m) from the last mine found or the mine row markers in the

longest row at both ends

3m

3m

MFAC

1.2m

High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA)

Existing Minefield Fencing

Military Laid Pattern Minefield (Row)

Minefield Area Cleared (MFAC) Manually cleared to 20cm

Legend

1.2m

Figure: 1.2. Minefield Area (MFA)




Figure: 1.3.

Photograph of the MFA on the Ground

The yellow pickets indicate where AP mines have been located and destroyed in a minefield containing 4 mine rows

5.5. High Threat Hazardous Area (HTHA) (Figure 1.1)

5.5.1. A High Threat Hazardous Area is an area with a confirmed or known presence of a mine or UXO threat. All areas contained within minefield fencing are deemed to be HTHA. The clearance depth for all HTHA in Lebanon is 20 cm from the natural ground.




5.5.2. High Threat Hazardous Areas shall be subject to all internal and external QA checks

in accordance with NMAS and IMAS. All High Threat Hazardous Areas will be marked and recorded in the Minefield Completion Report.

5.5.3. The HTHA area includes:

a. For fenced minefields all areas contained within the minefield fence (including

the MFA) (Figure: 1.4). b. For unfenced minefields a distance of fifteen (15) meters from the outer edge

of the “Minefield Area” (MFA) boundaries as explained above (Figure: 1.5). c. In some instances minefield fencing has been removed on one or more sides

of a minefield, therefore the 15 m distance is applied to this particular portion of the minefield (Figure: 1.6).

5.5.4. The required clearance depth for any HTHA in Lebanon is 20 cm from the natural

ground.

5.5.5. Mechanical flail assets are never used as a sole clearance tool in any High Threat hazardous Areas (HTHA) and will always be followed by manual or MDD clearance, however in a LTHA or suspected hazardous areas (SHA) where there is no previous history or evidence of mines or UXO in the area and mechanical flailing is conducted as a verification/community confidence building operation then the LMAC Operations Department may authorize on a site-by-site basis mechanical flailing without the follow up second asset clearance. However a second clearance asset must follow any mechanical verification or clearance conducted in any LTHA that has a previous history or evidence of a threat.




Figure: 1.4. Minefield with Fencing




Figure: 1.5. Minefield without Fencing




5.6. Low Threat Hazardous Area (LTHA) (Figures 1.1. & 1.7.)

5.6.1. A Low Threat Hazardous Area are any areas of land that are suspected of containing

a mine or UXO threat. Reported Dangerous Areas requiring Technical Survey or Verification fall into this category. The minimum clearance depth for all LTHA in Lebanon is 10 cm. LTHA can be defined into three categories as follows:

a. LTHA surrounding fenced and unfenced Israeli/South Lebanese Army (SLA)

laid minefields.

b. Reported Dangerous Areas that do not have a history of any previous incident or accident caused by a mine or UXO and do not have any visible evidence that indicates that the area may contain a mine or UXO hazard.

5.6.2. Low Threat Hazardous Areas to be cleared will be agreed upon by the LMAC and

the Clearance Organizations during the initial recon to establish the operational clearance/survey plan; however this maybe amended as the clearance operation progresses. All requests to check and/or clear Low Threat Hazardous Areas shall be in writing and shall remain on site in the Task Dossier.

5.6.3. The LTHA includes:

a. Any suspected areas outside the parameters of the High Threat Hazardous

Area (HTHA). b. Control points, administration areas and access lanes outside the HTHA. c. A width of 2 meters completely surrounding the outer perimeter of the

minefield fence (See Figure: 1.7). d. Area underneath the minefield fence. e. For unfenced minefields a distance of 2 m outside the recommended 15 m

HTHA from the outer edge of the MFA as shown in figure: 1.5. (See Notes below)

5.6.4. If a Mechanical Flail Asset is used to clear or verify a LTHA as defined in paragraph

5.6.1.a and b above, this LTHA shall be cleared after flailing by a second clearance asset to guarantee total clearance to 10 cm.

5.6.5. If a Mechanical Flail Asset is used to clear or verify a LTHA as defined in paragraph

5.6.1.a. and b above depending on the history, terrain & vegetation, soil conditions and intended land use of the suspected LTHA the requirement to put a second asset behind a mechanical flail asset may not be required. This decision will be assessed (threat assessment) and approved by the LMAC on a site-by-site basis and a site-specific clearance plan will be written for that site.

5.6.6. If mines are located in any part of a LTHA then this area shall be upgraded to a

HTHA and cleared accordingly to 20 cm from the natural ground. The size of this




upgraded area will be determined by the LMAC Operations Section.

5.6.7. The required minimum clearance depth for LTHA in Lebanon is 10 cm.

Notes:

1. If mine clearance starts from the MFA outwards and the 15 m HTHA are

cleared without any items being located then the clearance of the 2 m LTHA may not be required. This may be approved by the LMAC on a site-by-site basis depending on a threat assessment.

2. If any items are found within the 15 m HTHA then a 10m x 10m box will be

cleared around each item and the LTHA applied outside this if required.

5.7. Confirmation

5.7.1. Within Lebanon the Lebanon Mine Action Centre (LMAC) requires that all clearance Organizations conduct a minimum of 10% secondary clearance (confirmation) calculated from the total m² of the entire HTHA by another asset. This confirmation is a form of “Internal Sampling” which shall be carried out by the clearance Organization.

5.7.2. Confirmation is a process undertaken on all Mine Field Area (MFA) areas following

the location and destruction of mine/UXO contamination during the clearance phase of operations.

5.7.3. The process of confirmation is the physical and systematic processing by a second

demining asset type across a minimum of 10% of the MFA.

5.7.4. Confirmation clearance shall be subject to all internal and external QA checks in accordance with NMAS and IMAS. All Confirmation Areas will be marked and recorded in the Minefield Completion Report.

5.8. Confirmation Methodology

5.8.1. Confirmation using a second asset is mandatory for all sites and this is calculated and applied as follows:

a. Calculated as 10% of all of the cleared HTHA in m². b. 10% confirmation clearance is carried out over the area of the MFA only (mine

rows). However if the calculated 10% of the HTHA is greater than the m² of the MFA then the remaining confirmation clearance will be applied over the HTHA around the MFA.

c. Secondary clearance can be conducted by Mechanical, MDD or Manual

assets (if a manual asset is used then a different manual team to that who




conducted the clearance is to be used).

Notes:

1. Any mechanical asset used for confirmation must be accredited to clear to 20

cm from the natural ground (BOZENA 3 and MINECAT 230 cannot be used to conduct confirmation clearance).

2. MDD can be used for confirmation in the MFA depending on the LMAC MDD

QA Officers assessment, taking into consideration the effects of demolitions, weather conditions and the duration since the mine rows were cleared.

5.9. Verification

5.9.1. Verification is the process by which a machine, dogs or manual clearance assets verify or determine whether or not a mine/UXO suspected LTHA area contains a threat. In Lebanon this is synonymous with the term “Area Reduction”. Verification or Area Reduction is done as part of a Technical Survey, which in turn is based upon information received as a result of a General Survey.

5.9.2. Verification is normally only used in a suspected LTHA; once a threat has been

identified (normally by a detonation or a find) then the area will be upgraded to a HTHA and a comprehensive clearance plan will be written for a clearance operation.

5.9.3. Verification of areas will only take place after a comprehensive General Survey

(Level 1) has been conducted. If the threat assessment of the area is such that a clearance asset is to be committed then normal clearance procedures will be applied. If the threat assessment deems that the area does not warrant a clearance asset then the area should be “cancelled”. See Chapter 23 to these NMAS for the cancellation criteria.

5.9.4. If a verification task is committed to an area that cannot be “cancelled” due to a lack

of confidence from the local community or landowner then a clearance asset may be deployed as a public confidence operation only. This type of operation maybe conducted as a reduced technical survey task and maybe approved on a site-by-site basis.

5.9.5. When mechanical flails are used in this type of verification operation then the use of

a second clearance asset after flailing may not be required. However the LMAC will approve this on a site-by-site basis.

5.10. Verification Methodology

5.10.1. The type of asset used to conduct the verification is dictated by the nature of the suspected threat, vegetation and terrain of the area. If a mine is located during this process the asset is withdrawn immediately from the area and the LMAC Operations




Section will re-evaluate the area and change to a full mine clearance operation if required.

5.10.2. A portion of or all of the area undergoing verification maybe upgraded to a HTHA and

cleared accordingly.

Clearance Methodology for Each Threat Area

5.11. Clearance Methodology for MFA

5.11.1. Mandatory manual clearance of the entire MFA area is to 20 cm from the natural ground.

5.11.2. No MDD is used as a primary clearance tool in the MFA (due to possible confusing

multiple indications).

5.11.3. No Mechanical flailing is conducted in the MFA unless absolutely No Number 4 AP mines or “cocked striker fused” type mines are contained in the minefield. If mechanical assets are used as the primary clearance tool to clear mined areas not containing the above type of mines then a second clearance asset must be used to confirm 100% clearance has been achieved. The LMAC must approve in writing prior to any such mechanical clearance of known mined areas.

5.11.4. Vegetation cutting inside the MFA is permitted – before clearance of the mine rows if

access is possible. This is done by the Strimmer only (CAT 215/225 Strimmer can operate from a safe area (LTHA once cleared) reaching out to 5-8 m) (see Note.1. below) Otherwise it is conducted after the manual clearance of the mine rows but in both cases is conducted from the cleared LTHA or a clear/safe area.

Notes:

1. The Strimmer would normally work in conjunction with MDD Assets and will cut vegetation from a safe or previously cleared area out to its full working radius. If the area to be strimmed is wide and cannot be strimmed in one operation then the strimmer will clear in panels, these panels are then cleared by MDD assets after the required stand-down period of 2-7 days after strimmer operations. Once MDD assets clear the panel then the strimmer will move onto this area and prepare the next panel.

2. It should be noted that normally all mines are located and destroyed in-situ by

demolitions only in exceptional circumstances will mines be neutralized and removed for destruction at different site, in all cases mines are destroyed on the day they are located. Any changes to the normal destroy in-situ policy must be authorized by the LMAC.

3. Under normal circumstances the Number 4 AP mine fitted with the No 9

Igniter is not to be neutralized. If these mines have to be destroyed in-situ




near a dwelling then protective works must be used. In certain circumstances where it is required to neutralize this mine then authorization must be given by the LMAC.

5.12. Clearance Methodology for HTHA

5.12.1. Clearance can be either by:

a. Manual (mandatory for MFA). b. MDD as the primary clearance tool if vegetation permits or 4 days after

burning vegetation (except for MFA). c. Mechanical ground preparation followed by MDD after a 2 to 7 days stand

down period (not used over MFA but can be used after MFA manual clearance completed for the remaining HTHA within minefield fencing or out to 15 m if no fencing).

d. Mechanical flail can only be used as the primary clearance tool if it is known

there are NO No4 AP mines or ‘cocked striker fused’ type mines laid in the minefield. Mechanical flailing will always be followed by MDD and manual clearance.

Figure: 1.6.

Photograph shows the 15m HTHA outside the MFA on a known recorded minefield without a minefield fence.




5.13. Clearance Methodology for LTHA

5.13.1. Any clearance asset can be used for the clearance of any LTHA as long as the

minimum required clearance depth of 10 cm is achieved.

5.13.2. Clearance Organizations can use any of the following assets to clear the LTHA.

a. Manual clearance teams. b. MDD teams. c. Mechanical flail followed by MDD or Manual (see Figure 1.6. above). d. Mechanical vegetation cutting followed by MDD or Manual.

5.13.3. MDD can be used for primary clearance if vegetation permits, or if the vegetation is

burnt. MDD can follow after a minimum of 4 days. If MDD is following vegetation cutting/ground preparation by a mechanical asset the wait period is 2 to 7 days (depending on asset used).

5.13.4. Mechanical flails can be used as the primary clearance tool in this area so long as

they are followed by another asset (see Figure 1.6. above). However if No4 AP mines or mines fitted with a “cocked striker” type fuze are located then mechanical flailing will stop and the clearance plan adjusted accordingly.

5.13.5. In all cases if any mines are found in a LTHA a 10m x 10m box is cleared manually

to a depth of 20 cm from the natural ground around the located items or the seat of detonation and the area is treated as a HTHA. A risk assessment of the area is then completed by the LMAC Planning Team to ascertain if a change to the clearance/survey plan is required.

Figure: 1.7.




LTHA cleared around the outside of the minefield fence

5.14. Normal Sequence of Clearance for Known Minefields

5.14.1. The following is the normal sequence of clearance of military laid pattern minefields contained within minefield fencing. This may vary slightly from site to site, but is a general guide:

a. LMAC Operations/IMSMA Section prepares the Task Dossier with all available

information and mapping. b. The Task Dossier is then issued to the clearance Organization as a task. c. Locate the minefield on the ground using the minefield maps. d. Clear the vehicle and foot access lanes around the outside of the minefield

outside of any LTHA using a combination of manual, mechanical or MDD assets as required.

e. Use suitable assets to clear the LTHA outside the minefield fence (2 meters

minimum if fencing exists). All or one side of the minefield maybe accessed at once depending on the ground.

f. Manually clear lanes into the minefield area to locate the mine rows. MDD

assets may be used to locate the first mine row if vegetation permits. g. Manually clear the mine rows and the entire MFA perimeters to 20 cm from

the natural ground. h. Complete the clearance of the HTHA inside the minefield fencing with suitable

clearance assets. i. Conduct a 10% minimum confirmation of the MFA by alternative clearance

asset (normally Mechanical or MDD, but Manual can be used again). j. Remove the minefield fencing and clear the LTHA underneath it. k. Mark up the cleared area/s for Quality Assurance Completion (indicate all

turning points). l. Complete the Quality Assurance formal completion process to the LMAC and

landowner or landowner’s representative. m. The completed Task Dossier is returned to the LMAC with all site

documentation and the compiled QA completion form. n. The LMAC checks the Task Dossier for accuracy and ensures all site

documentation is included. o. The RMAC compiles the Formal Handover Certificate for LMAC approval.




p. The LMAC approves and accepts the Formal Handover Certificate. q. Copies of Formal Handover Certificate are distributed to clearance

Organization. r. The LMAC formally hands the cleared area back to the landowner. s. All relevant information is entered into IMSMA. t. The Task Dossier is archived.

Notes:

1. All areas cleared are subject to Internal Quality Control and External Quality

Assurance checks in accordance with the NMAS and IMAS. 2. The sequence described above is in its simplified form; this sequence can

vary slightly depending on each site requirements.

5.15. Clearance of Minefields Laid By Unknown Groups

5.15.1. Within Lebanon there are numerous minefields laid by various factions and groups over an extended period of time including over the period of the Israeli occupation. The clearance methodology described above has been developed for “military laid pattern” minefields such as those laid by the Israeli Forces and their militia. It has been now established that minefields have been laid by various other parties which do not conform to normal “military” doctrine, therefore the clearance methodology used to clear these areas will be developed as the clearance operation progresses or as a result of information gained during a Technical Survey.

5.15.2. The terminology and distances applicable to “military laid pattern” minefields will also

be applied to those unrecorded/unknown minefields. The LMAC will prepare a site-specific clearance plan for areas containing unrecorded/unknown types of minefields. The clearance plan will be based on an “Area Reduction” approach, which will be based on a thorough “Threat Assessment” taking into consideration the following factors:

a. General Survey information. b. Tactical appreciation of the area (ground). c. Technical Survey information. d. Type and area of threat located. e. Previous “mine laying” history of the group who laid the mines.




5.15.3. In dangerous areas that are suspected of being laid by other parties the emphasis

should be on conducting “Area Reduction” to localize the threat. Once the threat has been localized or the boundaries ascertained then “block clearance” should be conducted. Initial block clearance will assist the clearance Organization in ascertaining any mine laying “pattern” being employed. If a mine pattern is ascertained then the distances applicable to a military laid pattern minefield maybe applied.

5.15.4. Any clearance conducted on unknown/unrecorded minefields that have a confirmed

presence of mines, history of an accident or incident should be directed to the site of the confirmed presence. From this point the clearance should be conducted in an ever increasing radius around the site to ascertain the extent and type of threat. If a mine pattern is ascertained then the distances applicable to a military laid pattern minefield maybe applied.

5.15.5. In all cases of unknown/unrecorded minefields the LMAC will monitor Technical

Survey/clearance progress and adjust the clearance plan or clearance methodology to suit. However the basic principles, restrictions and guidelines of employment of manual, MDD or mechanical assets apply.

5.16. Summary

5.16.1. Due to the nature of the threat that may be encountered or is yet to be encountered within Lebanon it is not possible to “template” all clearance methodologies within these NMAS, therefore each new threat encountered will be assessed by the LMAC in consultation with the clearance Organization and an applicable site specific clearance plan and methodology will be agreed upon.

6. REFERENCES


standard and which form part of the provisions of this standard. IMAS 09.10 Clearance Requirements (Ed.2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 09.11 Battle Area Clearance (Ed. 1) IMAS 09.20 Guidelines for Post Clearance Sampling (Ed.2 Amendments 1,2,3 & 4)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 25 BOOBY TRAP CLEARANCE

METHODOLOGY



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 25 BOOBYTRAP CLEARANCE METHODOLOGY


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3 5.2. Methodology for Booby Trap “Verification” ..................................................................... 4 5.3. Methodology for Booby Trap “Clearance” (Known Presence) ........................................ 5 5.4. Booby Trap “Clearance” Distances Clearance of Unrecorded Explosive Devices .......... 7 5.5. Supervision ..................................................................................................................... 8 5.6. Demolitions of Booby Traps ............................................................................................ 8 5.7. Summary ........................................................................................................................ 8





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that all demining activities in Lebanon are carried out - with the minimum exposure to risk, and to ensure that the following Clearance Methodology will enhance the safety and quality of all clearance operations.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All Field Operations involving the release of land from suspected mine or Booby trap contamination through clearance operations in Lebanon.

3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Booby trap: An explosive or non-explosive device, or other material, deliberately

placed to cause casualties when an apparently harmless object is disturbed or a normally safe act is performed.

3.1.2. Hazardous area: Contaminated area.

3.1.3. Suspected hazardous Area (SHA): An area suspected of containing a contamination

hazard. 4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors

and Team Leaders to ensure that all Mine Action clearance activities are implemented in accordance with National Mine Action Standards.

5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. A number of Israeli laid booby traps have been located and cleared in south Lebanon. These booby traps have consisted of professionally made devices, which can incorporate pressure, tripwire, anti-lift or command activation. In some cases three means of activation have been incorporated into one booby trap device.

5.1.2. Generally Israeli laid booby traps have been found in access routes or valleys

leading to former military positions. They have also been located in what is




assessed to be former firing positions or mortar base plate positions that were used by resistance forces to attack their positions.

5.1.3. A clearance methodology has been developed for the “verification” of suspected

booby trap sites or the “clearance” of known recorded booby traps. These methodologies are applied after an extensive review process and General Survey of the known or suspected booby trap area has been conducted.

5.1.4. The methodology used for the clearance of booby traps (BT) is dependent on

whether or not the booby trap has been physically confirmed or not. All booby trap items have to be accounted for either through the actual location and clearance of the items or through the location and confirmation clearance of the area where the items have been detonated or been previously cleared by a third party.

5.1.5. Personnel involved with the clearance of booby traps must be appropriately qualified

and experienced and will be subjected to the conditions outlined under Supervision in this chapter.

5.2. Methodology for Booby Trap “Verification”

5.2.1. The verification methodology is applied when no known or confirmed presence of a device exists. The following general clearance methodology is applied:

a. From an agreed known safe start point a two (2) meters wide access lane is

made to within 35 meters of the agreed BT location (UTM). This access lane is considered to be in a low threat hazardous area (LTHA) and can be cleared with manual, mechanical or MDD clearance assets (The 35 m distance may be increased depending on the ground and threat assessment). The minimum clearance depth for this access lane is 10 cm.

b. Manual clearance is then conducted for the remaining 35 meters up to the

agreed BT location (UTM), and additionally a 20 meters by 20 meters box around the agreed BT UTM location is cleared. This access lane and the 20m x 20m box area is considered to be a HTHA and is always cleared by manual assets only to a depth of 20 cm from the natural ground. (See Figure: 1.1. below)

c. If nothing is located within the 20m x 20m box then the LMAC is consulted to

either accept that there is no threat, or to extend the search area to other identified likely areas. This will require a formal amendment to the BT clearance plan.

d. If a BT or devices are located then the BT Clearance Methodology (below) is

followed.




Figure: 1.1. Booby trap Agreed Target “Verification” Methodology

5.3. Methodology for Booby Trap “Clearance” (Known Presence)

5.3.1. When a booby trap is known or there is a booby trap record and information for it, then the booby trap “Clearance” methodology will be applied as follows:

a. From an agreed known safe start point a two (2) meters wide access lane is

made to within 35 meters of the agreed known BT location (UTM). This access lane is considered to be in a low threat hazardous area (LTHA) and can be cleared with manual, mechanical or MDD clearance assets (The 35 m distance may be increased depending on the ground and threat assessment). The minimum clearance depth for this access lane is 10 cm.

b. Manual clearance is then conducted for the remaining 35 meters distance to

the agreed known BT location. This area is considered to be a HTHA and is




always cleared by manual assets only to a depth of 20 cm from the natural ground. (See Figure: 1.2. below).

c. From each BT explosive devices located; manually clear out to 5 m on each

side creating a 10m x 10m box (HTHA) centered over the explosive item. If the cleared items are in a random pattern then this area is normally “squared off” to make the handover completion sketches easier to compile. So long as the minimum cleared 5 m rule is applied around all items.

d. If all explosive devices are located as per the recorded information provided

on the BT record then the LMAC may approve that the clearance of the additional 15m x 15m HTHA around the located items is not necessary. This will be authorized only on a site-by-site basis.

e. If all BT items are not located as per the BT record then a further 15 meters is

then cleared around the above manually cleared box on all sides. This area is also considered HTHA and is cleared manually.

Figure: 1.2. Booby Trap Agreed Target “Clearance” Methodology




5.4. Booby Trap “Clearance” Distances Clearance of Unrecorded Explosive

Devices

5.4.1. Unrecorded explosive devices other than recorded Israeli booby traps have been located within Lebanon. These explosive devices can consist of the following types of systems:

a. HE Mortar shells or Rocket Propelled Grenade rockets (RPG) connected by

detonating cord to a number of anti personnel mines as the initiation set. b. Anti tank mines connected by detonating cord to a number of anti personnel

mines as the initiation set. c. Blast anti tank mines enhanced with fragmentation connected by detonating

cord to a number of anti personnel mines as the initiation set and/or set up for command detonation.

d. Diesel fuel oil and fertilizer mix (ANFO) packed in metal containers and

enhanced with metal scrap, connected by detonating cord to a number of anti personnel mines as the initiation set and/or set up for command detonation.

e. Omni directional fragmentation charges disguised under imitation fiberglass

“rocks” connected by detonating cord to a number of anti personnel mines as the initiation set. Normally referred to as “Rock mines”.

f. Tripwire activated HE grenades connected to an improvised main charge. g. Any of the above may also be fitted with tripwire activation or anti-lift devices.

5.4.2. The clearance methodology for clearance of these explosive devices is as per the

“clearance” methodology for known booby traps. The 5 m rule around all items is to be applied and once all connected items have been cleared the remaining 15 m HTHA is also to be cleared around this area. Unlike a recorded BT site the HTHA must be cleared to ensure no other devices exist in the immediate area.

5.4.3. If unrecorded explosive devices are located within the boundaries of the MFA or

HTHA of a minefield then these devices are cleared within the parameters of this minefield as described in NMAS Chapter 24.

5.4.4. The LMAC may adjust the clearance methodology for clearance around any

explosive devices located during clearance operations as a result of a though threat assessment on site. Any changes to the standard BT clearance methodology are to be approved in writing by the LMAC and are to be annotated on the clearance plan.

5.4.5. In all cases the minimum clearance depth for explosive devices within Lebanon is 20

cm. However this maybe increased depending on the type and nature of the explosive device located.




5.5. Supervision

5.5.1. Due to the nature of the threat only suitably qualified Supervisors are to be

responsible for the supervision of booby trap clearance teams.

5.5.2. Supervisors and booby trap clearance teams are to be operationally accredited and licenced by the LMAC prior to deploying on booby trap clearance operations.

5.6. Demolitions of Booby Traps

5.6.1. All booby traps or explosive devices located are to be destroyed in-situ by demolitions unless approved in writing by the LMAC.

5.6.2. If booby traps or explosive devices are requested to be neutralized and recovered for

training purposes, then the LMAC must approve this in writing. If approved then all devices attached to the BT or explosive devices are to be pulled as per mine clearance pulling drills described in NMAS Chapter 4. A 30 minutes minimum wait time is to be observed after pulling any explosive device attached to a booby trap.

5.7. Summary

5.7.1. Due to the nature of the threat that may be encountered or is yet to be encountered within Lebanon it is not possible to “template” all clearance methodologies within this chapter, therefore each new threat encountered will be assessed by the LMAC in consultation with the clearance Organization and an applicable site specific clearance plan and methodology will be agreed upon.

6. REFERENCES

None 7. ATTACHMENTS

None

CHAPTER 26 CLEARANCE SITE ADMINISTRATION



SUBJECT: CHAPTER 26 CLEARANCE SITE ADMINISTRATION


REV LEVEL

REV DATE


Page Para.






5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4 5.2. Site Map ......................................................................................................................... 4 5.3. Drawing a Site Map ........................................................................................................ 4 5.4. Map Information .............................................................................................................. 5 5.5. Visitors Brief.................................................................................................................... 8 5.6. Operations Brief .............................................................................................................. 8 5.7. Safety Brief ..................................................................................................................... 8 5.8. Task Dossier ................................................................................................................... 9





1. PURPOSE

1.1. The purpose of this chapter is to ensure that clearance activities are carried out with the essential personnel, equipment and procedures in place.

2. SCOPE

2.1. All demining operations. 3. DEFINITION


3.1.1. Administration Area: Administration Areas are normally located outside the

Fragmentation Hazard Zone in support of clearance operations. Administration Areas may accommodate personnel, Mine Detection Dogs, vehicles, equipment and items removed during clearance at the Site.

3.1.2. Briefing area or Control Point: In the context of clearance operations, a clearly

identifiable control point intended to be the first point of entry to a demining worksite. The briefing area contains a plan of the minefield and its current level of clearance, at a scale large enough for briefing purposes, showing the location of control points (car park, first aid point, explosive storage areas, the areas where mine clearance work is progressing and distances), and where safety equipment is issued to visitors.

3.1.3. Site: For the purpose of this NMAS, a Site is an approved location where Mine

Action operations are proposed, active, suspended or completed. Depending on the stage of operations, the Site may include several Designated Areas. In the context of a Demining Accident or Incident, Workplace may used to describe a Site.

3.1.4. Working Area: A Working Area is where clearance is conducted at the Site and is

normally within the Hazardous Area Fragmentation Hazard Zone. A Site may have one or more Working Areas.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1. It is the responsibility of the Mine Action agency, with delegated authority through Supervisors and Team Leaders at all working locations to ensure that all requirements in accordance with National Mine Action Standards are met before any work starts.




5. PROCEDURE

5.1. Introduction

5.1.1. Before work can start at any site the supervisor or person in charge must satisfy himself that the on-site requirements are all in place.

5.2. Site Map

5.2.1. Accurate mapping and recording of mine and UXO clearance operations is extremely valuable for operational planning, conducting Site briefings and as a testimony to the clearance conducted.

5.2.2. Mine Action Organizations shall ensure that all Site Supervisors are capable of

producing an accurate map of the clearance conducted, which shall be updated by the end of the working day in order to reflect the actual clearance on the ground. In circumstances where it is not possible to achieve this on a daily basis then the map shall be updated by the end of each working week. Each separate clearance Site shall have its own map which shall, as accurately as possible, depict all clearance activities conducted during the task duration. The production of the map shall start when clearance commences and shall be finished on completion or suspension of the task. A copy of the Site map and/or a computer generated map (schematic) and, all coordinates shall be submitted to the LMAC with the IMSMA Completion or Suspension report.

5.2.3. In situations when a Site is divided (e.g. CBU-50 Area A, B and C) it may be

necessary to produce a separate map for each area.

5.2.4. The map should be drawn on graph paper or another suitable format and a scale used which shall be sufficient to ensure that the details are unambiguous. It is recommended that where possible, the minimum scale used is 1:1000 (1 m = 10m).

5.2.5. Non permanent markers (e.g. pencils) should be used to draw the map, therefore,

allowing for alterations if required.

5.3. Drawing a Site Map

5.3.1. A Site map should be drawn in the following sequence, on graph paper:

Stage One (Navigate)

a. A DGPS (Differential Global Positioning System) or prismatic compass (degrees) and measuring tape (meters) shall be used to navigate on the ground. A GPS may be used to record points such as the Reference Point (RP), Bench Mark (BM), Start Point (SP) and Perimeter Turning Points (TP’s) however, not to accurately record the course between these points.




b. Locate the RP. c. Measure/record the bearing and distance to the BM and then to the SP. d. From the SP record all perimeter coordinates to each TP returning to the SP.

Ensure that the information is gathered in one direction only.

Stage Two (Plot)

a. Select a point on the map for the RP if possible, and the BM. b. From the BM plot the SP and all perimeters TP’s onto the map using a

protractor and ruler. c. Ensure that the perimeter is plotted in one direction only.

Stage Three

a. Draw/record all other relevant symbols and information.

Stage Four

a. The map shall be updated by the end of each working day.

5.4. Map Information

5.4.1. The Site map shall contain the following information:

1. Map name (in Arabic and/or English). 2. Task number. 3. BM. 4. SP. 5. TP’s. 6. North Pointer. 7. Scale. 8. Legend (this may be on a separate sheet). 9. Control Point / administration area.

10. Mines / UXO located.




11. Cleared and un-cleared areas.

5.4.2. In addition, the Site Supervisor shall have the following information available at the

Site:

1. Site Supervisor and Team ID 2. Task Start Date. 3. A record of the RP, BM and SP (UTM coordinates using a GPS/DGPS). 4. A List of the Site map perimeter coordinates (using degrees and meters) in

sequence from the RP. 5. Map legend (if not included on map). 6. The location of accidents / Incidents which occurred at the Site. 7. Date of last External QA Inspection at the Site. 8. Date of Last CASEVAC exercise at the Site. 9. Task Dossier. 10. Daily Work Sheet (or Diary). 11. Site Clearance Plan. 12. Organization SOP pertaining to the operations at the Site.

5.4.3. Map Colours

5.4.4. The following colours should be used on Site maps:

a. Red – Explosive Ordnance (Mines / UXO). b. Green or yellow – working areas, cleared areas. c. Blue – water features. d. Black – other symbols.




Figure: 1.1. Example of a Task Map




5.5. Visitors Brief

5.5.1. All Site visitors shall be given a brief by the Site Supervisor in a designated safe area (e.g. control point or administration area) prior to being allowed into the Working Area. The briefing shall be conducted in English or the pertinent language to ensure that all visitors understand the content of the brief. The briefing shall include details concerning the clearance and safety.

5.6. Operations Brief

5.6.1. The operations brief shall include the following:

a. Ground orientation. b. History – what, when, where, who, why, how? c. Organization structure. d. Clearance procedures.

e. Map brief – symbols and clearance.

5.7. Safety Brief

5.7.1. The safety brief shall include the following:

a. Organization marking system, in particularly clear/unclear areas. b. Actions on controlled demolitions. c. Actions on uncontrolled explosion. d. Casualty evacuation plan. e. Conduct of visitors (do’s and don’ts). f. Wearing of PPE (Personal Protective Equipment).

See (Annex X) – Site Visitors Operations Brief (Example) and (Annex Y) Site Visitors Safety Brief (Example).




5.8. Task Dossier

5.8.1. The task dossier shall be issued by the LMAC to the Mine Action Organization prior

to the commencement of pertinent demining operations. The dossier shall include one or more tasks generally within the same area. Each task is allocated a unique IMSMA task number by the LMAC. For example: Task Dossier 1-003 (indicating Area 1 – Dossier Number 3) may contain 5 Tasks: CBU-10, 20, 30, 40 and 50.

5.8.2. Normally the Mine Action Organization shall separate the dossier into individual

dossiers containing a single task. This dossier shall be retained by the Site Supervisor at the Site during operations and returned to the LMAC on completion or suspension of the task. This task dossier should contain the following information:

a. Completion or Suspension report including the perimeter coordinates for

cleared and un-cleared areas within the Site; b. Map (schematic) of the Site; c. Photograph of the Reference Point and Bench Mark; d. Dangerous Area (DA) report; e. Clearance Plan; f. Community Liaison Final Clearance Certificate; g. Daily work sheets; h. Internal QA reports; i. External QA reports; j. Site visitor logs; k. Accident/incident reports.




6. REFERENCES



IMAS 09.10 Clearance Requirements (Ed.2 Amendments 1, 2 & 3) IMAS 10.20 S&OH Demining Worksite Safety (Ed. 1 Amendments 1,2,3, 4 & 5)

7. ATTACHMENTS

None